Healthcare Trailblazers

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 09/14/2018 - 12:33
Display Headline
Healthcare Trailblazers

Younger generations blaze new paths through the American economy. Fifteen years ago, Generation X was fresh out of college and flush with the unimagined potential of the Internet. They helped change the way the world shared information and conducted business. The impact of such innovation and enthusiasm for new technology is still felt today.

The healthcare sector possesses pioneers of its own, many with the same kind of drive and vision as the dot-com entrepreneurs of the 1990s. Fifteen years from now, today’s young hospitalists—shaped by ever-changing demands and healthcare hurdles—will be recognized as an authority in the new ways patient care is delivered.

We’re not just super-residents. We’re highly trained specialists in the care of hospitalized patients and the process of making care in hospital better.

—Brian Markoff, MD, FHM, associate professor of medicine, Mount Sinai Hospitalist Group, New York City

Bijo Chacko, MD, FHM, former chair of SHM’s Young Physicians Committee, sees energy in the newest generation of hospitalists. He also sees great potential from residents who are finishing their training and considering their job options. Until recently, SHM’s Young Physicians Committee operated as a task force. The group’s growth and increased young-physician representation throughout the society prompted SHM leadership to promote the task force to full committee status.

“The wonderful thing is that we have received lots of input from around the country and dramatically increased membership in the past few years,” says Dr. Chacko, hospital medicine medical director for Preferred Health Partners in New York City. “We have moved from simply gathering information about young physicians in hospital medicine to actively disseminating it, including the new Resident’s Corner [department in The Hospitalist]. It addresses the needs of residents and introduces them to the nuances and specifics of hospital medicine.”

Pediatric Hospitalist Conference Expands Program, Attracts a Crowd

Since its inception six years ago, the Pediatric Hospital Medicine Conference has more than doubled in size and scope. Co-sponsored by the American Academy of Pediatrics (AAP), the Ambulatory Pediatric Association (APA), and SHM, this year’s annual meeting—July 23-26 in Tampa, Fla.—will offer fresh content to more than 300 pediatric hospitalists from around the country.

Conference chairman Daniel Rauch, MD, FAAP, FHM, attributes the growth to the conference’s mix of programs and the networking opportunities.

“When I’m at the conference, I’m stopped almost every hour by hospitalists who thank us for putting the conference together,” says Dr. Rauch, director of the pediatric hospitalist program at the New York University School of Medicine. “Many of them are working hard and rarely have the opportunity to network with their peers. When they’re here, they say, ‘Oh, my God, I’m not alone.’ ”

The expanded program includes an oral plenary session, a poster session, and pre-courses on critical care and data analysis. For the first time, content for the plenary and poster sessions will be unique to PHM09; in years past, the sessions presented content from the sponsoring societies’ annual conferences.

“All of the annual conferences have great content,” Dr. Rauch says, “but if you’re a pediatric hospitalist and can only go to one event, this is the one.”—BS

Pediatric Hospital Medicine 2009

WHEN: July 23-26

WHERE: Tampa (Fla.) Marriott Waterside Hotel and Marina

For more info: Visit SHM’s online event listings at www.hospitalmedicine.org/events

GET INVOLVED: To join the pediatric hospitalist listserv, e-mail nalexander@aap.org.

The demand for information has spurred the launch of a young physicians section (www.hospitalmedicine.org/youngdoctor) on SHM’s Web site. Combined with SHM’s online career center (www.hospitalmedicine.org/careercenter), the new microsites provide young physicians a broad range of information about the specialty and—most importantly—HM career options.

Natural Progression

Four out of five large hospitals now use hospitalists, and as more hospitals implement HM programs, more residents will be exposed to the hospitalist model of care. For residents, the allure of an HM career is broad and deep. In many ways, HM is the logical extension of residency training. Brian Markoff, MD, FHM, a hospitalist and associate professor of medicine at Mount Sinai Hospitalist Group in New York City, was a chief resident when he founded the hospitalist program at the University of California at Davis Health System in Sacramento in 1998.

 

 

“Creating the hospitalist program at UC-Davis was pretty easy,” Dr. Markoff says. “All of the program’s founders were chief residents at the time. The people involved were warm to the idea, and we could teach without being in the fellowship program. Residents are already very comfortable treating patients in the hospital setting.”

Dr. Markoff says practicing hospitalists are a positive influence on residents who are still undecided on a career path. “If you’re a good role model, they’ll be interested in hospital medicine,” he says.

Diversity of Patients, Issues, Settings

Dr. Markoff and others caution that HM encompasses more than an expansion of a resident’s standard roles and responsibilities. “We’re not just super-residents,” he says. “We’re highly trained specialists in the care of hospitalized patients and the process of making care in hospital better.”

Medical conditions, patient issues, and administrative situations that often are outside a resident’s scope quickly come into focus for a new hospitalist. When Mona Patel, DO, associate director of hospitalist services at Staten Island University Hospital in New York, chose an HM career five years ago, the diversity in opportunities was a major draw. Like many hospitalists, she knew she would enjoy the type of care she provides to patients.

“I liked the acuity of the patients and disease processes; it was much more interesting and exciting for me than ongoing outpatient care of chronic diseases,” Dr. Patel says. “I liked the interaction with the hospital house staff and lots of consultants. If I had questions about a patient, I could easily consult with a specialist within the hospital.”

In addition to providing bedside care, new hospitalists often find themselves at the forefront of a monumental change in how healthcare is provided nationwide. Quality improvement (QI) initiatives, such as reducing preventable diseases in the hospital and reducing readmission rates, attracted Bryan Huang, MD, to hospital medicine at the University of California at San Diego.

“When I interviewed at UCSD, I was very interested in quality improvement,” says Dr. Huang, an assistant clinical professor at UCSD’s Division of Hospital Medicine. “UCSD is well known for glycemic control and VTE prophylaxis. We’re now working on quality improvement for treating delirium and hospital discharge.”

His experience as an academic hospitalist has opened up the QI world to him. “Before this job, I was almost not familiar at all with quality improvement,” Dr. Huang says. “As a resident, I did some quality-improvement work, but not much. Quality improvement was missing from residency training, but it’s getting better.”

Dr. Patel says HM’s biggest selling point is the variety of settings available to a new hospitalist. She’s been working for the past two years in an academic hospital program in a community hospital setting with 20 hospitalists. Before that, she worked in private practice as a hospitalist. Now, when she talks with residents, she talks about their options.

“It’s really important that you figure out what kind of setting you want,” Dr. Patel says. “Hospital medicine has a diversity of settings, from a small community hospital where you do a broad range of inpatient care to a larger academic teaching environment or a private practice group.”

Leadership Opportunities

The continuing demand for hospitalists affords young physicians who are considering an HM career additional freedom in the job market. In comparison to more traditional primary-care models, hospitalist jobs offer flexible hours and competitive salaries.

Dr. Chacko points to another benefit that is a direct result of the high demand for hospitalists: increased opportunities to launch management careers. The average age of a hospitalist is 37 and the average age of an HM group leader is 41, according to SHM’s 2007-2008 Bi-Annual Survey on the State of the Hospital Medicine Movement.

 

 

“That’s not that much of a difference,” Dr. Chacko says. “Early-career hospitalists find ample leadership opportunities in the specialty. There are lots of opportunities for young hospitalists.”

How to Get Started

Because most teaching hospitals have hospitalists, most residents are exposed to HM. Many hospitalists relish the opportunity to mentor and provide early-career counseling. “Sometimes, a resident will ask to grab coffee and learn more about hospital medicine,” Dr. Huang says. “I tell them what my job is like. Many ask, ‘How do I get started looking for a job?’ I tell them that connections really help. Word of mouth is very important, so I refer people to other people.”

Margaret Fang, MD, MPH, FHM, assistant professor of medicine at the University of California at San Francisco’s division of hospital medicine and a founding member of the Young Physicians Committee, recommends that residents begin with a vision and work backward. “On a broad level, if you’re a resident, you should think about where you want to be in five years,” she says. “Look around your hospital and find a few people whose job you want.”

For some young physicians, looking ahead five years could mean being part of the healthcare revolution of tomorrow. TH

Brendon Shank is a freelance writer based in Philadelphia.

Longtime leader takes SHM helm

New SHM President Scott A. Flanders, MD, FHM, has been part of HM since the beginning. Now, he’s leading the movement.

“Scott has been a major force in shaping the hospital medicine specialty into what it is today,” says Larry Wellikson, MD, FHM, CEO of SHM. “It’s only fitting that he guide our organization and its members through this time of explosive growth and unprecedented change within the healthcare sector.”

Dr. Flanders is recognized as a leader in HM’s academic community. He is professor and director of the hospitalist program at the University of Michigan in Ann Arbor. His HM resume includes dozens of peer-reviewed research articles and presentations. He has devoted countless hours of his time to SHM as a board member, committee member, editor, and leadership track faculty. “He has already been a positive influence on hundreds of practicing hospitalists in the last decade,” Dr. Wellikson says. “We look forward to helping him expand that influence as president.”

Scott A. Flanders, MD, FHM

  • SHM member since 1996
  • Associate professor of medicine on the clinical track, University of Michigan
  • Associate division chief of general medicine for inpatient programs
  • Director of the hospitalist program at the University of Michigan
  • Associate director of inpatient programs, Department of Medicine, University of Michigan
  • Attending physician, University of Michigan Hospitals
  • Member, SHM Board of Directors
  • Faculty, SHM 2006 Leadership Academy
  • Deputy editor, Journal of Hospital Medicine
  • Former editor, The Hospitalist

SHM elects board members

SHM has elected three new members to its Board of Directors and re-elected two members. Board members are nominated and elected by the membership and serve a three-year term.The newly elected members of the board are:

Eric Howell, MD, FHM, associate professor of medicine at Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine and director of the hospitalist division and hospital care at Johns Hopkins Bayview Medical Center in Baltimore. Dr. Howell is a member of the Leadership Academy faculty and received the 2009 Award for Excellence in Teaching.

 

Burke Kealey, MD, FHM, assistant medical director of Health Partners Medical Group in Minneapolis and adjunct assistant professor of internal medicine at the University of Minnesota. Dr. Kealey has been an active member of SHM for more than 10 years and earned the society’s 2003 Award for Clinical Excellence.

 

 

 

Dan Dressler, MD, MSc, FHM, director of education at Emory University School of Medicine in Atlanta. A member of SHM’s Education Committee and Leadership Academy faculty, Dr. Dressler received Emory’s Hospital Medicine Leadership Award in 2006 and Hospital Medicine Teaching Award in 2007.

 

Re-elected board members:

Jeffrey Wiese, MD, FHM, professor of medicine, associate dean for graduate medical education, and associate professor of medicine at Tulane University Health Sciences Center in New Orleans. Dr. Wiese also was voted 2010-2011 board president-elect.

 

Jack Percelay, MD, MPH, FHM, FAAP, pediatric hospitalist with ELMO Pediatrics in New York City. Dr. Percelay was first elected to the board in 2005 and represents pediatric hospitalists.

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(07)
Publications
Sections

Younger generations blaze new paths through the American economy. Fifteen years ago, Generation X was fresh out of college and flush with the unimagined potential of the Internet. They helped change the way the world shared information and conducted business. The impact of such innovation and enthusiasm for new technology is still felt today.

The healthcare sector possesses pioneers of its own, many with the same kind of drive and vision as the dot-com entrepreneurs of the 1990s. Fifteen years from now, today’s young hospitalists—shaped by ever-changing demands and healthcare hurdles—will be recognized as an authority in the new ways patient care is delivered.

We’re not just super-residents. We’re highly trained specialists in the care of hospitalized patients and the process of making care in hospital better.

—Brian Markoff, MD, FHM, associate professor of medicine, Mount Sinai Hospitalist Group, New York City

Bijo Chacko, MD, FHM, former chair of SHM’s Young Physicians Committee, sees energy in the newest generation of hospitalists. He also sees great potential from residents who are finishing their training and considering their job options. Until recently, SHM’s Young Physicians Committee operated as a task force. The group’s growth and increased young-physician representation throughout the society prompted SHM leadership to promote the task force to full committee status.

“The wonderful thing is that we have received lots of input from around the country and dramatically increased membership in the past few years,” says Dr. Chacko, hospital medicine medical director for Preferred Health Partners in New York City. “We have moved from simply gathering information about young physicians in hospital medicine to actively disseminating it, including the new Resident’s Corner [department in The Hospitalist]. It addresses the needs of residents and introduces them to the nuances and specifics of hospital medicine.”

Pediatric Hospitalist Conference Expands Program, Attracts a Crowd

Since its inception six years ago, the Pediatric Hospital Medicine Conference has more than doubled in size and scope. Co-sponsored by the American Academy of Pediatrics (AAP), the Ambulatory Pediatric Association (APA), and SHM, this year’s annual meeting—July 23-26 in Tampa, Fla.—will offer fresh content to more than 300 pediatric hospitalists from around the country.

Conference chairman Daniel Rauch, MD, FAAP, FHM, attributes the growth to the conference’s mix of programs and the networking opportunities.

“When I’m at the conference, I’m stopped almost every hour by hospitalists who thank us for putting the conference together,” says Dr. Rauch, director of the pediatric hospitalist program at the New York University School of Medicine. “Many of them are working hard and rarely have the opportunity to network with their peers. When they’re here, they say, ‘Oh, my God, I’m not alone.’ ”

The expanded program includes an oral plenary session, a poster session, and pre-courses on critical care and data analysis. For the first time, content for the plenary and poster sessions will be unique to PHM09; in years past, the sessions presented content from the sponsoring societies’ annual conferences.

“All of the annual conferences have great content,” Dr. Rauch says, “but if you’re a pediatric hospitalist and can only go to one event, this is the one.”—BS

Pediatric Hospital Medicine 2009

WHEN: July 23-26

WHERE: Tampa (Fla.) Marriott Waterside Hotel and Marina

For more info: Visit SHM’s online event listings at www.hospitalmedicine.org/events

GET INVOLVED: To join the pediatric hospitalist listserv, e-mail nalexander@aap.org.

The demand for information has spurred the launch of a young physicians section (www.hospitalmedicine.org/youngdoctor) on SHM’s Web site. Combined with SHM’s online career center (www.hospitalmedicine.org/careercenter), the new microsites provide young physicians a broad range of information about the specialty and—most importantly—HM career options.

Natural Progression

Four out of five large hospitals now use hospitalists, and as more hospitals implement HM programs, more residents will be exposed to the hospitalist model of care. For residents, the allure of an HM career is broad and deep. In many ways, HM is the logical extension of residency training. Brian Markoff, MD, FHM, a hospitalist and associate professor of medicine at Mount Sinai Hospitalist Group in New York City, was a chief resident when he founded the hospitalist program at the University of California at Davis Health System in Sacramento in 1998.

 

 

“Creating the hospitalist program at UC-Davis was pretty easy,” Dr. Markoff says. “All of the program’s founders were chief residents at the time. The people involved were warm to the idea, and we could teach without being in the fellowship program. Residents are already very comfortable treating patients in the hospital setting.”

Dr. Markoff says practicing hospitalists are a positive influence on residents who are still undecided on a career path. “If you’re a good role model, they’ll be interested in hospital medicine,” he says.

Diversity of Patients, Issues, Settings

Dr. Markoff and others caution that HM encompasses more than an expansion of a resident’s standard roles and responsibilities. “We’re not just super-residents,” he says. “We’re highly trained specialists in the care of hospitalized patients and the process of making care in hospital better.”

Medical conditions, patient issues, and administrative situations that often are outside a resident’s scope quickly come into focus for a new hospitalist. When Mona Patel, DO, associate director of hospitalist services at Staten Island University Hospital in New York, chose an HM career five years ago, the diversity in opportunities was a major draw. Like many hospitalists, she knew she would enjoy the type of care she provides to patients.

“I liked the acuity of the patients and disease processes; it was much more interesting and exciting for me than ongoing outpatient care of chronic diseases,” Dr. Patel says. “I liked the interaction with the hospital house staff and lots of consultants. If I had questions about a patient, I could easily consult with a specialist within the hospital.”

In addition to providing bedside care, new hospitalists often find themselves at the forefront of a monumental change in how healthcare is provided nationwide. Quality improvement (QI) initiatives, such as reducing preventable diseases in the hospital and reducing readmission rates, attracted Bryan Huang, MD, to hospital medicine at the University of California at San Diego.

“When I interviewed at UCSD, I was very interested in quality improvement,” says Dr. Huang, an assistant clinical professor at UCSD’s Division of Hospital Medicine. “UCSD is well known for glycemic control and VTE prophylaxis. We’re now working on quality improvement for treating delirium and hospital discharge.”

His experience as an academic hospitalist has opened up the QI world to him. “Before this job, I was almost not familiar at all with quality improvement,” Dr. Huang says. “As a resident, I did some quality-improvement work, but not much. Quality improvement was missing from residency training, but it’s getting better.”

Dr. Patel says HM’s biggest selling point is the variety of settings available to a new hospitalist. She’s been working for the past two years in an academic hospital program in a community hospital setting with 20 hospitalists. Before that, she worked in private practice as a hospitalist. Now, when she talks with residents, she talks about their options.

“It’s really important that you figure out what kind of setting you want,” Dr. Patel says. “Hospital medicine has a diversity of settings, from a small community hospital where you do a broad range of inpatient care to a larger academic teaching environment or a private practice group.”

Leadership Opportunities

The continuing demand for hospitalists affords young physicians who are considering an HM career additional freedom in the job market. In comparison to more traditional primary-care models, hospitalist jobs offer flexible hours and competitive salaries.

Dr. Chacko points to another benefit that is a direct result of the high demand for hospitalists: increased opportunities to launch management careers. The average age of a hospitalist is 37 and the average age of an HM group leader is 41, according to SHM’s 2007-2008 Bi-Annual Survey on the State of the Hospital Medicine Movement.

 

 

“That’s not that much of a difference,” Dr. Chacko says. “Early-career hospitalists find ample leadership opportunities in the specialty. There are lots of opportunities for young hospitalists.”

How to Get Started

Because most teaching hospitals have hospitalists, most residents are exposed to HM. Many hospitalists relish the opportunity to mentor and provide early-career counseling. “Sometimes, a resident will ask to grab coffee and learn more about hospital medicine,” Dr. Huang says. “I tell them what my job is like. Many ask, ‘How do I get started looking for a job?’ I tell them that connections really help. Word of mouth is very important, so I refer people to other people.”

Margaret Fang, MD, MPH, FHM, assistant professor of medicine at the University of California at San Francisco’s division of hospital medicine and a founding member of the Young Physicians Committee, recommends that residents begin with a vision and work backward. “On a broad level, if you’re a resident, you should think about where you want to be in five years,” she says. “Look around your hospital and find a few people whose job you want.”

For some young physicians, looking ahead five years could mean being part of the healthcare revolution of tomorrow. TH

Brendon Shank is a freelance writer based in Philadelphia.

Longtime leader takes SHM helm

New SHM President Scott A. Flanders, MD, FHM, has been part of HM since the beginning. Now, he’s leading the movement.

“Scott has been a major force in shaping the hospital medicine specialty into what it is today,” says Larry Wellikson, MD, FHM, CEO of SHM. “It’s only fitting that he guide our organization and its members through this time of explosive growth and unprecedented change within the healthcare sector.”

Dr. Flanders is recognized as a leader in HM’s academic community. He is professor and director of the hospitalist program at the University of Michigan in Ann Arbor. His HM resume includes dozens of peer-reviewed research articles and presentations. He has devoted countless hours of his time to SHM as a board member, committee member, editor, and leadership track faculty. “He has already been a positive influence on hundreds of practicing hospitalists in the last decade,” Dr. Wellikson says. “We look forward to helping him expand that influence as president.”

Scott A. Flanders, MD, FHM

  • SHM member since 1996
  • Associate professor of medicine on the clinical track, University of Michigan
  • Associate division chief of general medicine for inpatient programs
  • Director of the hospitalist program at the University of Michigan
  • Associate director of inpatient programs, Department of Medicine, University of Michigan
  • Attending physician, University of Michigan Hospitals
  • Member, SHM Board of Directors
  • Faculty, SHM 2006 Leadership Academy
  • Deputy editor, Journal of Hospital Medicine
  • Former editor, The Hospitalist

SHM elects board members

SHM has elected three new members to its Board of Directors and re-elected two members. Board members are nominated and elected by the membership and serve a three-year term.The newly elected members of the board are:

Eric Howell, MD, FHM, associate professor of medicine at Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine and director of the hospitalist division and hospital care at Johns Hopkins Bayview Medical Center in Baltimore. Dr. Howell is a member of the Leadership Academy faculty and received the 2009 Award for Excellence in Teaching.

 

Burke Kealey, MD, FHM, assistant medical director of Health Partners Medical Group in Minneapolis and adjunct assistant professor of internal medicine at the University of Minnesota. Dr. Kealey has been an active member of SHM for more than 10 years and earned the society’s 2003 Award for Clinical Excellence.

 

 

 

Dan Dressler, MD, MSc, FHM, director of education at Emory University School of Medicine in Atlanta. A member of SHM’s Education Committee and Leadership Academy faculty, Dr. Dressler received Emory’s Hospital Medicine Leadership Award in 2006 and Hospital Medicine Teaching Award in 2007.

 

Re-elected board members:

Jeffrey Wiese, MD, FHM, professor of medicine, associate dean for graduate medical education, and associate professor of medicine at Tulane University Health Sciences Center in New Orleans. Dr. Wiese also was voted 2010-2011 board president-elect.

 

Jack Percelay, MD, MPH, FHM, FAAP, pediatric hospitalist with ELMO Pediatrics in New York City. Dr. Percelay was first elected to the board in 2005 and represents pediatric hospitalists.

Younger generations blaze new paths through the American economy. Fifteen years ago, Generation X was fresh out of college and flush with the unimagined potential of the Internet. They helped change the way the world shared information and conducted business. The impact of such innovation and enthusiasm for new technology is still felt today.

The healthcare sector possesses pioneers of its own, many with the same kind of drive and vision as the dot-com entrepreneurs of the 1990s. Fifteen years from now, today’s young hospitalists—shaped by ever-changing demands and healthcare hurdles—will be recognized as an authority in the new ways patient care is delivered.

We’re not just super-residents. We’re highly trained specialists in the care of hospitalized patients and the process of making care in hospital better.

—Brian Markoff, MD, FHM, associate professor of medicine, Mount Sinai Hospitalist Group, New York City

Bijo Chacko, MD, FHM, former chair of SHM’s Young Physicians Committee, sees energy in the newest generation of hospitalists. He also sees great potential from residents who are finishing their training and considering their job options. Until recently, SHM’s Young Physicians Committee operated as a task force. The group’s growth and increased young-physician representation throughout the society prompted SHM leadership to promote the task force to full committee status.

“The wonderful thing is that we have received lots of input from around the country and dramatically increased membership in the past few years,” says Dr. Chacko, hospital medicine medical director for Preferred Health Partners in New York City. “We have moved from simply gathering information about young physicians in hospital medicine to actively disseminating it, including the new Resident’s Corner [department in The Hospitalist]. It addresses the needs of residents and introduces them to the nuances and specifics of hospital medicine.”

Pediatric Hospitalist Conference Expands Program, Attracts a Crowd

Since its inception six years ago, the Pediatric Hospital Medicine Conference has more than doubled in size and scope. Co-sponsored by the American Academy of Pediatrics (AAP), the Ambulatory Pediatric Association (APA), and SHM, this year’s annual meeting—July 23-26 in Tampa, Fla.—will offer fresh content to more than 300 pediatric hospitalists from around the country.

Conference chairman Daniel Rauch, MD, FAAP, FHM, attributes the growth to the conference’s mix of programs and the networking opportunities.

“When I’m at the conference, I’m stopped almost every hour by hospitalists who thank us for putting the conference together,” says Dr. Rauch, director of the pediatric hospitalist program at the New York University School of Medicine. “Many of them are working hard and rarely have the opportunity to network with their peers. When they’re here, they say, ‘Oh, my God, I’m not alone.’ ”

The expanded program includes an oral plenary session, a poster session, and pre-courses on critical care and data analysis. For the first time, content for the plenary and poster sessions will be unique to PHM09; in years past, the sessions presented content from the sponsoring societies’ annual conferences.

“All of the annual conferences have great content,” Dr. Rauch says, “but if you’re a pediatric hospitalist and can only go to one event, this is the one.”—BS

Pediatric Hospital Medicine 2009

WHEN: July 23-26

WHERE: Tampa (Fla.) Marriott Waterside Hotel and Marina

For more info: Visit SHM’s online event listings at www.hospitalmedicine.org/events

GET INVOLVED: To join the pediatric hospitalist listserv, e-mail nalexander@aap.org.

The demand for information has spurred the launch of a young physicians section (www.hospitalmedicine.org/youngdoctor) on SHM’s Web site. Combined with SHM’s online career center (www.hospitalmedicine.org/careercenter), the new microsites provide young physicians a broad range of information about the specialty and—most importantly—HM career options.

Natural Progression

Four out of five large hospitals now use hospitalists, and as more hospitals implement HM programs, more residents will be exposed to the hospitalist model of care. For residents, the allure of an HM career is broad and deep. In many ways, HM is the logical extension of residency training. Brian Markoff, MD, FHM, a hospitalist and associate professor of medicine at Mount Sinai Hospitalist Group in New York City, was a chief resident when he founded the hospitalist program at the University of California at Davis Health System in Sacramento in 1998.

 

 

“Creating the hospitalist program at UC-Davis was pretty easy,” Dr. Markoff says. “All of the program’s founders were chief residents at the time. The people involved were warm to the idea, and we could teach without being in the fellowship program. Residents are already very comfortable treating patients in the hospital setting.”

Dr. Markoff says practicing hospitalists are a positive influence on residents who are still undecided on a career path. “If you’re a good role model, they’ll be interested in hospital medicine,” he says.

Diversity of Patients, Issues, Settings

Dr. Markoff and others caution that HM encompasses more than an expansion of a resident’s standard roles and responsibilities. “We’re not just super-residents,” he says. “We’re highly trained specialists in the care of hospitalized patients and the process of making care in hospital better.”

Medical conditions, patient issues, and administrative situations that often are outside a resident’s scope quickly come into focus for a new hospitalist. When Mona Patel, DO, associate director of hospitalist services at Staten Island University Hospital in New York, chose an HM career five years ago, the diversity in opportunities was a major draw. Like many hospitalists, she knew she would enjoy the type of care she provides to patients.

“I liked the acuity of the patients and disease processes; it was much more interesting and exciting for me than ongoing outpatient care of chronic diseases,” Dr. Patel says. “I liked the interaction with the hospital house staff and lots of consultants. If I had questions about a patient, I could easily consult with a specialist within the hospital.”

In addition to providing bedside care, new hospitalists often find themselves at the forefront of a monumental change in how healthcare is provided nationwide. Quality improvement (QI) initiatives, such as reducing preventable diseases in the hospital and reducing readmission rates, attracted Bryan Huang, MD, to hospital medicine at the University of California at San Diego.

“When I interviewed at UCSD, I was very interested in quality improvement,” says Dr. Huang, an assistant clinical professor at UCSD’s Division of Hospital Medicine. “UCSD is well known for glycemic control and VTE prophylaxis. We’re now working on quality improvement for treating delirium and hospital discharge.”

His experience as an academic hospitalist has opened up the QI world to him. “Before this job, I was almost not familiar at all with quality improvement,” Dr. Huang says. “As a resident, I did some quality-improvement work, but not much. Quality improvement was missing from residency training, but it’s getting better.”

Dr. Patel says HM’s biggest selling point is the variety of settings available to a new hospitalist. She’s been working for the past two years in an academic hospital program in a community hospital setting with 20 hospitalists. Before that, she worked in private practice as a hospitalist. Now, when she talks with residents, she talks about their options.

“It’s really important that you figure out what kind of setting you want,” Dr. Patel says. “Hospital medicine has a diversity of settings, from a small community hospital where you do a broad range of inpatient care to a larger academic teaching environment or a private practice group.”

Leadership Opportunities

The continuing demand for hospitalists affords young physicians who are considering an HM career additional freedom in the job market. In comparison to more traditional primary-care models, hospitalist jobs offer flexible hours and competitive salaries.

Dr. Chacko points to another benefit that is a direct result of the high demand for hospitalists: increased opportunities to launch management careers. The average age of a hospitalist is 37 and the average age of an HM group leader is 41, according to SHM’s 2007-2008 Bi-Annual Survey on the State of the Hospital Medicine Movement.

 

 

“That’s not that much of a difference,” Dr. Chacko says. “Early-career hospitalists find ample leadership opportunities in the specialty. There are lots of opportunities for young hospitalists.”

How to Get Started

Because most teaching hospitals have hospitalists, most residents are exposed to HM. Many hospitalists relish the opportunity to mentor and provide early-career counseling. “Sometimes, a resident will ask to grab coffee and learn more about hospital medicine,” Dr. Huang says. “I tell them what my job is like. Many ask, ‘How do I get started looking for a job?’ I tell them that connections really help. Word of mouth is very important, so I refer people to other people.”

Margaret Fang, MD, MPH, FHM, assistant professor of medicine at the University of California at San Francisco’s division of hospital medicine and a founding member of the Young Physicians Committee, recommends that residents begin with a vision and work backward. “On a broad level, if you’re a resident, you should think about where you want to be in five years,” she says. “Look around your hospital and find a few people whose job you want.”

For some young physicians, looking ahead five years could mean being part of the healthcare revolution of tomorrow. TH

Brendon Shank is a freelance writer based in Philadelphia.

Longtime leader takes SHM helm

New SHM President Scott A. Flanders, MD, FHM, has been part of HM since the beginning. Now, he’s leading the movement.

“Scott has been a major force in shaping the hospital medicine specialty into what it is today,” says Larry Wellikson, MD, FHM, CEO of SHM. “It’s only fitting that he guide our organization and its members through this time of explosive growth and unprecedented change within the healthcare sector.”

Dr. Flanders is recognized as a leader in HM’s academic community. He is professor and director of the hospitalist program at the University of Michigan in Ann Arbor. His HM resume includes dozens of peer-reviewed research articles and presentations. He has devoted countless hours of his time to SHM as a board member, committee member, editor, and leadership track faculty. “He has already been a positive influence on hundreds of practicing hospitalists in the last decade,” Dr. Wellikson says. “We look forward to helping him expand that influence as president.”

Scott A. Flanders, MD, FHM

  • SHM member since 1996
  • Associate professor of medicine on the clinical track, University of Michigan
  • Associate division chief of general medicine for inpatient programs
  • Director of the hospitalist program at the University of Michigan
  • Associate director of inpatient programs, Department of Medicine, University of Michigan
  • Attending physician, University of Michigan Hospitals
  • Member, SHM Board of Directors
  • Faculty, SHM 2006 Leadership Academy
  • Deputy editor, Journal of Hospital Medicine
  • Former editor, The Hospitalist

SHM elects board members

SHM has elected three new members to its Board of Directors and re-elected two members. Board members are nominated and elected by the membership and serve a three-year term.The newly elected members of the board are:

Eric Howell, MD, FHM, associate professor of medicine at Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine and director of the hospitalist division and hospital care at Johns Hopkins Bayview Medical Center in Baltimore. Dr. Howell is a member of the Leadership Academy faculty and received the 2009 Award for Excellence in Teaching.

 

Burke Kealey, MD, FHM, assistant medical director of Health Partners Medical Group in Minneapolis and adjunct assistant professor of internal medicine at the University of Minnesota. Dr. Kealey has been an active member of SHM for more than 10 years and earned the society’s 2003 Award for Clinical Excellence.

 

 

 

Dan Dressler, MD, MSc, FHM, director of education at Emory University School of Medicine in Atlanta. A member of SHM’s Education Committee and Leadership Academy faculty, Dr. Dressler received Emory’s Hospital Medicine Leadership Award in 2006 and Hospital Medicine Teaching Award in 2007.

 

Re-elected board members:

Jeffrey Wiese, MD, FHM, professor of medicine, associate dean for graduate medical education, and associate professor of medicine at Tulane University Health Sciences Center in New Orleans. Dr. Wiese also was voted 2010-2011 board president-elect.

 

Jack Percelay, MD, MPH, FHM, FAAP, pediatric hospitalist with ELMO Pediatrics in New York City. Dr. Percelay was first elected to the board in 2005 and represents pediatric hospitalists.

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(07)
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(07)
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
Healthcare Trailblazers
Display Headline
Healthcare Trailblazers
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)

Use Metrics to Identify Documentation and Coding Errors

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 09/14/2018 - 12:33
Display Headline
Use Metrics to Identify Documentation and Coding Errors

Use Metrics to Identify Documentation and Coding Errors

I am the leader of a hospitalist group. We have a number of recent graduates in our group, and I have a feeling that not everyone is billing correctly. Do you have any suggestions on how I can remedy this problem?

D. Perman, MD, Augusta, Ga.

ASK Dr. Hospitalist

Do you have a problem or concern that you’d like Dr. Hospitalist to address? E-mail your questions to drhospit@wiley.com.

Dr. Hospitalist responds:

I would not be surprised if your suspicions are correct. Unfortunately, many young physicians do not have a firm grasp on the rules and regulations surrounding coding and documentation. But before you set out to find a remedy, you need to identify and understand the problem.

I suggest you start by collecting data. This is easily done by involving your administrative staff and billing service. Create individual and group dashboards to help you and the individual physicians examine the data. Determine whether the doctors in your group are submitting a bill with each clinical encounter. Measure the number of days between the date of service and the date they submit the bill. Create metrics and put them on the dashboard. For example, one could measure bills submitted divided by clinical encounters; another would calculate the percent of bills submitted within 72 hours of the service date.

Next, look at the individual and group code distributions. Assuming that all members of your group have a similar job description and see the same groups of patients, the code distribution should be similar. For example, the percentage of Level 3, Level 2, and Level 1 initial admission codes should be similar among all members of your group. A disparity would suggest that one or more physicians is not documenting and coding correctly.

Use your dashboard to compare individual and group distribution. In my group, I provide each physician with the metrics on their personal distribution of codes for the fiscal year, along with their distribution of codes from previous years. When I do this, I also provide each physician with our group’s distribution of codes for the current as well as previous years. This allows individual physicians to compare historical trends for themselves and the entire group. I do not share individual data with others in the group.

Lastly, provide the distribution of codes for internal-medicine physicians from Medicare. This information is available at www.cms.hhs.gov/pqri/. It is important to note that I am not holding up the Medicare data or our group data as the standard; it is merely a reflection of how other internists in our group and across the country are billing.

This data is intended to supplement, not replace, our annual training on documentation, coding, and compliance. I have found that pushing this data to our physicians has helped them understand the importance of creating a system to ensure that all bills are submitted and coded appropriately to the level of service and documentation. TH

CORRECTION

Bryan Huang, MD, and Mona Patel, DO, were the primary authors of “Transition Time” (June 2009, p. 16). Dr. Huang is assistant clinical professor in the department of hospital medicine at the University of California at San Diego’s Department of Medicine. Dr. Patel is associate director of hospitalist services at Staten Island University Hospital in New York, and an assistant clinical professor of medicine at State University of New York at Brooklyn. Bijo Chacko, MD, FHM, former chair of SHM’s Young Physicians Committee, was a contributing author. TH

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(07)
Publications
Sections

Use Metrics to Identify Documentation and Coding Errors

I am the leader of a hospitalist group. We have a number of recent graduates in our group, and I have a feeling that not everyone is billing correctly. Do you have any suggestions on how I can remedy this problem?

D. Perman, MD, Augusta, Ga.

ASK Dr. Hospitalist

Do you have a problem or concern that you’d like Dr. Hospitalist to address? E-mail your questions to drhospit@wiley.com.

Dr. Hospitalist responds:

I would not be surprised if your suspicions are correct. Unfortunately, many young physicians do not have a firm grasp on the rules and regulations surrounding coding and documentation. But before you set out to find a remedy, you need to identify and understand the problem.

I suggest you start by collecting data. This is easily done by involving your administrative staff and billing service. Create individual and group dashboards to help you and the individual physicians examine the data. Determine whether the doctors in your group are submitting a bill with each clinical encounter. Measure the number of days between the date of service and the date they submit the bill. Create metrics and put them on the dashboard. For example, one could measure bills submitted divided by clinical encounters; another would calculate the percent of bills submitted within 72 hours of the service date.

Next, look at the individual and group code distributions. Assuming that all members of your group have a similar job description and see the same groups of patients, the code distribution should be similar. For example, the percentage of Level 3, Level 2, and Level 1 initial admission codes should be similar among all members of your group. A disparity would suggest that one or more physicians is not documenting and coding correctly.

Use your dashboard to compare individual and group distribution. In my group, I provide each physician with the metrics on their personal distribution of codes for the fiscal year, along with their distribution of codes from previous years. When I do this, I also provide each physician with our group’s distribution of codes for the current as well as previous years. This allows individual physicians to compare historical trends for themselves and the entire group. I do not share individual data with others in the group.

Lastly, provide the distribution of codes for internal-medicine physicians from Medicare. This information is available at www.cms.hhs.gov/pqri/. It is important to note that I am not holding up the Medicare data or our group data as the standard; it is merely a reflection of how other internists in our group and across the country are billing.

This data is intended to supplement, not replace, our annual training on documentation, coding, and compliance. I have found that pushing this data to our physicians has helped them understand the importance of creating a system to ensure that all bills are submitted and coded appropriately to the level of service and documentation. TH

CORRECTION

Bryan Huang, MD, and Mona Patel, DO, were the primary authors of “Transition Time” (June 2009, p. 16). Dr. Huang is assistant clinical professor in the department of hospital medicine at the University of California at San Diego’s Department of Medicine. Dr. Patel is associate director of hospitalist services at Staten Island University Hospital in New York, and an assistant clinical professor of medicine at State University of New York at Brooklyn. Bijo Chacko, MD, FHM, former chair of SHM’s Young Physicians Committee, was a contributing author. TH

Use Metrics to Identify Documentation and Coding Errors

I am the leader of a hospitalist group. We have a number of recent graduates in our group, and I have a feeling that not everyone is billing correctly. Do you have any suggestions on how I can remedy this problem?

D. Perman, MD, Augusta, Ga.

ASK Dr. Hospitalist

Do you have a problem or concern that you’d like Dr. Hospitalist to address? E-mail your questions to drhospit@wiley.com.

Dr. Hospitalist responds:

I would not be surprised if your suspicions are correct. Unfortunately, many young physicians do not have a firm grasp on the rules and regulations surrounding coding and documentation. But before you set out to find a remedy, you need to identify and understand the problem.

I suggest you start by collecting data. This is easily done by involving your administrative staff and billing service. Create individual and group dashboards to help you and the individual physicians examine the data. Determine whether the doctors in your group are submitting a bill with each clinical encounter. Measure the number of days between the date of service and the date they submit the bill. Create metrics and put them on the dashboard. For example, one could measure bills submitted divided by clinical encounters; another would calculate the percent of bills submitted within 72 hours of the service date.

Next, look at the individual and group code distributions. Assuming that all members of your group have a similar job description and see the same groups of patients, the code distribution should be similar. For example, the percentage of Level 3, Level 2, and Level 1 initial admission codes should be similar among all members of your group. A disparity would suggest that one or more physicians is not documenting and coding correctly.

Use your dashboard to compare individual and group distribution. In my group, I provide each physician with the metrics on their personal distribution of codes for the fiscal year, along with their distribution of codes from previous years. When I do this, I also provide each physician with our group’s distribution of codes for the current as well as previous years. This allows individual physicians to compare historical trends for themselves and the entire group. I do not share individual data with others in the group.

Lastly, provide the distribution of codes for internal-medicine physicians from Medicare. This information is available at www.cms.hhs.gov/pqri/. It is important to note that I am not holding up the Medicare data or our group data as the standard; it is merely a reflection of how other internists in our group and across the country are billing.

This data is intended to supplement, not replace, our annual training on documentation, coding, and compliance. I have found that pushing this data to our physicians has helped them understand the importance of creating a system to ensure that all bills are submitted and coded appropriately to the level of service and documentation. TH

CORRECTION

Bryan Huang, MD, and Mona Patel, DO, were the primary authors of “Transition Time” (June 2009, p. 16). Dr. Huang is assistant clinical professor in the department of hospital medicine at the University of California at San Diego’s Department of Medicine. Dr. Patel is associate director of hospitalist services at Staten Island University Hospital in New York, and an assistant clinical professor of medicine at State University of New York at Brooklyn. Bijo Chacko, MD, FHM, former chair of SHM’s Young Physicians Committee, was a contributing author. TH

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(07)
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(07)
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
Use Metrics to Identify Documentation and Coding Errors
Display Headline
Use Metrics to Identify Documentation and Coding Errors
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)

Uniquely Positioned

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 09/14/2018 - 12:33
Display Headline
Uniquely Positioned

How can a family physician with a demanding clinical schedule juggle patient care with the grueling administrative and travel duties required of the president-elect of the American Academy of Family Physicians (AAFP)? Lori Heim, MD, FAAFP, found the perfect compromise: Give up the family practice and become a hospitalist.

She did so last November, soon after AAFP members voted her the next president of one of the nation’s largest medical organizations. In fact, she is the only hospitalist at 104-bed Scotland Memorial Hospital in Laurinburg, N.C.

“I was looking for an opportunity while I was working as president-elect and then president of the academy,” says Dr. Heim, who takes over as president of the 94,000-member AAFP in October. “Because of the heavy travel demands, it was not possible to keep my old practice.”

Although the career swap is borne of professional necessity, Dr. Heim says her transition to HM practice has been relatively easy. “I love it. [The new job] utilizes my prior training and skills,” she says. “In private practice, I was doing rounds on my own patients, then I would have to run to the office to see my other patients. I could see the advantages of using the hospitalist services. … Now, here I am on this side.”

An active AAFP member for nearly 25 years, Dr. Heim brings a unique confluence of medical training and experience to her new role. She has firsthand knowledge of the key issues intersecting primary care and hospital-based practice—care coordination, physician reimbursement, and quality improvement. She also acknowledges that walls need to be broken down when it comes to family physicians (FP) transitioning to HM careers. More complete training and improvement in hospital administrations’ understanding of an FP’s clinical capabilities will advance their entrance into hospitalist careers.

Voted president-elect of the 94,000-member AAFP last fall, Dr. Heim gave up her private practice and became a hospitalist.

Dr. Heim says she “went and found a hospital” & that would use her skills.

“I think it could become a large trend because of the financial constraints on family care,” Dr. Heim says, also noting the lifestyle benefits of an HM career. “FPs often cannot do both inpatient and outpatient care. Your productivity, if you are in the clinic, must make a tradeoff between rounds and office hours—and how late at night do I want to be doing rounds?”

Bumpy Road to HM

The transition from family practice to HM is working out well for Heim, but it wasn’t as smooth as one might expect for a decorated career physician.

The daughter of a military pilot, Dr. Heim earned her bachelor’s degree with honors from Portland State University and her medical degree at the Uniformed Services University of Health Sciences in Bethesda, Md. Following her residency at Andrews Air Force Base in Maryland and a fellowship in faculty development and research at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, her military medical career resembled a spiral staircase. She went from staff physician to clinic chief to residency director to chief of medical staff, with a few stops in between. After 25 years of military service, she retired as an Air Force colonel and opened a private practice.

Even with decades of training and patient care under her belt, Dr. Heim wasn’t rubber-stamped into a hospitalist position. It’s an issue she hopes to address as part of her AAFP tenure. “I know of hospitals where family physicians can admit and treat their patients but not be considered for a hospitalist position. It happened to me,” she explains. “I went and found a hospital that would use my skills.”

 

 

Dr. Heim (right) says extensive training and experience in the hospital setting has made for a smooth transition to HM.

Hospitalist Robert Harrington, MD, FHM, knows the feeling. He had a more traditional primary-care practice before entering a HM career, and he understands the intense financial and workload pressures of family practice. Now the vice president of medical affairs for Alpharetta, Ga.-based IN Compass Health Inc. and chair of SHM’s Family Medicine Task Force, he says “there are barriers to hiring because of the wide variability in family physician training.” The root of the problem is that residents in some programs get less hospital time and experience with HM-patient encounters. “In opposed programs, they compete with other specialties and get less time,” Dr. Harrington says. “In unopposed programs, they tend to get more hospital experience and more rotations in inpatient services. Those folks can transition with little to no difficulty to hospital medicine.”

SHM President Scott Flanders, MD, FHM, associate professor and director of the hospitalist program at the University of Michigan in Ann Arbor, sees great value in what FPs can bring to HM. He wants HM to be open to those interested in a career change; however, he agrees physician training and experience can be an obstacle in the recruitment process. “The training in internal medicine is more geared to hospital medicine than it is in family practice [training],” Dr. Flanders says. “FPs must make sure they have hospital training, including the ICU. Many FP programs may not have this.” He also says FPs looking at an HM career—and internists as well—need to be “up to speed” in systems-based practice.

Any doctor, it doesn’t matter who you are, has a role to play in quality improvement.

—Lori Heim, MD, FAAFP, Scotland Memorial Hospital, Laurinburg, N.C., AAFP president-elect

Although they represent a small part of SHM’s membership, Dr. Harrington and his task force want FPs to have “representation and a voice” in the society. “They are a small but growing minority,” he says. “Four or five percent of hospitalists are family-medicine-trained by our membership rolls, but we believe it is a bigger number, as some may not be members of SHM. … We run into more problems with hospital administrators. Some of them insist on IM-trained physicians, and there just aren’t enough IMs out there.”

It’s a C-suite roadblock Dr. Heim is familiar with. “Sometimes there is a parochial view in using internists above family physicians. Why should family doctors be second? It’s a misunderstanding of the experience and what family physicians bring to the table,” she says. “They haven’t done it, so people don’t think they can. Some hospitals are underutilizing family physicians in a hospitalist role. If a physician has hospital privileges, there is no reason they should not be considered to be hired as a hospitalist.”

Family Medicine at a Glance

  • AAFP members: 94,614
  • Male: 57,569
  • Female: 35,593
  • Average age: 46.4 years
  • Median salary: $149,200
  • Average weeks worked per year: 47.1
  • Office visits per week: 84.9
  • Hospital visits per week: 8.1
  • Nursing home visits per week: 2.3
  • Patients with free or discounted care: 9.5
  • Percentage of Medicare patients: 22.9

Source: AAFP Practice Profile Survey, June 2008

Tenure of Change

As AAFP president, Dr. Heim says she’ll work to improve working conditions for FPs and fight for her constituents’ rights as Washington debates national healthcare reform. The AAFP and SHM share a number of policy interests, including reimbursement reform, new technologies, and patient-safety initiatives.

 

 

“I would like to do more with the various societies to increase opportunities for family medicine,” Dr. Heim says. “In some ways, primary care is being squeezed all around. How are you going to increase the numbers of FPs when they earn less? You are not going to unless you reform the system.”

Another top priority is advancing the idea of a national network of electronic health records (EHRs). Dr. Heim says a linked EHR system would improve communication and handoffs, and help physicians limit medical errors. “That’s the key,” she says. “Until then, it is going to be a hodgepodge of solutions. As long as it requires multiple steps, there will always be slipups.

“When I was in the military, records were kept electronically, and I learned the value of having continuity of electronic records.”

Dr. Heim says she would like to partner with hospital-based physicians on QI projects. “Any doctor, it doesn’t matter who you are, has a role to play in quality improvement, either in procedures to improve outcomes in the operating room or ICU or ED. We all have a role in that,” she says. “That is one of the reasons we have supported comparative effectiveness research. Guidelines are valuable.”

As AAFP president, Dr. Heim says she won’t forget her family physician roots. Her platform is ambitious: Reform both the practice and the payment of healthcare in this country. “I think the country recognizes that the current way of paying for healthcare—built on volume and procedures rather than patient outcome—has resulted in a fragmented and disjointed process,” she says. “It’s not an even a system. … We have to look at patient experience and outcome, not ‘what procedure did we do to that patient?’

“Right now, we are paying more for lower-quality healthcare, and we are not getting the bang for our bucks. We cannot afford to continue to spend money and not get value; we really have to change this time.” TH

Carol Berczuk is a freelance writer based in New York City.

HM, AAFP Can Work Together

Dr. Heim—who has a unique perspective as a practicing hospitalist and AAFP president-elect—says her organization and SHM face many of the same healthcare issues. Here are her suggestions for working together on two issues central to HM:

  • Workforce shortage: “I would like to see more opportunities for family physicians to be accepted to be hospitalists. Hospital administrators and boards of trustees often set hiring policy, so we need to educate them. The more hospitals experience us [family physicians], the wider the acceptance will be. … Coming from family medicine, [we] also can help cover for the pediatric population. Pay is a huge driver here. I cannot emphasize enough how huge. For family physicians, another driver toward hospital medicine is the predictability of the hospital schedule. That affects people’s choices.”
  • QI and coordination of care: “This is definitely an area in which both hospitalists and family physicians need to focus and work on together. Family medicine stresses coordination of care. Many measures used to judge hospitalists’ performance, such as readmission and infection rates, are really contingent upon communication and handoffs with the patient’s primary-care physician. At the AAFP, coordination of care is stressed both in policy and programs.”—CB

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(07)
Publications
Sections

How can a family physician with a demanding clinical schedule juggle patient care with the grueling administrative and travel duties required of the president-elect of the American Academy of Family Physicians (AAFP)? Lori Heim, MD, FAAFP, found the perfect compromise: Give up the family practice and become a hospitalist.

She did so last November, soon after AAFP members voted her the next president of one of the nation’s largest medical organizations. In fact, she is the only hospitalist at 104-bed Scotland Memorial Hospital in Laurinburg, N.C.

“I was looking for an opportunity while I was working as president-elect and then president of the academy,” says Dr. Heim, who takes over as president of the 94,000-member AAFP in October. “Because of the heavy travel demands, it was not possible to keep my old practice.”

Although the career swap is borne of professional necessity, Dr. Heim says her transition to HM practice has been relatively easy. “I love it. [The new job] utilizes my prior training and skills,” she says. “In private practice, I was doing rounds on my own patients, then I would have to run to the office to see my other patients. I could see the advantages of using the hospitalist services. … Now, here I am on this side.”

An active AAFP member for nearly 25 years, Dr. Heim brings a unique confluence of medical training and experience to her new role. She has firsthand knowledge of the key issues intersecting primary care and hospital-based practice—care coordination, physician reimbursement, and quality improvement. She also acknowledges that walls need to be broken down when it comes to family physicians (FP) transitioning to HM careers. More complete training and improvement in hospital administrations’ understanding of an FP’s clinical capabilities will advance their entrance into hospitalist careers.

Voted president-elect of the 94,000-member AAFP last fall, Dr. Heim gave up her private practice and became a hospitalist.

Dr. Heim says she “went and found a hospital” & that would use her skills.

“I think it could become a large trend because of the financial constraints on family care,” Dr. Heim says, also noting the lifestyle benefits of an HM career. “FPs often cannot do both inpatient and outpatient care. Your productivity, if you are in the clinic, must make a tradeoff between rounds and office hours—and how late at night do I want to be doing rounds?”

Bumpy Road to HM

The transition from family practice to HM is working out well for Heim, but it wasn’t as smooth as one might expect for a decorated career physician.

The daughter of a military pilot, Dr. Heim earned her bachelor’s degree with honors from Portland State University and her medical degree at the Uniformed Services University of Health Sciences in Bethesda, Md. Following her residency at Andrews Air Force Base in Maryland and a fellowship in faculty development and research at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, her military medical career resembled a spiral staircase. She went from staff physician to clinic chief to residency director to chief of medical staff, with a few stops in between. After 25 years of military service, she retired as an Air Force colonel and opened a private practice.

Even with decades of training and patient care under her belt, Dr. Heim wasn’t rubber-stamped into a hospitalist position. It’s an issue she hopes to address as part of her AAFP tenure. “I know of hospitals where family physicians can admit and treat their patients but not be considered for a hospitalist position. It happened to me,” she explains. “I went and found a hospital that would use my skills.”

 

 

Dr. Heim (right) says extensive training and experience in the hospital setting has made for a smooth transition to HM.

Hospitalist Robert Harrington, MD, FHM, knows the feeling. He had a more traditional primary-care practice before entering a HM career, and he understands the intense financial and workload pressures of family practice. Now the vice president of medical affairs for Alpharetta, Ga.-based IN Compass Health Inc. and chair of SHM’s Family Medicine Task Force, he says “there are barriers to hiring because of the wide variability in family physician training.” The root of the problem is that residents in some programs get less hospital time and experience with HM-patient encounters. “In opposed programs, they compete with other specialties and get less time,” Dr. Harrington says. “In unopposed programs, they tend to get more hospital experience and more rotations in inpatient services. Those folks can transition with little to no difficulty to hospital medicine.”

SHM President Scott Flanders, MD, FHM, associate professor and director of the hospitalist program at the University of Michigan in Ann Arbor, sees great value in what FPs can bring to HM. He wants HM to be open to those interested in a career change; however, he agrees physician training and experience can be an obstacle in the recruitment process. “The training in internal medicine is more geared to hospital medicine than it is in family practice [training],” Dr. Flanders says. “FPs must make sure they have hospital training, including the ICU. Many FP programs may not have this.” He also says FPs looking at an HM career—and internists as well—need to be “up to speed” in systems-based practice.

Any doctor, it doesn’t matter who you are, has a role to play in quality improvement.

—Lori Heim, MD, FAAFP, Scotland Memorial Hospital, Laurinburg, N.C., AAFP president-elect

Although they represent a small part of SHM’s membership, Dr. Harrington and his task force want FPs to have “representation and a voice” in the society. “They are a small but growing minority,” he says. “Four or five percent of hospitalists are family-medicine-trained by our membership rolls, but we believe it is a bigger number, as some may not be members of SHM. … We run into more problems with hospital administrators. Some of them insist on IM-trained physicians, and there just aren’t enough IMs out there.”

It’s a C-suite roadblock Dr. Heim is familiar with. “Sometimes there is a parochial view in using internists above family physicians. Why should family doctors be second? It’s a misunderstanding of the experience and what family physicians bring to the table,” she says. “They haven’t done it, so people don’t think they can. Some hospitals are underutilizing family physicians in a hospitalist role. If a physician has hospital privileges, there is no reason they should not be considered to be hired as a hospitalist.”

Family Medicine at a Glance

  • AAFP members: 94,614
  • Male: 57,569
  • Female: 35,593
  • Average age: 46.4 years
  • Median salary: $149,200
  • Average weeks worked per year: 47.1
  • Office visits per week: 84.9
  • Hospital visits per week: 8.1
  • Nursing home visits per week: 2.3
  • Patients with free or discounted care: 9.5
  • Percentage of Medicare patients: 22.9

Source: AAFP Practice Profile Survey, June 2008

Tenure of Change

As AAFP president, Dr. Heim says she’ll work to improve working conditions for FPs and fight for her constituents’ rights as Washington debates national healthcare reform. The AAFP and SHM share a number of policy interests, including reimbursement reform, new technologies, and patient-safety initiatives.

 

 

“I would like to do more with the various societies to increase opportunities for family medicine,” Dr. Heim says. “In some ways, primary care is being squeezed all around. How are you going to increase the numbers of FPs when they earn less? You are not going to unless you reform the system.”

Another top priority is advancing the idea of a national network of electronic health records (EHRs). Dr. Heim says a linked EHR system would improve communication and handoffs, and help physicians limit medical errors. “That’s the key,” she says. “Until then, it is going to be a hodgepodge of solutions. As long as it requires multiple steps, there will always be slipups.

“When I was in the military, records were kept electronically, and I learned the value of having continuity of electronic records.”

Dr. Heim says she would like to partner with hospital-based physicians on QI projects. “Any doctor, it doesn’t matter who you are, has a role to play in quality improvement, either in procedures to improve outcomes in the operating room or ICU or ED. We all have a role in that,” she says. “That is one of the reasons we have supported comparative effectiveness research. Guidelines are valuable.”

As AAFP president, Dr. Heim says she won’t forget her family physician roots. Her platform is ambitious: Reform both the practice and the payment of healthcare in this country. “I think the country recognizes that the current way of paying for healthcare—built on volume and procedures rather than patient outcome—has resulted in a fragmented and disjointed process,” she says. “It’s not an even a system. … We have to look at patient experience and outcome, not ‘what procedure did we do to that patient?’

“Right now, we are paying more for lower-quality healthcare, and we are not getting the bang for our bucks. We cannot afford to continue to spend money and not get value; we really have to change this time.” TH

Carol Berczuk is a freelance writer based in New York City.

HM, AAFP Can Work Together

Dr. Heim—who has a unique perspective as a practicing hospitalist and AAFP president-elect—says her organization and SHM face many of the same healthcare issues. Here are her suggestions for working together on two issues central to HM:

  • Workforce shortage: “I would like to see more opportunities for family physicians to be accepted to be hospitalists. Hospital administrators and boards of trustees often set hiring policy, so we need to educate them. The more hospitals experience us [family physicians], the wider the acceptance will be. … Coming from family medicine, [we] also can help cover for the pediatric population. Pay is a huge driver here. I cannot emphasize enough how huge. For family physicians, another driver toward hospital medicine is the predictability of the hospital schedule. That affects people’s choices.”
  • QI and coordination of care: “This is definitely an area in which both hospitalists and family physicians need to focus and work on together. Family medicine stresses coordination of care. Many measures used to judge hospitalists’ performance, such as readmission and infection rates, are really contingent upon communication and handoffs with the patient’s primary-care physician. At the AAFP, coordination of care is stressed both in policy and programs.”—CB

How can a family physician with a demanding clinical schedule juggle patient care with the grueling administrative and travel duties required of the president-elect of the American Academy of Family Physicians (AAFP)? Lori Heim, MD, FAAFP, found the perfect compromise: Give up the family practice and become a hospitalist.

She did so last November, soon after AAFP members voted her the next president of one of the nation’s largest medical organizations. In fact, she is the only hospitalist at 104-bed Scotland Memorial Hospital in Laurinburg, N.C.

“I was looking for an opportunity while I was working as president-elect and then president of the academy,” says Dr. Heim, who takes over as president of the 94,000-member AAFP in October. “Because of the heavy travel demands, it was not possible to keep my old practice.”

Although the career swap is borne of professional necessity, Dr. Heim says her transition to HM practice has been relatively easy. “I love it. [The new job] utilizes my prior training and skills,” she says. “In private practice, I was doing rounds on my own patients, then I would have to run to the office to see my other patients. I could see the advantages of using the hospitalist services. … Now, here I am on this side.”

An active AAFP member for nearly 25 years, Dr. Heim brings a unique confluence of medical training and experience to her new role. She has firsthand knowledge of the key issues intersecting primary care and hospital-based practice—care coordination, physician reimbursement, and quality improvement. She also acknowledges that walls need to be broken down when it comes to family physicians (FP) transitioning to HM careers. More complete training and improvement in hospital administrations’ understanding of an FP’s clinical capabilities will advance their entrance into hospitalist careers.

Voted president-elect of the 94,000-member AAFP last fall, Dr. Heim gave up her private practice and became a hospitalist.

Dr. Heim says she “went and found a hospital” & that would use her skills.

“I think it could become a large trend because of the financial constraints on family care,” Dr. Heim says, also noting the lifestyle benefits of an HM career. “FPs often cannot do both inpatient and outpatient care. Your productivity, if you are in the clinic, must make a tradeoff between rounds and office hours—and how late at night do I want to be doing rounds?”

Bumpy Road to HM

The transition from family practice to HM is working out well for Heim, but it wasn’t as smooth as one might expect for a decorated career physician.

The daughter of a military pilot, Dr. Heim earned her bachelor’s degree with honors from Portland State University and her medical degree at the Uniformed Services University of Health Sciences in Bethesda, Md. Following her residency at Andrews Air Force Base in Maryland and a fellowship in faculty development and research at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, her military medical career resembled a spiral staircase. She went from staff physician to clinic chief to residency director to chief of medical staff, with a few stops in between. After 25 years of military service, she retired as an Air Force colonel and opened a private practice.

Even with decades of training and patient care under her belt, Dr. Heim wasn’t rubber-stamped into a hospitalist position. It’s an issue she hopes to address as part of her AAFP tenure. “I know of hospitals where family physicians can admit and treat their patients but not be considered for a hospitalist position. It happened to me,” she explains. “I went and found a hospital that would use my skills.”

 

 

Dr. Heim (right) says extensive training and experience in the hospital setting has made for a smooth transition to HM.

Hospitalist Robert Harrington, MD, FHM, knows the feeling. He had a more traditional primary-care practice before entering a HM career, and he understands the intense financial and workload pressures of family practice. Now the vice president of medical affairs for Alpharetta, Ga.-based IN Compass Health Inc. and chair of SHM’s Family Medicine Task Force, he says “there are barriers to hiring because of the wide variability in family physician training.” The root of the problem is that residents in some programs get less hospital time and experience with HM-patient encounters. “In opposed programs, they compete with other specialties and get less time,” Dr. Harrington says. “In unopposed programs, they tend to get more hospital experience and more rotations in inpatient services. Those folks can transition with little to no difficulty to hospital medicine.”

SHM President Scott Flanders, MD, FHM, associate professor and director of the hospitalist program at the University of Michigan in Ann Arbor, sees great value in what FPs can bring to HM. He wants HM to be open to those interested in a career change; however, he agrees physician training and experience can be an obstacle in the recruitment process. “The training in internal medicine is more geared to hospital medicine than it is in family practice [training],” Dr. Flanders says. “FPs must make sure they have hospital training, including the ICU. Many FP programs may not have this.” He also says FPs looking at an HM career—and internists as well—need to be “up to speed” in systems-based practice.

Any doctor, it doesn’t matter who you are, has a role to play in quality improvement.

—Lori Heim, MD, FAAFP, Scotland Memorial Hospital, Laurinburg, N.C., AAFP president-elect

Although they represent a small part of SHM’s membership, Dr. Harrington and his task force want FPs to have “representation and a voice” in the society. “They are a small but growing minority,” he says. “Four or five percent of hospitalists are family-medicine-trained by our membership rolls, but we believe it is a bigger number, as some may not be members of SHM. … We run into more problems with hospital administrators. Some of them insist on IM-trained physicians, and there just aren’t enough IMs out there.”

It’s a C-suite roadblock Dr. Heim is familiar with. “Sometimes there is a parochial view in using internists above family physicians. Why should family doctors be second? It’s a misunderstanding of the experience and what family physicians bring to the table,” she says. “They haven’t done it, so people don’t think they can. Some hospitals are underutilizing family physicians in a hospitalist role. If a physician has hospital privileges, there is no reason they should not be considered to be hired as a hospitalist.”

Family Medicine at a Glance

  • AAFP members: 94,614
  • Male: 57,569
  • Female: 35,593
  • Average age: 46.4 years
  • Median salary: $149,200
  • Average weeks worked per year: 47.1
  • Office visits per week: 84.9
  • Hospital visits per week: 8.1
  • Nursing home visits per week: 2.3
  • Patients with free or discounted care: 9.5
  • Percentage of Medicare patients: 22.9

Source: AAFP Practice Profile Survey, June 2008

Tenure of Change

As AAFP president, Dr. Heim says she’ll work to improve working conditions for FPs and fight for her constituents’ rights as Washington debates national healthcare reform. The AAFP and SHM share a number of policy interests, including reimbursement reform, new technologies, and patient-safety initiatives.

 

 

“I would like to do more with the various societies to increase opportunities for family medicine,” Dr. Heim says. “In some ways, primary care is being squeezed all around. How are you going to increase the numbers of FPs when they earn less? You are not going to unless you reform the system.”

Another top priority is advancing the idea of a national network of electronic health records (EHRs). Dr. Heim says a linked EHR system would improve communication and handoffs, and help physicians limit medical errors. “That’s the key,” she says. “Until then, it is going to be a hodgepodge of solutions. As long as it requires multiple steps, there will always be slipups.

“When I was in the military, records were kept electronically, and I learned the value of having continuity of electronic records.”

Dr. Heim says she would like to partner with hospital-based physicians on QI projects. “Any doctor, it doesn’t matter who you are, has a role to play in quality improvement, either in procedures to improve outcomes in the operating room or ICU or ED. We all have a role in that,” she says. “That is one of the reasons we have supported comparative effectiveness research. Guidelines are valuable.”

As AAFP president, Dr. Heim says she won’t forget her family physician roots. Her platform is ambitious: Reform both the practice and the payment of healthcare in this country. “I think the country recognizes that the current way of paying for healthcare—built on volume and procedures rather than patient outcome—has resulted in a fragmented and disjointed process,” she says. “It’s not an even a system. … We have to look at patient experience and outcome, not ‘what procedure did we do to that patient?’

“Right now, we are paying more for lower-quality healthcare, and we are not getting the bang for our bucks. We cannot afford to continue to spend money and not get value; we really have to change this time.” TH

Carol Berczuk is a freelance writer based in New York City.

HM, AAFP Can Work Together

Dr. Heim—who has a unique perspective as a practicing hospitalist and AAFP president-elect—says her organization and SHM face many of the same healthcare issues. Here are her suggestions for working together on two issues central to HM:

  • Workforce shortage: “I would like to see more opportunities for family physicians to be accepted to be hospitalists. Hospital administrators and boards of trustees often set hiring policy, so we need to educate them. The more hospitals experience us [family physicians], the wider the acceptance will be. … Coming from family medicine, [we] also can help cover for the pediatric population. Pay is a huge driver here. I cannot emphasize enough how huge. For family physicians, another driver toward hospital medicine is the predictability of the hospital schedule. That affects people’s choices.”
  • QI and coordination of care: “This is definitely an area in which both hospitalists and family physicians need to focus and work on together. Family medicine stresses coordination of care. Many measures used to judge hospitalists’ performance, such as readmission and infection rates, are really contingent upon communication and handoffs with the patient’s primary-care physician. At the AAFP, coordination of care is stressed both in policy and programs.”—CB

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(07)
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(07)
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
Uniquely Positioned
Display Headline
Uniquely Positioned
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)

Financial Fallout

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 09/14/2018 - 12:33
Display Headline
Financial Fallout

Not once has Vanessa Yasmin Calderón regretted her decision to go into primary care, but she admits she’s disquieted by the amount of debt she’s accumulated while attending the University of California at Los Angeles for medical school and Harvard University’s Kennedy School of Government in pursuit of a master’s degree in public policy.

“I will be 30 years old when I graduate,” says Calderón, who plans to receive her medical degree in 2010. “Right now, I have no retirement account, and I’m staring at loads of debt in a bad economy. There’s a lot to think about.”

Calderón estimates she will have more than $146,000 in loans when she graduates—a daunting sum for someone who used scholarship money and a part-time job to put herself through college. Although Calderón is committed to a career in emergency or general internal medicine (IM), she has watched many of her peers forgo primary care in favor of anesthesiology, dermatology, and surgical specialties—partly because they are worried about how they are going to pay back their education debt.

“I guarantee you that primary care is being the most affected by rising debt,” says Calderón, vice president of finances for the American Medical Student Association (AMSA).

Her personal observations correlate with more than 15 years’ worth of published medical studies that have found compensation plays a role in dissuading medical students who are facing mountains of debt from choosing primary care. That includes careers in IM and, by extension, careers in HM, as more than 82% of hospitalists consider themselves IM specialists, according to SHM’s 2007-2008 “Bi-Annual Survey on the State of the Hospital Medicine Movement.” This doesn’t bode well for the nation’s future, experts say, because primary care and IM comprise the foundation of our nation’s healthcare system.

While the steep decline in IM recruits has leveled off in recent years, the number of medical students choosing IM residency (2,632 seniors entered three-year IM residency programs in 2009) is nowhere near the high point (3,884) of the mid-1980s, says Steven E. Weinberger, MD, FACP, senior vice president for medical education and publishing for the American College of Physicians (ACP).

“If there is not a change in how we support students going through medical school, how can we be surprised when they choose a higher-paying specialty?” says Michael Rosenthal, MD, professor and vice chairman of academic programs and research in the Department of Family and Community Medicine at Thomas Jefferson University in Philadelphia.

Debt for Decades

The cost of a private medical school education has risen 165%, and the cost of public medical school education has gone up 312% in the last 20 years. In 2006, medical students graduated with an average of $120,000 (public school) and $160,000 (private school) in student loan debt.

If eligible, most medical students defer loan repayment until they complete their three-year residency. At the end of residency, the $120,000 debt will have grown to $151,342, and the $160,000 debt will have grown to $205,707. The following chart shows how long it will take to pay off that student loan debt over the default period of 10 years or the extended repayment option of 25 years.

click for large version
click for large version

Loan Obligations

In 2006, more than 84% of medical school graduates had educational debt, with a median debt of $120,000 for graduates of public medical schools and $160,000 for graduates of private medical schools, according to a 2007 report by the Association of American Medical Colleges (AAMC). In comparison, the same report shows that, in 2001, the median debt for public and private medical school graduates was $86,000 and $120,000, respectively.

 

 

Just as the rising cost of healthcare leads to skyrocketing health insurance premiums, so, too, does it result in higher tuition and fees for medical students, says Brian Hurley, MD, MBA, president of AMSA. Public medical schools in particular are affected as state governments, which are obliged to annually balance their budgets, often pay for burgeoning healthcare expenses by cutting subsidies to higher education, he says.

“In a way, universities are balancing their squeezed budgets on the backs of their students,” says Dr. Hurley, who recently graduated from the University of Southern California’s Keck School of Medicine with $300,000 in educational debt.

There is no regulatory body in place that can moderate medical school tuition increases, he laments. But medical students are partly to blame for the spiraling tuition costs, Dr. Hurley says, because students rarely base their school selections on tuition costs. As a result, medical schools aren’t forced to decelerate tuition hikes, because students aren’t taking them to task.

“When pre-med students decide to go to medical school, they have this idea that they will have more opportunities if they can go to Harvard or some other top medical school,” Dr. Hurley says. “Students want to go to the best school they can, and they trust that everything will work itself out in the end.”

Meanwhile, escalating tuition costs and debt loads deter prospective medical students from low-income backgrounds from going to medical school, which hampers efforts to diversify the nation’s medical workforce and provide quality healthcare in poorer communities. “People tend to practice medicine where they came from,” Dr. Hurley says. “It’s not a perfect correlation, but it does match up.”

For its part, AMSA is educating pre-med students on how to select more affordable medical schools that provide a quality education. The association also focuses on teaching medical students how to manage educational debt. “The public perception is that physicians are rich, and it’s a perception we haven’t successfully been able to combat,” Dr. Hurley says. “Right now, medical student debt is not seen as a healthcare issue. We can try to work within the Higher Education Act to better subsidize medical students’ education, but lawmakers tend to focus on undergraduate education.”

click for large version
click for large version

Nonprocedurals at Risk

But medical students’ rising debt is a healthcare issue, experts say. “Many students are now leaving medical school with over $200,000 in debt,” says Daniel Dressler, MD, FHM, SHM board member and education director for the HM section and associate program director for the IM residency program at Emory University’s School of Medicine in Atlanta. “As the cost of education increases each year and significantly outpaces the rate of increase in physician salaries, students may look toward specialties where they can pay that off within a more reasonable time frame while they begin their families and build their lives.”

Aside from primary care and IM, the medical fields that have been at the losing end of the bloated-educational-debt trend are nonprocedural-based IM specialties such as geriatrics, endocrinology, pulmonary/critical care, rheumatology, and infectious disease, says Jeffrey Wiese, MD, FACP, FHM, SHM president-elect and associate dean of graduate medical education and director of the IM residency program at Tulane University Hospital in New Orleans.

Doctors in nonprocedural-based IM specialties generally receive lower compensation than those in procedural-based IM specialties like cardiology, gastroenterology, and nephrology. For example, the median annual compensation for private-practice physicians in cardiology and gastroenterology is nearly $385,000; the median salary of endocrinologists and rheumatologists is $184,000; and the median salary for general internists is $166,000, according to a 2007 compensation survey by the Medical Group Management Association.

 

 

IM physician salaries always have been significantly less than the salaries of procedure-based specialists, Dr. Wiese says. “But now the workload of general internists has grown, and it hasn’t grown proportional to compensation, as compared to other specialties,” he says. “That’s compelling to students.”

Dr. Weinberger agrees the compensation disparity is disconcerting to medical students who consider IM because “they are choosing a harder lifestyle. It doesn’t help that the doctors who are practicing internal medicine complain about the hassles and the problems with reimbursement. The role models medical students look up to are not as happy as they used to be.”

We need more hospitalists, as the burden of inpatient care is very likely to grow.

—Daniel Dressler, MD, FHM, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta

HM Holds Its Own

Hospitalists seem to be surviving relatively well in these difficult times, according to data compiled by the American College of Physicians. In 2002, 4% of third-year IM residents surveyed said they were choosing HM. That number has risen steadily, to 10% in 2007 and 2008, Dr. Weinberger notes.

HM compensation varies widely, Dr. Wiese says; however, the mean salary for HM physicians was $196,700 in 2007, according to SHM survey data. That puts hospitalist salaries at the mid- to lower end of the scale when compared with all medical specialties but smack in the middle of IM specialties.

A 2008 study published in the Annals of Internal Medicine suggests that U.S. categorical IM residents with educational debt of $50,000 or more are more likely than those with no debt to choose a HM career, possibly because they can enter the work force right after residency training, as opposed to continuing with fellowship training for a subspecialty at substantially less compensation.1

For HM to continue gaining ground, many say the specialty has to go on the offensive and not wait for medical students and residents to decide to become hospitalists. “It will be more difficult to recruit from residency programs if there are fewer people going into internal medicine,” Dr. Dressler says. “Hospital medicine will simply be competing for a smaller pool of residents.”

Dr. Wiese says academia can contribute by providing a solid foundation in medicine and a clear path to HM careers as next-generation physicians and leaders. “Hospitalists assuming more of a teaching role are good not only for hospital medicine, but internal medicine education,” Dr. Wiese says. “The stronger the mentors, the more internal medicine students you’re going to recruit.”

The same can be said of medical practice settings, Dr. Weinberger explains. Many ambulatory settings in which medical students and residents work are among the most poorly supported and operated, even though they have the sickest patients, he says. That can be a huge turnoff for medical students. To counter that negative, students must be exposed to higher-quality ambulatory settings, Dr. Weinberger says.

Medical schools can help the cause by admitting students who show an inclination to go into primary care and IM, says Dr. Rosenthal, of Thomas Jefferson University. Those students are more likely to leave medical school in pursuit of a generalist career—especially if they’re matched with good IM mentors.

Federal and state governments should consider paying the educational loans of medical students who promise to practice primary care or IM for a certain period of time, especially in high-need communities, Dr. Rosenthal says. Fifteen years ago, he was a lead author in a study published in the Journal of the American Medical Association that found a significant number of fourth-year medical students would go into primary care, including general IM, if positive changes were made to income, hours worked, and loan repayment.2 Dr. Rosenthal says he’s not surprised physicians and researchers are writing about the same topic today.

 

 

“The article was written in the Clinton era, at a time when there was a sense the nation’s healthcare system might be reformed. But there was backlash to the plan,” Dr. Rosenthal says. “Today, we are again considering healthcare reform, except this time people are more willing to accept it because the high cost of healthcare is now affecting businesses and the economy.”

click for large version
click for large version

Change in Outlook

President Obama’s stated goal of extending health insurance to more Americans makes increasing the ranks of primary-care physicians, general internists, and hospitalists even more urgent, experts say. In Massachusetts, a state that is experimenting with universal health coverage for all of its residents, a shortfall in the primary-care work force is evident, Dr. Weinberger says. It is troubling news, because research consistently shows that when a primary-care physician coordinates a patient’s care, the result is fewer visits to the ED and medical specialists, he says.

“What this means is, we need more internists in the outpatient side to care for these patients longitudinally,” Dr. Dressler says. “We need more hospitalists, as the burden of inpatient care is very likely to grow as well.”

Dr. Rosenthal says more students will be attracted to medicine in part because the recession is making solid, good-paying jobs that play a vital role in communities very attractive. If better support were available for students interested in primary care, he says, he would have reason to hope more students would choose generalist careers.

“There was this expectation among people in their 20s that, if they were bright and able, they would have a nice lifestyle without having to work too hard. But the recession is having an effect on this generation’s outlook,” Dr. Rosenthal says. “I think there is a changing landscape out there.” TH

Lisa Ryan is a freelance writer based in New Jersey.

References

  1. McDonald FS, West CP, Popkave C, Kolars JC. Educational debt and reported career plans among internal medicine residents. Ann Intern Med. 2008;149(6): 416-420.
  2. Rosenthal MP, Diamond JJ, Rabinowitz HK, et al. Influence of income, hours worked, and loan repayment on medical students’ decision to pursue a primary care career. JAMA. 1994;271(12):914-917.
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(07)
Publications
Sections

Not once has Vanessa Yasmin Calderón regretted her decision to go into primary care, but she admits she’s disquieted by the amount of debt she’s accumulated while attending the University of California at Los Angeles for medical school and Harvard University’s Kennedy School of Government in pursuit of a master’s degree in public policy.

“I will be 30 years old when I graduate,” says Calderón, who plans to receive her medical degree in 2010. “Right now, I have no retirement account, and I’m staring at loads of debt in a bad economy. There’s a lot to think about.”

Calderón estimates she will have more than $146,000 in loans when she graduates—a daunting sum for someone who used scholarship money and a part-time job to put herself through college. Although Calderón is committed to a career in emergency or general internal medicine (IM), she has watched many of her peers forgo primary care in favor of anesthesiology, dermatology, and surgical specialties—partly because they are worried about how they are going to pay back their education debt.

“I guarantee you that primary care is being the most affected by rising debt,” says Calderón, vice president of finances for the American Medical Student Association (AMSA).

Her personal observations correlate with more than 15 years’ worth of published medical studies that have found compensation plays a role in dissuading medical students who are facing mountains of debt from choosing primary care. That includes careers in IM and, by extension, careers in HM, as more than 82% of hospitalists consider themselves IM specialists, according to SHM’s 2007-2008 “Bi-Annual Survey on the State of the Hospital Medicine Movement.” This doesn’t bode well for the nation’s future, experts say, because primary care and IM comprise the foundation of our nation’s healthcare system.

While the steep decline in IM recruits has leveled off in recent years, the number of medical students choosing IM residency (2,632 seniors entered three-year IM residency programs in 2009) is nowhere near the high point (3,884) of the mid-1980s, says Steven E. Weinberger, MD, FACP, senior vice president for medical education and publishing for the American College of Physicians (ACP).

“If there is not a change in how we support students going through medical school, how can we be surprised when they choose a higher-paying specialty?” says Michael Rosenthal, MD, professor and vice chairman of academic programs and research in the Department of Family and Community Medicine at Thomas Jefferson University in Philadelphia.

Debt for Decades

The cost of a private medical school education has risen 165%, and the cost of public medical school education has gone up 312% in the last 20 years. In 2006, medical students graduated with an average of $120,000 (public school) and $160,000 (private school) in student loan debt.

If eligible, most medical students defer loan repayment until they complete their three-year residency. At the end of residency, the $120,000 debt will have grown to $151,342, and the $160,000 debt will have grown to $205,707. The following chart shows how long it will take to pay off that student loan debt over the default period of 10 years or the extended repayment option of 25 years.

click for large version
click for large version

Loan Obligations

In 2006, more than 84% of medical school graduates had educational debt, with a median debt of $120,000 for graduates of public medical schools and $160,000 for graduates of private medical schools, according to a 2007 report by the Association of American Medical Colleges (AAMC). In comparison, the same report shows that, in 2001, the median debt for public and private medical school graduates was $86,000 and $120,000, respectively.

 

 

Just as the rising cost of healthcare leads to skyrocketing health insurance premiums, so, too, does it result in higher tuition and fees for medical students, says Brian Hurley, MD, MBA, president of AMSA. Public medical schools in particular are affected as state governments, which are obliged to annually balance their budgets, often pay for burgeoning healthcare expenses by cutting subsidies to higher education, he says.

“In a way, universities are balancing their squeezed budgets on the backs of their students,” says Dr. Hurley, who recently graduated from the University of Southern California’s Keck School of Medicine with $300,000 in educational debt.

There is no regulatory body in place that can moderate medical school tuition increases, he laments. But medical students are partly to blame for the spiraling tuition costs, Dr. Hurley says, because students rarely base their school selections on tuition costs. As a result, medical schools aren’t forced to decelerate tuition hikes, because students aren’t taking them to task.

“When pre-med students decide to go to medical school, they have this idea that they will have more opportunities if they can go to Harvard or some other top medical school,” Dr. Hurley says. “Students want to go to the best school they can, and they trust that everything will work itself out in the end.”

Meanwhile, escalating tuition costs and debt loads deter prospective medical students from low-income backgrounds from going to medical school, which hampers efforts to diversify the nation’s medical workforce and provide quality healthcare in poorer communities. “People tend to practice medicine where they came from,” Dr. Hurley says. “It’s not a perfect correlation, but it does match up.”

For its part, AMSA is educating pre-med students on how to select more affordable medical schools that provide a quality education. The association also focuses on teaching medical students how to manage educational debt. “The public perception is that physicians are rich, and it’s a perception we haven’t successfully been able to combat,” Dr. Hurley says. “Right now, medical student debt is not seen as a healthcare issue. We can try to work within the Higher Education Act to better subsidize medical students’ education, but lawmakers tend to focus on undergraduate education.”

click for large version
click for large version

Nonprocedurals at Risk

But medical students’ rising debt is a healthcare issue, experts say. “Many students are now leaving medical school with over $200,000 in debt,” says Daniel Dressler, MD, FHM, SHM board member and education director for the HM section and associate program director for the IM residency program at Emory University’s School of Medicine in Atlanta. “As the cost of education increases each year and significantly outpaces the rate of increase in physician salaries, students may look toward specialties where they can pay that off within a more reasonable time frame while they begin their families and build their lives.”

Aside from primary care and IM, the medical fields that have been at the losing end of the bloated-educational-debt trend are nonprocedural-based IM specialties such as geriatrics, endocrinology, pulmonary/critical care, rheumatology, and infectious disease, says Jeffrey Wiese, MD, FACP, FHM, SHM president-elect and associate dean of graduate medical education and director of the IM residency program at Tulane University Hospital in New Orleans.

Doctors in nonprocedural-based IM specialties generally receive lower compensation than those in procedural-based IM specialties like cardiology, gastroenterology, and nephrology. For example, the median annual compensation for private-practice physicians in cardiology and gastroenterology is nearly $385,000; the median salary of endocrinologists and rheumatologists is $184,000; and the median salary for general internists is $166,000, according to a 2007 compensation survey by the Medical Group Management Association.

 

 

IM physician salaries always have been significantly less than the salaries of procedure-based specialists, Dr. Wiese says. “But now the workload of general internists has grown, and it hasn’t grown proportional to compensation, as compared to other specialties,” he says. “That’s compelling to students.”

Dr. Weinberger agrees the compensation disparity is disconcerting to medical students who consider IM because “they are choosing a harder lifestyle. It doesn’t help that the doctors who are practicing internal medicine complain about the hassles and the problems with reimbursement. The role models medical students look up to are not as happy as they used to be.”

We need more hospitalists, as the burden of inpatient care is very likely to grow.

—Daniel Dressler, MD, FHM, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta

HM Holds Its Own

Hospitalists seem to be surviving relatively well in these difficult times, according to data compiled by the American College of Physicians. In 2002, 4% of third-year IM residents surveyed said they were choosing HM. That number has risen steadily, to 10% in 2007 and 2008, Dr. Weinberger notes.

HM compensation varies widely, Dr. Wiese says; however, the mean salary for HM physicians was $196,700 in 2007, according to SHM survey data. That puts hospitalist salaries at the mid- to lower end of the scale when compared with all medical specialties but smack in the middle of IM specialties.

A 2008 study published in the Annals of Internal Medicine suggests that U.S. categorical IM residents with educational debt of $50,000 or more are more likely than those with no debt to choose a HM career, possibly because they can enter the work force right after residency training, as opposed to continuing with fellowship training for a subspecialty at substantially less compensation.1

For HM to continue gaining ground, many say the specialty has to go on the offensive and not wait for medical students and residents to decide to become hospitalists. “It will be more difficult to recruit from residency programs if there are fewer people going into internal medicine,” Dr. Dressler says. “Hospital medicine will simply be competing for a smaller pool of residents.”

Dr. Wiese says academia can contribute by providing a solid foundation in medicine and a clear path to HM careers as next-generation physicians and leaders. “Hospitalists assuming more of a teaching role are good not only for hospital medicine, but internal medicine education,” Dr. Wiese says. “The stronger the mentors, the more internal medicine students you’re going to recruit.”

The same can be said of medical practice settings, Dr. Weinberger explains. Many ambulatory settings in which medical students and residents work are among the most poorly supported and operated, even though they have the sickest patients, he says. That can be a huge turnoff for medical students. To counter that negative, students must be exposed to higher-quality ambulatory settings, Dr. Weinberger says.

Medical schools can help the cause by admitting students who show an inclination to go into primary care and IM, says Dr. Rosenthal, of Thomas Jefferson University. Those students are more likely to leave medical school in pursuit of a generalist career—especially if they’re matched with good IM mentors.

Federal and state governments should consider paying the educational loans of medical students who promise to practice primary care or IM for a certain period of time, especially in high-need communities, Dr. Rosenthal says. Fifteen years ago, he was a lead author in a study published in the Journal of the American Medical Association that found a significant number of fourth-year medical students would go into primary care, including general IM, if positive changes were made to income, hours worked, and loan repayment.2 Dr. Rosenthal says he’s not surprised physicians and researchers are writing about the same topic today.

 

 

“The article was written in the Clinton era, at a time when there was a sense the nation’s healthcare system might be reformed. But there was backlash to the plan,” Dr. Rosenthal says. “Today, we are again considering healthcare reform, except this time people are more willing to accept it because the high cost of healthcare is now affecting businesses and the economy.”

click for large version
click for large version

Change in Outlook

President Obama’s stated goal of extending health insurance to more Americans makes increasing the ranks of primary-care physicians, general internists, and hospitalists even more urgent, experts say. In Massachusetts, a state that is experimenting with universal health coverage for all of its residents, a shortfall in the primary-care work force is evident, Dr. Weinberger says. It is troubling news, because research consistently shows that when a primary-care physician coordinates a patient’s care, the result is fewer visits to the ED and medical specialists, he says.

“What this means is, we need more internists in the outpatient side to care for these patients longitudinally,” Dr. Dressler says. “We need more hospitalists, as the burden of inpatient care is very likely to grow as well.”

Dr. Rosenthal says more students will be attracted to medicine in part because the recession is making solid, good-paying jobs that play a vital role in communities very attractive. If better support were available for students interested in primary care, he says, he would have reason to hope more students would choose generalist careers.

“There was this expectation among people in their 20s that, if they were bright and able, they would have a nice lifestyle without having to work too hard. But the recession is having an effect on this generation’s outlook,” Dr. Rosenthal says. “I think there is a changing landscape out there.” TH

Lisa Ryan is a freelance writer based in New Jersey.

References

  1. McDonald FS, West CP, Popkave C, Kolars JC. Educational debt and reported career plans among internal medicine residents. Ann Intern Med. 2008;149(6): 416-420.
  2. Rosenthal MP, Diamond JJ, Rabinowitz HK, et al. Influence of income, hours worked, and loan repayment on medical students’ decision to pursue a primary care career. JAMA. 1994;271(12):914-917.

Not once has Vanessa Yasmin Calderón regretted her decision to go into primary care, but she admits she’s disquieted by the amount of debt she’s accumulated while attending the University of California at Los Angeles for medical school and Harvard University’s Kennedy School of Government in pursuit of a master’s degree in public policy.

“I will be 30 years old when I graduate,” says Calderón, who plans to receive her medical degree in 2010. “Right now, I have no retirement account, and I’m staring at loads of debt in a bad economy. There’s a lot to think about.”

Calderón estimates she will have more than $146,000 in loans when she graduates—a daunting sum for someone who used scholarship money and a part-time job to put herself through college. Although Calderón is committed to a career in emergency or general internal medicine (IM), she has watched many of her peers forgo primary care in favor of anesthesiology, dermatology, and surgical specialties—partly because they are worried about how they are going to pay back their education debt.

“I guarantee you that primary care is being the most affected by rising debt,” says Calderón, vice president of finances for the American Medical Student Association (AMSA).

Her personal observations correlate with more than 15 years’ worth of published medical studies that have found compensation plays a role in dissuading medical students who are facing mountains of debt from choosing primary care. That includes careers in IM and, by extension, careers in HM, as more than 82% of hospitalists consider themselves IM specialists, according to SHM’s 2007-2008 “Bi-Annual Survey on the State of the Hospital Medicine Movement.” This doesn’t bode well for the nation’s future, experts say, because primary care and IM comprise the foundation of our nation’s healthcare system.

While the steep decline in IM recruits has leveled off in recent years, the number of medical students choosing IM residency (2,632 seniors entered three-year IM residency programs in 2009) is nowhere near the high point (3,884) of the mid-1980s, says Steven E. Weinberger, MD, FACP, senior vice president for medical education and publishing for the American College of Physicians (ACP).

“If there is not a change in how we support students going through medical school, how can we be surprised when they choose a higher-paying specialty?” says Michael Rosenthal, MD, professor and vice chairman of academic programs and research in the Department of Family and Community Medicine at Thomas Jefferson University in Philadelphia.

Debt for Decades

The cost of a private medical school education has risen 165%, and the cost of public medical school education has gone up 312% in the last 20 years. In 2006, medical students graduated with an average of $120,000 (public school) and $160,000 (private school) in student loan debt.

If eligible, most medical students defer loan repayment until they complete their three-year residency. At the end of residency, the $120,000 debt will have grown to $151,342, and the $160,000 debt will have grown to $205,707. The following chart shows how long it will take to pay off that student loan debt over the default period of 10 years or the extended repayment option of 25 years.

click for large version
click for large version

Loan Obligations

In 2006, more than 84% of medical school graduates had educational debt, with a median debt of $120,000 for graduates of public medical schools and $160,000 for graduates of private medical schools, according to a 2007 report by the Association of American Medical Colleges (AAMC). In comparison, the same report shows that, in 2001, the median debt for public and private medical school graduates was $86,000 and $120,000, respectively.

 

 

Just as the rising cost of healthcare leads to skyrocketing health insurance premiums, so, too, does it result in higher tuition and fees for medical students, says Brian Hurley, MD, MBA, president of AMSA. Public medical schools in particular are affected as state governments, which are obliged to annually balance their budgets, often pay for burgeoning healthcare expenses by cutting subsidies to higher education, he says.

“In a way, universities are balancing their squeezed budgets on the backs of their students,” says Dr. Hurley, who recently graduated from the University of Southern California’s Keck School of Medicine with $300,000 in educational debt.

There is no regulatory body in place that can moderate medical school tuition increases, he laments. But medical students are partly to blame for the spiraling tuition costs, Dr. Hurley says, because students rarely base their school selections on tuition costs. As a result, medical schools aren’t forced to decelerate tuition hikes, because students aren’t taking them to task.

“When pre-med students decide to go to medical school, they have this idea that they will have more opportunities if they can go to Harvard or some other top medical school,” Dr. Hurley says. “Students want to go to the best school they can, and they trust that everything will work itself out in the end.”

Meanwhile, escalating tuition costs and debt loads deter prospective medical students from low-income backgrounds from going to medical school, which hampers efforts to diversify the nation’s medical workforce and provide quality healthcare in poorer communities. “People tend to practice medicine where they came from,” Dr. Hurley says. “It’s not a perfect correlation, but it does match up.”

For its part, AMSA is educating pre-med students on how to select more affordable medical schools that provide a quality education. The association also focuses on teaching medical students how to manage educational debt. “The public perception is that physicians are rich, and it’s a perception we haven’t successfully been able to combat,” Dr. Hurley says. “Right now, medical student debt is not seen as a healthcare issue. We can try to work within the Higher Education Act to better subsidize medical students’ education, but lawmakers tend to focus on undergraduate education.”

click for large version
click for large version

Nonprocedurals at Risk

But medical students’ rising debt is a healthcare issue, experts say. “Many students are now leaving medical school with over $200,000 in debt,” says Daniel Dressler, MD, FHM, SHM board member and education director for the HM section and associate program director for the IM residency program at Emory University’s School of Medicine in Atlanta. “As the cost of education increases each year and significantly outpaces the rate of increase in physician salaries, students may look toward specialties where they can pay that off within a more reasonable time frame while they begin their families and build their lives.”

Aside from primary care and IM, the medical fields that have been at the losing end of the bloated-educational-debt trend are nonprocedural-based IM specialties such as geriatrics, endocrinology, pulmonary/critical care, rheumatology, and infectious disease, says Jeffrey Wiese, MD, FACP, FHM, SHM president-elect and associate dean of graduate medical education and director of the IM residency program at Tulane University Hospital in New Orleans.

Doctors in nonprocedural-based IM specialties generally receive lower compensation than those in procedural-based IM specialties like cardiology, gastroenterology, and nephrology. For example, the median annual compensation for private-practice physicians in cardiology and gastroenterology is nearly $385,000; the median salary of endocrinologists and rheumatologists is $184,000; and the median salary for general internists is $166,000, according to a 2007 compensation survey by the Medical Group Management Association.

 

 

IM physician salaries always have been significantly less than the salaries of procedure-based specialists, Dr. Wiese says. “But now the workload of general internists has grown, and it hasn’t grown proportional to compensation, as compared to other specialties,” he says. “That’s compelling to students.”

Dr. Weinberger agrees the compensation disparity is disconcerting to medical students who consider IM because “they are choosing a harder lifestyle. It doesn’t help that the doctors who are practicing internal medicine complain about the hassles and the problems with reimbursement. The role models medical students look up to are not as happy as they used to be.”

We need more hospitalists, as the burden of inpatient care is very likely to grow.

—Daniel Dressler, MD, FHM, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta

HM Holds Its Own

Hospitalists seem to be surviving relatively well in these difficult times, according to data compiled by the American College of Physicians. In 2002, 4% of third-year IM residents surveyed said they were choosing HM. That number has risen steadily, to 10% in 2007 and 2008, Dr. Weinberger notes.

HM compensation varies widely, Dr. Wiese says; however, the mean salary for HM physicians was $196,700 in 2007, according to SHM survey data. That puts hospitalist salaries at the mid- to lower end of the scale when compared with all medical specialties but smack in the middle of IM specialties.

A 2008 study published in the Annals of Internal Medicine suggests that U.S. categorical IM residents with educational debt of $50,000 or more are more likely than those with no debt to choose a HM career, possibly because they can enter the work force right after residency training, as opposed to continuing with fellowship training for a subspecialty at substantially less compensation.1

For HM to continue gaining ground, many say the specialty has to go on the offensive and not wait for medical students and residents to decide to become hospitalists. “It will be more difficult to recruit from residency programs if there are fewer people going into internal medicine,” Dr. Dressler says. “Hospital medicine will simply be competing for a smaller pool of residents.”

Dr. Wiese says academia can contribute by providing a solid foundation in medicine and a clear path to HM careers as next-generation physicians and leaders. “Hospitalists assuming more of a teaching role are good not only for hospital medicine, but internal medicine education,” Dr. Wiese says. “The stronger the mentors, the more internal medicine students you’re going to recruit.”

The same can be said of medical practice settings, Dr. Weinberger explains. Many ambulatory settings in which medical students and residents work are among the most poorly supported and operated, even though they have the sickest patients, he says. That can be a huge turnoff for medical students. To counter that negative, students must be exposed to higher-quality ambulatory settings, Dr. Weinberger says.

Medical schools can help the cause by admitting students who show an inclination to go into primary care and IM, says Dr. Rosenthal, of Thomas Jefferson University. Those students are more likely to leave medical school in pursuit of a generalist career—especially if they’re matched with good IM mentors.

Federal and state governments should consider paying the educational loans of medical students who promise to practice primary care or IM for a certain period of time, especially in high-need communities, Dr. Rosenthal says. Fifteen years ago, he was a lead author in a study published in the Journal of the American Medical Association that found a significant number of fourth-year medical students would go into primary care, including general IM, if positive changes were made to income, hours worked, and loan repayment.2 Dr. Rosenthal says he’s not surprised physicians and researchers are writing about the same topic today.

 

 

“The article was written in the Clinton era, at a time when there was a sense the nation’s healthcare system might be reformed. But there was backlash to the plan,” Dr. Rosenthal says. “Today, we are again considering healthcare reform, except this time people are more willing to accept it because the high cost of healthcare is now affecting businesses and the economy.”

click for large version
click for large version

Change in Outlook

President Obama’s stated goal of extending health insurance to more Americans makes increasing the ranks of primary-care physicians, general internists, and hospitalists even more urgent, experts say. In Massachusetts, a state that is experimenting with universal health coverage for all of its residents, a shortfall in the primary-care work force is evident, Dr. Weinberger says. It is troubling news, because research consistently shows that when a primary-care physician coordinates a patient’s care, the result is fewer visits to the ED and medical specialists, he says.

“What this means is, we need more internists in the outpatient side to care for these patients longitudinally,” Dr. Dressler says. “We need more hospitalists, as the burden of inpatient care is very likely to grow as well.”

Dr. Rosenthal says more students will be attracted to medicine in part because the recession is making solid, good-paying jobs that play a vital role in communities very attractive. If better support were available for students interested in primary care, he says, he would have reason to hope more students would choose generalist careers.

“There was this expectation among people in their 20s that, if they were bright and able, they would have a nice lifestyle without having to work too hard. But the recession is having an effect on this generation’s outlook,” Dr. Rosenthal says. “I think there is a changing landscape out there.” TH

Lisa Ryan is a freelance writer based in New Jersey.

References

  1. McDonald FS, West CP, Popkave C, Kolars JC. Educational debt and reported career plans among internal medicine residents. Ann Intern Med. 2008;149(6): 416-420.
  2. Rosenthal MP, Diamond JJ, Rabinowitz HK, et al. Influence of income, hours worked, and loan repayment on medical students’ decision to pursue a primary care career. JAMA. 1994;271(12):914-917.
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(07)
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(07)
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
Financial Fallout
Display Headline
Financial Fallout
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)

The Big One

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 09/14/2018 - 12:33
Display Headline
The Big One

In March 2005 the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality and the HHS Office of Public Health Emergency Preparedness published a report of guidelines for officials on how to plan for delivering health and medical care in a mass casualty event.1

After federal, state, and local authorities’ failure to supply desperately needed assistance following Hurricane Katrina, that report of recommendations from a 39-member panel of experts in bioethics, emergency medicine, emergency management, health administration, health law, and policy is more crucial than ever. This report offers a framework for providing optimal medical care during a potential bioterrorist attack or other public health emergency.

How well do you know your institutions’ plans and protocols for these types of events? How personally prepared are you and your families? Overall, what should your highest concerns be in order to prepare yourself now and in the future?

Definitions

The term disaster is defined many ways, but typically all definitions involve some sort of impact on the community and interruption of services from business as usual beyond the point where outside assistance is needed. Defining what is meant by a mass casualty incident (MCI), on the other hand, is more relative to the location in which it is being declared.

“Typically a mass casualty event is thought of as one in which the number of patients exceeds the amount of resources that are routinely available,” says Andrew Garrett, MD, FAAP, the director of disaster response and pediatric preparedness programs at the National Center for Disaster Preparedness at Columbia University’s Joseph L. Mailman School of Public Health, New York. “But that is a dynamic definition because in Chicago a bus accident with 15 patients might not be a mass casualty incident, but in rural Cody, Wyoming, a car accident with four people might be. It’s where you exceed the resources that are available locally that is important.”

The difference between an emergency, a disaster, or an MCI revolves more around semantics, the environment in which you will work, and the short-term goals of patient care. “We’re not asking people to reinvent the way in which they practice medicine,” says Dr. Garrett “but a disaster or MCI changes the paradigm in which they do it—to do the most good for the most people.”

Gurneys, patients, and staff members fill the hallway in the Red Zone trauma center at the Grady Hospital’s ED in downtown Atlanta. At this city's main trauma hospital, multi-hour lines of waiting patients clog the hallways—even on slow days. Doctors at Grady say they probably couldn't handle an MCI or incident with more than 20 or 30 severe injuries.

Who’s in Charge?

The Hospital Emergency Incident Command System (HEICS) was adapted from a plan to coordinate and improve the safety of the wildland firefighting system in California. It was transitioned to serve as a model in hospitals to meet the same goals of staff accountability and safety during a disaster response. HEICS places one “incident commander” at the top of the pyramid in charge of all the separate areas of responsibility, such as logistics, finance, operations, medical care, safety, and so on.

“The way the system works,” says Dr. Garrett, “is that everyone working in a hospital response is supervised by only one person who answers to the command staff. The goal is that there’s one incident commander who knows everything that’s going on at the incident to avoid the trap of multiple people making command decisions at the same time.”

Redundant command structure is a common problem in a large-scale response to disaster. That was certainly the case in Hurricane Katrina, he says, where multiple agencies—federal, state, and local—did not follow this model of disaster response.

 

 

“It’s a simple concept,” says Dr. Garrett, “but unless responders practice it, it is difficult to utilize in a real emergency.”

Every hospital should have a HEICS or similar structure set up and the key emergency response roles pre-identified by job title, he says. And while knowledge of weapons of mass destruction (WMD) and incident command is improving, says Stephen V. Cantrill, MD, FACEP, associate director, Department of Emergency Medicine at Denver Health Medical Center, “Some hospitals have taken it seriously; others wish the whole thing would go away.”

More than likely, in the event of a disaster, the HEICS organizational tree is outlined all the way to the top commander in your hospital’s plan. Your role, in general, may have already been determined in this plan, but the conventional wisdom in your hospital (as in most) may be: You’ll learn your roles and responsibilities when the time comes. In fact, depending on your setting, the hospitalist may hold the most senior position in-house overnight or on the weekend—especially if there is not an emergency department at the hospital.

“The thing is, at first people are going to look to the most senior clinician to be in charge during a crisis,” says Dr. Garrett. Perhaps the smaller the hospital, the more you need to know what to do and what is expected of you to fit into the larger picture in the community. “And even if it is a smaller hospital the system and the needs are the same.”

Hospitalists are invaluable resources in an institution and [in disaster events] they will be pressed into service because of their location. Especially in the private sector when it hits the fan, the hospitalist is going to be one of the first people to be called.—Stephen Cantrill, MD, FACEP

What Types of Care?

Although many types of events can be handled the same way, some involve additional concerns. “With WMD or a contagious disease outbreak, there is the added issue of ‘What’s the risk to me as a provider in the hospital?’” says Dr. Garrett. “And if it’s a community or statewide or national event, ‘What’s the risk to my family?’ Then you’re dealing with issues that aren’t business as usual.”

The hospitalist and the administration will then have to think about other complex issues such as how many people are not going to come to work. Added to that, with a smaller staff, you may need to ask, “What will the scope of my practice be if I’m called to the front of the hospital to help do triage? Roles and responsibilities can change very quickly,” he says.

“Hospitalists are invaluable resources in an institution and in fact [in disaster events] they will be pressed into service because of their location,” says Dr. Cantrill, who with colleagues has trained 15,000 healthcare providers throughout Colorado as one of 17 centers to receive a three-year grant from the Health Resources Services Administration (HRSA) to conduct WMD training. “Especially in the private sector when it hits the fan, the hospitalist is going to be one of the first people to be called.”

What to Ask Yourself, Your Staff, and Your Institution

Administration, Incident Command, Plans, and Instructions

  1. Who handles the plan in your institution? Who will be incident commander? At any hospital these key figures will usually include at least the chief operating officer, vice president of medical affairs, and an institutional facilities manager.
  2. Hospitals run the gamut on the range of their preparedness for disasters. Where is my hospital located on such a continuum?
  3. What do they expect of my hospital? What are the nursing expectations? What is our surge capacity for beds?
  4. What supports will my institution make available for populations with special needs such as the disabled and non-English speakers?
  5. What is the plan to help or provide for all kinds of visitors who are in the facility when an event occurs? This may include everything from people visiting patients to corporate administrators, drug representatives, suppliers, surgeons, or primary-care physicians on rounds, or volunteers.
  6. How involved will I be in larger outer levels of the facility’s plans (such as medical triage) or the more finite levels (such as moving patients when electricity goes out and use of elevators may be impeded)?
  7. What training has my institution done?

    1. How do we run mock disasters here?
    2. What kinds of mocks are we running?
    3. What kinds of mocks should we be running?

Staffing

  1. How prepared are we to go to flex staffing and scheduling to meet surge capacity?
  2. What will be the allowances for staff to leave because of their own family emergencies?
  3. Who will run equipment such as ventilators if electricity goes out (e.g., hand bagging by individual nurses or respiratory therapists)?

Personal and Family Disaster Plans

  1. What is my own personal plan for my family?

    1. Children’s schools?
    2. Spouse’s workplace?
    3. Parents or other older relatives if they are in long-term care or are incapacitated in some way?

  2. What do I need ready to meet my personal 72-hour capacity?

Communications

  1. What are the communication system plans for the external to internal, within internal, and then internal back out to external again—to providers, families, or my own staff’s sick patients?
  2. What data are being relied upon, and where does my accountability lie in terms of documentation we must supply?
  3. Am I going to be expected to do something in addition to the normal documentation I must complete in order to feed state or national data collection and analysis systems?
  4. Is there a way our IT people could create an alert for us with the top priorities in the event of disaster? (An example is an in-your-face pop-up dialogue box that flashes onto every computer in the hospital.)
  5. If we do not have a large-scale disaster plan, can we begin to step up our template for smaller internal disasters such as a fire or a water pipe breakage?
  6. Counties tend to be the sites that coordinate and direct the complete response.

    1. Is my institution’s facilities manager sitting at the table during countywide meetings, or is he/she electronically connected to know what county plans are?
    2. What does my county do? Do we know what our county emergency systems can offer?
    3. Who is responsible in my county for activating a disaster response?
    4. How do they connect to my institution?
    5. With whom do they connect at my institution?
    6. What is my hospital’s system of being notified and notifying me?

Expectations, Roles, and Responsibilities

  1. What responsibilities outside of patient care may I be called upon to take on?
  2. What will or might be expected of me?

    1. Where does my institution’s algorithm end? At the emergency department, or are hospitalists specifically mentioned?
    2. Where does the hospital see me fitting? If that is unknown, have I told my hospital what my own skill set is and what I can offer?
    3. What kind of specialty care do I offer that they think that I can then gear up for?

Resources: Supplies, Equipment, and Support

  1. What is our hospital’s 72-hour capacity? What do I/we need and how do I get it to exist for 72 hours? Some questions may include:

    1. What does the hospital have in storage?
    2. Who are my delivery people?
    3. How often does the hospital obtain delivery?
    4. If I’m at home, could emergency personnel or others get to me? What’s an alternate route?

  2. How many patients can the hospital support with ventilators?

Risks and Protection

  1. What are our largest areas of vulnerability?
  2. What are my local public health resources? What are my best local Web links that will tell me what I need to do for my work and for my family?
  3. What are the personal legal ramifications of acting outside my scope of practice?
  4. What is my institution’s policy and plan for administering antiviral or antibiotic prophylaxis to providers? To their families?
  5. What special risks does my hospital or geography face? What is makes my facility potentially at risk for having a disaster?

    1. Is this a border town?
    2. Do we have earthquakes? Tornadoes, hurricanes, floods?
    3. Do I have a changing transportation structure because freeways are now being closed down?

  6. Overall, what assumptions am I making?

 

 

In most disasters, the hospitalist’s medical practice will be a departure from the details of daily practice. “Because the majority of hospitalists have internal medicine as their background … they tend to be very detail oriented, which is really their strength,” says Dr. Cantrill. “But in a case like this, they may not have that luxury.”

Another major consideration and “probably the stickiest one,” is altering your standards of care in terms of providing efficiency care or austere care as opposed to what you normally consider appropriate medical care.

What hospitalists will do in any disaster depends on the event—natural, biological, chemical, or use of weaponry—and how your metropolitan or rural area is set up. If it is a biological or bioterrorist event, the pathogen involved may make a difference. Although anthrax is not contagious, for instance, in the event of a large-scale airborne anthrax attack, the need for ventilators will quickly overwhelm resources.2 “That’s one of our largest areas of vulnerability,” says Dr. Cantrill, “whether we’re talking influenza or pneumonic plague, it still is an important factor: How many people can I support?”

The issue of limited ventilators may not be completely soluble, he explains. In ordinary circumstances hospitals can get, say, ventilators from a strategic national stockpile from which equipment can be flown out within 12 hours. Yet if an influenza pandemic breaks out, then the entire country may be involved, rendering that plan inoperable. And even if you have extra ventilators, do you have extra respiratory techs to administer them?

Dr. Cantrill’s institution, with a grant received from HRSA, offers a two-hour course to train people with some medical knowledge to be respiratory assistants who can manage ventilated patients in an emergency.

Injuries may increase exponentially in the case of a disaster. Other needs include vaccinations, treatment for dehydration, serious heat- and cold-related illness, or threats from floodwater (i.e., water laced with toxic chemicals, human waste, fire ants, rats, and snakes).3

Kate Rathbun, MD, MPH, family physician in Baton Rouge, La., is certified in disaster management and knows well the problems that can arise in providing medical care in such an event.4 When Hurricane Katrina hit in 2005, everyone in range of the winds, rain, and destruction, “hunkered down to weather the storm.” The day after the storm, Dr. Rathbun joined other providers and administrators, opened their clinic, and readied themselves to treat trauma and lacerations. It soon became obvious that their biggest health issue was the inability of the displaced to manage their chronic diseases. (Baton Rouge’s normal population of 600,000 exceeded a million within days.)

In cases of diabetes, cardiac disease, HIV infection, or tuberculosis, for example, being without medications might mean lethal disease exacerbations.3 In many cases, patients have no prior history documentation on presentation, and with computers often shut down the provider is faced with prescribing for or actually putting a stock of medications into patients’ hands.

Additional concerns pertain to those who cannot receive hemodialysis or seizure prophylaxis; or disrupted care for those with special needs such as hospice patients, the mentally and physically disabled, the elderly, and individuals in detox programs.

When Dr. Rathbun and her coworkers put a couple of nurses on the phones to handle incoming requests for drugs, she gave them some standards: If it’s for chronic disease medications, prescribe a 30-day supply and three refills (to ensure that 30 days later they would not once again be inundated with calls). When patients requested narcotics or scheduled drugs, they were told they would have to be seen by a provider.

 

 

Branching Points and Skill Sets

What will your community expect your institution to respond to and provide in the event of disaster? Here is where hospitalists can delineate what they can do when the time comes, says Erin Stucky, MD, a pediatric hospitalist at Children’s Hospital, San Diego.

“Most disaster preparedness algorithms have roles based on ‘hospital-based providers,’” she says, “but when it comes down to medical administration, many of them stop at the emergency department.”

From that point on they are likely to say “I don’t know”—that is, the rest of that decision tree is left in the hands of whoever is in the lead positions of physician, administrator, and nurse.

“That’s where the hospitalist can say, ‘Let me tell you my skill set,’” says Dr. Stucky, such as “I can triage patients; I can help to coordinate and disseminate information or help to outside providers who are calling; I can help to coordinate provider groups to go to different areas within our hospital to coordinate staffing … because I know operating rooms or I know this subset of patient types.”

At some institutions where hospitalists have been around for a longer time the disaster plan’s algorithm has branching points that don’t end in the emergency department. “Each [branch] has separate blocks that are horizontally equivalent,” says Dr. Stucky, “and the bleed-down [recognizes] the hospitalist as the major ward medical officer responsible for ensuring that floor 6, that’s neuro, and floor 5, hem-onc, and so on, have the correct staffing and are responsible for people reporting to them as well as dividing them as a labor pool into who’s available to go where.”

In general, however, regardless of setting, she says, a “hospitalist knows intimately the structure of the hospital, the flow between units, and can help other patients to get to different parts of the institution where care is still safe, such as observation areas.”

Communications: Up and Down, Out and In

Part of the global-facility thought process must include what communications will be for everything from the county medical system and EMS response to, within an institution, the communication between floors and between people on horizontal lines of authority. In addition, information in and out of the hospital from workers to their families is crucial so that workers can concentrate on the tasks at hand.

Questions must be considered ahead of time: How do I communicate to those people outside whom I need to have come in? How do I get response to the appropriate people who are calling in to find out how many patients we’re caring for? There may be other calls from someone who says, for example, that the ventilator has stopped working for her elderly mother.

And hospitalists must also be ready to support the urgent care or primary care satellite clinics and communicate what’s going on at the hospital, says Dr. Rathbun, “so that someone like me, who is a primary care practitioner in the community, can know that if I call this number or this person, I’m going to be able to say, ‘I’m down here at the [clinic] and here’s what I’ve got,’ or “I know things are terrible, but I have a diabetic you had in the hospital three weeks ago who’s crashed again, and you’ve got to find him a bed.’”

Communication plans might include the provision of satellite phones or two-way radios, says Dr. Stucky, and this will affect concrete issues, such as staffing and allowances for who can come and leave.

“In our institution we make this [communication] a unit-specific responsibility of the nurse team leader,” she says. “The nurses each have a phone and those nurse phones are freed up for any person available on that unit to be used to communicate with the outside world.”

 

 

Personal Disaster Plans

“I think another vitally important—and I mean vital importance in the same manner as vital signs—is for each hospitalist to have a personal disaster plan for their family/personal life,” says Mitchell Wilson, MD, medical director, FirstHealth of the Carolinas Hospitalist Services and section chief of Hospital Medicine in the Department of Medicine at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. “As the front line ‘foot soldier,’ the potential to harm our families during a pandemic is enormous.”

Dr. Garrett agrees. “One of the things that we’re not so good at in this country is coming up with emergency plans for our own family—even those of us who are in the medical business and take care of others,” he says. “Taking this step just makes good sense—and serves to be able to maximize your own availability and also be confident that you have the ways and means to know that your family is safe and secure and given the best opportunity to survive in a disaster.”

According to Dr. Wilson, families with vulnerable members, such as the young, elderly, and infirm, must have a plan in place to minimize the risk to them. “The hospitalist who comes home sick [or] infected is a danger to the very safe place [to] which [hospitalists and their families] seek refuge,” he says.

Preparedness includes delineating in your family what your points of contact will be. “Part of the stress that’s involved in being a physician and being expected to report to work [may involve] worrying where your family is or whether they have a safe meeting place; who’s picking up the children from school; does the school for my children have a plan, etc.,” says Dr. Garrett.

If you know that your children’s school has an emergency plan, your spouse’s workplace has a plan, and any relative in a long-term care facility has a plan, you’ll be much more likely to stay on the job and care for patients.

“And if my child is on a school bus that needs to be evacuated somewhere out of town,” he says, “I want to know there’s a phone number that my whole family knows to reconnect somehow.”

Disease Surveillance

Disease surveillance is of huge importance to detect and monitor biological terrorist and natural threats. The North Carolina Disease Event Tracking and Epidemiological Collection Tool (NC DETECT), a reporting and surveillance system, was awarded the 2005 Nicholas E. Davies Award of Excellence in the Public Health category by the Healthcare Information and Management Systems Society. The Davies Award program honors Nicholas Davies, MD, an Atlanta-based practice physician and former chairperson-elect of the American College of Physicians, who was committed to improving patient care through better health information management. Dr. Davies was killed in a plane crash with Senator John G. Tower (R-TX) in April 1991.

“One of the things that we’ve done in North Carolina that contributed to our receiving the award was the fact that we really did build this from the bottom up,” says NC DETECT’s Waller. There was guidance from the top down, she explains, but efforts began on a basis whereby hospitals came on board voluntarily and agreed to provide the information they had electronically. In turn, the epidemiology team agreed to give information back to them. “It was very much a joint effort working with the local hospitals and the state-level public health people and bringing them together and designing a system that would meet everyone’s needs with the least impact on the workload for the local hospital.”

Waller says the program was designed to alleviate emergency department clinicians from having to do anything extra in addition to their normal methods of documentation. “We were just going to pull out the electronic information they were collecting and then standardize it centrally, utilize it, and provide a report back to them,” she explains.

Although this system is clearly driven to supply needed information to the state, “we recognize that individual clinicians, administrators, and people at the hospital level also need to know what’s going on in their emergency department,” says Waller. “And it gives them a window into the sort of information that they might not have ever had before.”—AS

 

 

No Assumptions

Losing utility power is always a concern in emergencies and disasters. “After 9/11 in New York City, lots of people flooded into emergency departments,” says Ann Waller, ScD, an associate professor in the Department of Emergency Medicine at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill and the UNC director for NC DETECT. (See “Disease Surveillance,” p. 20.)

“The emergency departments abandoned their electronic systems and went back to paper and pencil because it was faster to just do the bare minimum … and get them into each team than to enter all the information required,” she explains. “That was a real eye-opener for those of us who rely on electronic data.”

Preparing for crisis involves imagining the inaccessibility of all electronic communications and records, including data collection and surveillance, pharmacy, e-mail, and historical documentation and other medical records.

The general rule in disaster preparedness is to plan for 72-hour capacity: How and what do I need to exist for 72 hours? “And the standard is that you should try to do that for your average daily census plus 100 patients,” says Dr. Stucky.

Scheduling and staffing is another issue. “Be prepared to provide flex staffing and scheduling to provide surge capacity,” says Dr. Wilson.

Think on Your Feet: Training

If they are so inclined, hospitalists can become involved in disaster response, through disaster medical assistance teams, community emergency response teams, or through the Red Cross—to name a few. And there are plenty of ways to take advantage of free training, some of which provide CME.

Another important question to ask of your institution, says Dr. Stucky (who co-presented on the topic of disaster preparedness at this year’s SHM Annual Meeting) is whether they have run any mock disasters.

“You have to do that,” she says. “Half of disaster response is preparedness, but the other half is thinking on your feet. And there’s no way to do that without mocking a drill.”

While there can be value in computer-run mock-ups, “there’s nothing like doing it,” she says. “We learn at least 25 things every time we do it.” And though one drill does not a totally prepared institution make, “it does mean at least you have the right people in those strategic positions [and they] are people who can think on their feet.”

A valuable training resource from AHRQ is listed in the resources at the end of this article.5

Be Prepared

With the vast amount of information on disaster preparedness available, one clear goal is to narrow it to avoid feeling overwhelmed.

“I think that is a real challenge,” says Dr. Cantrill, “but the first step is the motivation to at least look.”

Take for example the motivation of a flu pandemic. “It’s going to happen sooner or later, one of these days, but we know it this time,” says Waller. “We have the ability to be more prepared. … This is a huge opportunity to see it coming and to do as much as we can [correctly]. Which is not to say we can avoid everything, but at least we can be as prepared as we’ve ever been able to be.”

Conclusion

For hospitalists, there are several key techniques for individuals to be able to increase their readiness for disaster in the workplace. The first is to avoid relying initially or entirely on external help to supply a response, says Dr. Garrett: “You are the medical response, and there may be a delay until outside assistance is available.”

 

 

A second key is to visualize—as well as possible—any circumstances you might face personally and professionally and to formulate questions, seek answers, and talk to colleagues and supervisors about what your role will be. A third factor is to participate in training in the form of drills and tabletop exercises for your hospital. An unpracticed disaster plan may be more dangerous than no plan at all. TH

Andrea Sattinger also writes the “Alliances” department in this issue.

References

  1. AHRQ. Altered Standards of Care in Mass Casualty Events. Rockville, MD: Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality; April 2005:Health Systems Research Inc. under Contract No. 290-04-0010.
  2. Hick JL, Hanfling D, Burstein JL, et al. Health care facility and community strategies for patient care surge capacity. Ann Emerg Med. 2004 Sep;44(3):253-261.
  3. Greenough PG, Kirsch TD. Hurricane Katrina. Public health response—assessing needs. N Engl J Med. 2005 Oct 13;353(15):1544-1546.
  4. Rathbun KC, Cranmer H. Hurricane Katrina and disaster medical care. N Engl J Med. 2006 Feb 16;354:772-773.
  5. Hsu EB, Jenckes MW, Catlett CL, et al. Training of hospital staff to respond to a mass casualty incident. Evidence Report/Technology Assessment No. 95. Rockville, MD: Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality. Prepared by the Johns Hopkins University Evidence-based Practice Center under Contract No. 290-02-0018; June 2004: AHRQ Publication No. 04-E015-2. Accessible at: www.ahrq.gov/downloads/pub/evidence/pdf/hospmci/hospmci.pdf. Last accessed June 1, 2006.

Resources

National Links

  • Centers for Disease Control, Emergency Preparedness and Response: www.bt.cdc.gov/
  • The Hospital Emergency Incident Command System (HEICS) is an emergency management system that employs a logical management structure, defined responsibilities, clear reporting channels, and a common nomenclature to help unify hospitals with other emergency responders: www.emsa.cahwnet.gov/dms2/heics3.htm
  • State, local, and tribal public health departments have their own public health preparedness and response plans.
  • The National Center for Environmental Health (NCEH): www.cdc.gov/nceh/emergency.htm.
  • Two other CDC resources contain materials to address public health preparedness needs: the Division of Emergency and Environmental Health Services (EEHS) and the Environmental Public Health Readiness Branch (EPHRB). See all-hazards public health emergency response guide): www.cdc.gov/nceh/eehs/
  • U.S. Department of Homeland Security, for family preparedness: www.ready.gov/
  • AHRQ bioterrorism link: www.ahrq.gov/news/pubcat/c_biot.htm#biot002
  • George Washington University Institute for Crisis, Disaster, and Risk Management offers programs, including training, in the area of crisis, emergency and risk management: www.gwu.edu/~icdrm/
  • North Carolina Links—North Carolina Office of Public Health Preparedness and Response (NC PHPR): www.epi.state.nc.us/epi/phpr/provides information and resources regarding the threat of bioterrorism and other emerging infectious diseases within the state and around the nation.
  • The Health Alert Network (HAN) system is designed to immediately alert key health officials and care providers in North Carolina to acts of bioterrorism as well as other types of emerging disease threats: www.nchan.org/
  • DPH Immunization branch: www.immunizenc.com/
  • State Web sites, such as San Diego Country Office of Emergency Systems: www.co.sandiego.ca.us/oes/ or the County of San Diego Health and Human Services Terrorism Preparedness: www.co.san-diego.ca.us/terrorism/links.html
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(07)
Publications
Sections

In March 2005 the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality and the HHS Office of Public Health Emergency Preparedness published a report of guidelines for officials on how to plan for delivering health and medical care in a mass casualty event.1

After federal, state, and local authorities’ failure to supply desperately needed assistance following Hurricane Katrina, that report of recommendations from a 39-member panel of experts in bioethics, emergency medicine, emergency management, health administration, health law, and policy is more crucial than ever. This report offers a framework for providing optimal medical care during a potential bioterrorist attack or other public health emergency.

How well do you know your institutions’ plans and protocols for these types of events? How personally prepared are you and your families? Overall, what should your highest concerns be in order to prepare yourself now and in the future?

Definitions

The term disaster is defined many ways, but typically all definitions involve some sort of impact on the community and interruption of services from business as usual beyond the point where outside assistance is needed. Defining what is meant by a mass casualty incident (MCI), on the other hand, is more relative to the location in which it is being declared.

“Typically a mass casualty event is thought of as one in which the number of patients exceeds the amount of resources that are routinely available,” says Andrew Garrett, MD, FAAP, the director of disaster response and pediatric preparedness programs at the National Center for Disaster Preparedness at Columbia University’s Joseph L. Mailman School of Public Health, New York. “But that is a dynamic definition because in Chicago a bus accident with 15 patients might not be a mass casualty incident, but in rural Cody, Wyoming, a car accident with four people might be. It’s where you exceed the resources that are available locally that is important.”

The difference between an emergency, a disaster, or an MCI revolves more around semantics, the environment in which you will work, and the short-term goals of patient care. “We’re not asking people to reinvent the way in which they practice medicine,” says Dr. Garrett “but a disaster or MCI changes the paradigm in which they do it—to do the most good for the most people.”

Gurneys, patients, and staff members fill the hallway in the Red Zone trauma center at the Grady Hospital’s ED in downtown Atlanta. At this city's main trauma hospital, multi-hour lines of waiting patients clog the hallways—even on slow days. Doctors at Grady say they probably couldn't handle an MCI or incident with more than 20 or 30 severe injuries.

Who’s in Charge?

The Hospital Emergency Incident Command System (HEICS) was adapted from a plan to coordinate and improve the safety of the wildland firefighting system in California. It was transitioned to serve as a model in hospitals to meet the same goals of staff accountability and safety during a disaster response. HEICS places one “incident commander” at the top of the pyramid in charge of all the separate areas of responsibility, such as logistics, finance, operations, medical care, safety, and so on.

“The way the system works,” says Dr. Garrett, “is that everyone working in a hospital response is supervised by only one person who answers to the command staff. The goal is that there’s one incident commander who knows everything that’s going on at the incident to avoid the trap of multiple people making command decisions at the same time.”

Redundant command structure is a common problem in a large-scale response to disaster. That was certainly the case in Hurricane Katrina, he says, where multiple agencies—federal, state, and local—did not follow this model of disaster response.

 

 

“It’s a simple concept,” says Dr. Garrett, “but unless responders practice it, it is difficult to utilize in a real emergency.”

Every hospital should have a HEICS or similar structure set up and the key emergency response roles pre-identified by job title, he says. And while knowledge of weapons of mass destruction (WMD) and incident command is improving, says Stephen V. Cantrill, MD, FACEP, associate director, Department of Emergency Medicine at Denver Health Medical Center, “Some hospitals have taken it seriously; others wish the whole thing would go away.”

More than likely, in the event of a disaster, the HEICS organizational tree is outlined all the way to the top commander in your hospital’s plan. Your role, in general, may have already been determined in this plan, but the conventional wisdom in your hospital (as in most) may be: You’ll learn your roles and responsibilities when the time comes. In fact, depending on your setting, the hospitalist may hold the most senior position in-house overnight or on the weekend—especially if there is not an emergency department at the hospital.

“The thing is, at first people are going to look to the most senior clinician to be in charge during a crisis,” says Dr. Garrett. Perhaps the smaller the hospital, the more you need to know what to do and what is expected of you to fit into the larger picture in the community. “And even if it is a smaller hospital the system and the needs are the same.”

Hospitalists are invaluable resources in an institution and [in disaster events] they will be pressed into service because of their location. Especially in the private sector when it hits the fan, the hospitalist is going to be one of the first people to be called.—Stephen Cantrill, MD, FACEP

What Types of Care?

Although many types of events can be handled the same way, some involve additional concerns. “With WMD or a contagious disease outbreak, there is the added issue of ‘What’s the risk to me as a provider in the hospital?’” says Dr. Garrett. “And if it’s a community or statewide or national event, ‘What’s the risk to my family?’ Then you’re dealing with issues that aren’t business as usual.”

The hospitalist and the administration will then have to think about other complex issues such as how many people are not going to come to work. Added to that, with a smaller staff, you may need to ask, “What will the scope of my practice be if I’m called to the front of the hospital to help do triage? Roles and responsibilities can change very quickly,” he says.

“Hospitalists are invaluable resources in an institution and in fact [in disaster events] they will be pressed into service because of their location,” says Dr. Cantrill, who with colleagues has trained 15,000 healthcare providers throughout Colorado as one of 17 centers to receive a three-year grant from the Health Resources Services Administration (HRSA) to conduct WMD training. “Especially in the private sector when it hits the fan, the hospitalist is going to be one of the first people to be called.”

What to Ask Yourself, Your Staff, and Your Institution

Administration, Incident Command, Plans, and Instructions

  1. Who handles the plan in your institution? Who will be incident commander? At any hospital these key figures will usually include at least the chief operating officer, vice president of medical affairs, and an institutional facilities manager.
  2. Hospitals run the gamut on the range of their preparedness for disasters. Where is my hospital located on such a continuum?
  3. What do they expect of my hospital? What are the nursing expectations? What is our surge capacity for beds?
  4. What supports will my institution make available for populations with special needs such as the disabled and non-English speakers?
  5. What is the plan to help or provide for all kinds of visitors who are in the facility when an event occurs? This may include everything from people visiting patients to corporate administrators, drug representatives, suppliers, surgeons, or primary-care physicians on rounds, or volunteers.
  6. How involved will I be in larger outer levels of the facility’s plans (such as medical triage) or the more finite levels (such as moving patients when electricity goes out and use of elevators may be impeded)?
  7. What training has my institution done?

    1. How do we run mock disasters here?
    2. What kinds of mocks are we running?
    3. What kinds of mocks should we be running?

Staffing

  1. How prepared are we to go to flex staffing and scheduling to meet surge capacity?
  2. What will be the allowances for staff to leave because of their own family emergencies?
  3. Who will run equipment such as ventilators if electricity goes out (e.g., hand bagging by individual nurses or respiratory therapists)?

Personal and Family Disaster Plans

  1. What is my own personal plan for my family?

    1. Children’s schools?
    2. Spouse’s workplace?
    3. Parents or other older relatives if they are in long-term care or are incapacitated in some way?

  2. What do I need ready to meet my personal 72-hour capacity?

Communications

  1. What are the communication system plans for the external to internal, within internal, and then internal back out to external again—to providers, families, or my own staff’s sick patients?
  2. What data are being relied upon, and where does my accountability lie in terms of documentation we must supply?
  3. Am I going to be expected to do something in addition to the normal documentation I must complete in order to feed state or national data collection and analysis systems?
  4. Is there a way our IT people could create an alert for us with the top priorities in the event of disaster? (An example is an in-your-face pop-up dialogue box that flashes onto every computer in the hospital.)
  5. If we do not have a large-scale disaster plan, can we begin to step up our template for smaller internal disasters such as a fire or a water pipe breakage?
  6. Counties tend to be the sites that coordinate and direct the complete response.

    1. Is my institution’s facilities manager sitting at the table during countywide meetings, or is he/she electronically connected to know what county plans are?
    2. What does my county do? Do we know what our county emergency systems can offer?
    3. Who is responsible in my county for activating a disaster response?
    4. How do they connect to my institution?
    5. With whom do they connect at my institution?
    6. What is my hospital’s system of being notified and notifying me?

Expectations, Roles, and Responsibilities

  1. What responsibilities outside of patient care may I be called upon to take on?
  2. What will or might be expected of me?

    1. Where does my institution’s algorithm end? At the emergency department, or are hospitalists specifically mentioned?
    2. Where does the hospital see me fitting? If that is unknown, have I told my hospital what my own skill set is and what I can offer?
    3. What kind of specialty care do I offer that they think that I can then gear up for?

Resources: Supplies, Equipment, and Support

  1. What is our hospital’s 72-hour capacity? What do I/we need and how do I get it to exist for 72 hours? Some questions may include:

    1. What does the hospital have in storage?
    2. Who are my delivery people?
    3. How often does the hospital obtain delivery?
    4. If I’m at home, could emergency personnel or others get to me? What’s an alternate route?

  2. How many patients can the hospital support with ventilators?

Risks and Protection

  1. What are our largest areas of vulnerability?
  2. What are my local public health resources? What are my best local Web links that will tell me what I need to do for my work and for my family?
  3. What are the personal legal ramifications of acting outside my scope of practice?
  4. What is my institution’s policy and plan for administering antiviral or antibiotic prophylaxis to providers? To their families?
  5. What special risks does my hospital or geography face? What is makes my facility potentially at risk for having a disaster?

    1. Is this a border town?
    2. Do we have earthquakes? Tornadoes, hurricanes, floods?
    3. Do I have a changing transportation structure because freeways are now being closed down?

  6. Overall, what assumptions am I making?

 

 

In most disasters, the hospitalist’s medical practice will be a departure from the details of daily practice. “Because the majority of hospitalists have internal medicine as their background … they tend to be very detail oriented, which is really their strength,” says Dr. Cantrill. “But in a case like this, they may not have that luxury.”

Another major consideration and “probably the stickiest one,” is altering your standards of care in terms of providing efficiency care or austere care as opposed to what you normally consider appropriate medical care.

What hospitalists will do in any disaster depends on the event—natural, biological, chemical, or use of weaponry—and how your metropolitan or rural area is set up. If it is a biological or bioterrorist event, the pathogen involved may make a difference. Although anthrax is not contagious, for instance, in the event of a large-scale airborne anthrax attack, the need for ventilators will quickly overwhelm resources.2 “That’s one of our largest areas of vulnerability,” says Dr. Cantrill, “whether we’re talking influenza or pneumonic plague, it still is an important factor: How many people can I support?”

The issue of limited ventilators may not be completely soluble, he explains. In ordinary circumstances hospitals can get, say, ventilators from a strategic national stockpile from which equipment can be flown out within 12 hours. Yet if an influenza pandemic breaks out, then the entire country may be involved, rendering that plan inoperable. And even if you have extra ventilators, do you have extra respiratory techs to administer them?

Dr. Cantrill’s institution, with a grant received from HRSA, offers a two-hour course to train people with some medical knowledge to be respiratory assistants who can manage ventilated patients in an emergency.

Injuries may increase exponentially in the case of a disaster. Other needs include vaccinations, treatment for dehydration, serious heat- and cold-related illness, or threats from floodwater (i.e., water laced with toxic chemicals, human waste, fire ants, rats, and snakes).3

Kate Rathbun, MD, MPH, family physician in Baton Rouge, La., is certified in disaster management and knows well the problems that can arise in providing medical care in such an event.4 When Hurricane Katrina hit in 2005, everyone in range of the winds, rain, and destruction, “hunkered down to weather the storm.” The day after the storm, Dr. Rathbun joined other providers and administrators, opened their clinic, and readied themselves to treat trauma and lacerations. It soon became obvious that their biggest health issue was the inability of the displaced to manage their chronic diseases. (Baton Rouge’s normal population of 600,000 exceeded a million within days.)

In cases of diabetes, cardiac disease, HIV infection, or tuberculosis, for example, being without medications might mean lethal disease exacerbations.3 In many cases, patients have no prior history documentation on presentation, and with computers often shut down the provider is faced with prescribing for or actually putting a stock of medications into patients’ hands.

Additional concerns pertain to those who cannot receive hemodialysis or seizure prophylaxis; or disrupted care for those with special needs such as hospice patients, the mentally and physically disabled, the elderly, and individuals in detox programs.

When Dr. Rathbun and her coworkers put a couple of nurses on the phones to handle incoming requests for drugs, she gave them some standards: If it’s for chronic disease medications, prescribe a 30-day supply and three refills (to ensure that 30 days later they would not once again be inundated with calls). When patients requested narcotics or scheduled drugs, they were told they would have to be seen by a provider.

 

 

Branching Points and Skill Sets

What will your community expect your institution to respond to and provide in the event of disaster? Here is where hospitalists can delineate what they can do when the time comes, says Erin Stucky, MD, a pediatric hospitalist at Children’s Hospital, San Diego.

“Most disaster preparedness algorithms have roles based on ‘hospital-based providers,’” she says, “but when it comes down to medical administration, many of them stop at the emergency department.”

From that point on they are likely to say “I don’t know”—that is, the rest of that decision tree is left in the hands of whoever is in the lead positions of physician, administrator, and nurse.

“That’s where the hospitalist can say, ‘Let me tell you my skill set,’” says Dr. Stucky, such as “I can triage patients; I can help to coordinate and disseminate information or help to outside providers who are calling; I can help to coordinate provider groups to go to different areas within our hospital to coordinate staffing … because I know operating rooms or I know this subset of patient types.”

At some institutions where hospitalists have been around for a longer time the disaster plan’s algorithm has branching points that don’t end in the emergency department. “Each [branch] has separate blocks that are horizontally equivalent,” says Dr. Stucky, “and the bleed-down [recognizes] the hospitalist as the major ward medical officer responsible for ensuring that floor 6, that’s neuro, and floor 5, hem-onc, and so on, have the correct staffing and are responsible for people reporting to them as well as dividing them as a labor pool into who’s available to go where.”

In general, however, regardless of setting, she says, a “hospitalist knows intimately the structure of the hospital, the flow between units, and can help other patients to get to different parts of the institution where care is still safe, such as observation areas.”

Communications: Up and Down, Out and In

Part of the global-facility thought process must include what communications will be for everything from the county medical system and EMS response to, within an institution, the communication between floors and between people on horizontal lines of authority. In addition, information in and out of the hospital from workers to their families is crucial so that workers can concentrate on the tasks at hand.

Questions must be considered ahead of time: How do I communicate to those people outside whom I need to have come in? How do I get response to the appropriate people who are calling in to find out how many patients we’re caring for? There may be other calls from someone who says, for example, that the ventilator has stopped working for her elderly mother.

And hospitalists must also be ready to support the urgent care or primary care satellite clinics and communicate what’s going on at the hospital, says Dr. Rathbun, “so that someone like me, who is a primary care practitioner in the community, can know that if I call this number or this person, I’m going to be able to say, ‘I’m down here at the [clinic] and here’s what I’ve got,’ or “I know things are terrible, but I have a diabetic you had in the hospital three weeks ago who’s crashed again, and you’ve got to find him a bed.’”

Communication plans might include the provision of satellite phones or two-way radios, says Dr. Stucky, and this will affect concrete issues, such as staffing and allowances for who can come and leave.

“In our institution we make this [communication] a unit-specific responsibility of the nurse team leader,” she says. “The nurses each have a phone and those nurse phones are freed up for any person available on that unit to be used to communicate with the outside world.”

 

 

Personal Disaster Plans

“I think another vitally important—and I mean vital importance in the same manner as vital signs—is for each hospitalist to have a personal disaster plan for their family/personal life,” says Mitchell Wilson, MD, medical director, FirstHealth of the Carolinas Hospitalist Services and section chief of Hospital Medicine in the Department of Medicine at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. “As the front line ‘foot soldier,’ the potential to harm our families during a pandemic is enormous.”

Dr. Garrett agrees. “One of the things that we’re not so good at in this country is coming up with emergency plans for our own family—even those of us who are in the medical business and take care of others,” he says. “Taking this step just makes good sense—and serves to be able to maximize your own availability and also be confident that you have the ways and means to know that your family is safe and secure and given the best opportunity to survive in a disaster.”

According to Dr. Wilson, families with vulnerable members, such as the young, elderly, and infirm, must have a plan in place to minimize the risk to them. “The hospitalist who comes home sick [or] infected is a danger to the very safe place [to] which [hospitalists and their families] seek refuge,” he says.

Preparedness includes delineating in your family what your points of contact will be. “Part of the stress that’s involved in being a physician and being expected to report to work [may involve] worrying where your family is or whether they have a safe meeting place; who’s picking up the children from school; does the school for my children have a plan, etc.,” says Dr. Garrett.

If you know that your children’s school has an emergency plan, your spouse’s workplace has a plan, and any relative in a long-term care facility has a plan, you’ll be much more likely to stay on the job and care for patients.

“And if my child is on a school bus that needs to be evacuated somewhere out of town,” he says, “I want to know there’s a phone number that my whole family knows to reconnect somehow.”

Disease Surveillance

Disease surveillance is of huge importance to detect and monitor biological terrorist and natural threats. The North Carolina Disease Event Tracking and Epidemiological Collection Tool (NC DETECT), a reporting and surveillance system, was awarded the 2005 Nicholas E. Davies Award of Excellence in the Public Health category by the Healthcare Information and Management Systems Society. The Davies Award program honors Nicholas Davies, MD, an Atlanta-based practice physician and former chairperson-elect of the American College of Physicians, who was committed to improving patient care through better health information management. Dr. Davies was killed in a plane crash with Senator John G. Tower (R-TX) in April 1991.

“One of the things that we’ve done in North Carolina that contributed to our receiving the award was the fact that we really did build this from the bottom up,” says NC DETECT’s Waller. There was guidance from the top down, she explains, but efforts began on a basis whereby hospitals came on board voluntarily and agreed to provide the information they had electronically. In turn, the epidemiology team agreed to give information back to them. “It was very much a joint effort working with the local hospitals and the state-level public health people and bringing them together and designing a system that would meet everyone’s needs with the least impact on the workload for the local hospital.”

Waller says the program was designed to alleviate emergency department clinicians from having to do anything extra in addition to their normal methods of documentation. “We were just going to pull out the electronic information they were collecting and then standardize it centrally, utilize it, and provide a report back to them,” she explains.

Although this system is clearly driven to supply needed information to the state, “we recognize that individual clinicians, administrators, and people at the hospital level also need to know what’s going on in their emergency department,” says Waller. “And it gives them a window into the sort of information that they might not have ever had before.”—AS

 

 

No Assumptions

Losing utility power is always a concern in emergencies and disasters. “After 9/11 in New York City, lots of people flooded into emergency departments,” says Ann Waller, ScD, an associate professor in the Department of Emergency Medicine at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill and the UNC director for NC DETECT. (See “Disease Surveillance,” p. 20.)

“The emergency departments abandoned their electronic systems and went back to paper and pencil because it was faster to just do the bare minimum … and get them into each team than to enter all the information required,” she explains. “That was a real eye-opener for those of us who rely on electronic data.”

Preparing for crisis involves imagining the inaccessibility of all electronic communications and records, including data collection and surveillance, pharmacy, e-mail, and historical documentation and other medical records.

The general rule in disaster preparedness is to plan for 72-hour capacity: How and what do I need to exist for 72 hours? “And the standard is that you should try to do that for your average daily census plus 100 patients,” says Dr. Stucky.

Scheduling and staffing is another issue. “Be prepared to provide flex staffing and scheduling to provide surge capacity,” says Dr. Wilson.

Think on Your Feet: Training

If they are so inclined, hospitalists can become involved in disaster response, through disaster medical assistance teams, community emergency response teams, or through the Red Cross—to name a few. And there are plenty of ways to take advantage of free training, some of which provide CME.

Another important question to ask of your institution, says Dr. Stucky (who co-presented on the topic of disaster preparedness at this year’s SHM Annual Meeting) is whether they have run any mock disasters.

“You have to do that,” she says. “Half of disaster response is preparedness, but the other half is thinking on your feet. And there’s no way to do that without mocking a drill.”

While there can be value in computer-run mock-ups, “there’s nothing like doing it,” she says. “We learn at least 25 things every time we do it.” And though one drill does not a totally prepared institution make, “it does mean at least you have the right people in those strategic positions [and they] are people who can think on their feet.”

A valuable training resource from AHRQ is listed in the resources at the end of this article.5

Be Prepared

With the vast amount of information on disaster preparedness available, one clear goal is to narrow it to avoid feeling overwhelmed.

“I think that is a real challenge,” says Dr. Cantrill, “but the first step is the motivation to at least look.”

Take for example the motivation of a flu pandemic. “It’s going to happen sooner or later, one of these days, but we know it this time,” says Waller. “We have the ability to be more prepared. … This is a huge opportunity to see it coming and to do as much as we can [correctly]. Which is not to say we can avoid everything, but at least we can be as prepared as we’ve ever been able to be.”

Conclusion

For hospitalists, there are several key techniques for individuals to be able to increase their readiness for disaster in the workplace. The first is to avoid relying initially or entirely on external help to supply a response, says Dr. Garrett: “You are the medical response, and there may be a delay until outside assistance is available.”

 

 

A second key is to visualize—as well as possible—any circumstances you might face personally and professionally and to formulate questions, seek answers, and talk to colleagues and supervisors about what your role will be. A third factor is to participate in training in the form of drills and tabletop exercises for your hospital. An unpracticed disaster plan may be more dangerous than no plan at all. TH

Andrea Sattinger also writes the “Alliances” department in this issue.

References

  1. AHRQ. Altered Standards of Care in Mass Casualty Events. Rockville, MD: Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality; April 2005:Health Systems Research Inc. under Contract No. 290-04-0010.
  2. Hick JL, Hanfling D, Burstein JL, et al. Health care facility and community strategies for patient care surge capacity. Ann Emerg Med. 2004 Sep;44(3):253-261.
  3. Greenough PG, Kirsch TD. Hurricane Katrina. Public health response—assessing needs. N Engl J Med. 2005 Oct 13;353(15):1544-1546.
  4. Rathbun KC, Cranmer H. Hurricane Katrina and disaster medical care. N Engl J Med. 2006 Feb 16;354:772-773.
  5. Hsu EB, Jenckes MW, Catlett CL, et al. Training of hospital staff to respond to a mass casualty incident. Evidence Report/Technology Assessment No. 95. Rockville, MD: Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality. Prepared by the Johns Hopkins University Evidence-based Practice Center under Contract No. 290-02-0018; June 2004: AHRQ Publication No. 04-E015-2. Accessible at: www.ahrq.gov/downloads/pub/evidence/pdf/hospmci/hospmci.pdf. Last accessed June 1, 2006.

Resources

National Links

  • Centers for Disease Control, Emergency Preparedness and Response: www.bt.cdc.gov/
  • The Hospital Emergency Incident Command System (HEICS) is an emergency management system that employs a logical management structure, defined responsibilities, clear reporting channels, and a common nomenclature to help unify hospitals with other emergency responders: www.emsa.cahwnet.gov/dms2/heics3.htm
  • State, local, and tribal public health departments have their own public health preparedness and response plans.
  • The National Center for Environmental Health (NCEH): www.cdc.gov/nceh/emergency.htm.
  • Two other CDC resources contain materials to address public health preparedness needs: the Division of Emergency and Environmental Health Services (EEHS) and the Environmental Public Health Readiness Branch (EPHRB). See all-hazards public health emergency response guide): www.cdc.gov/nceh/eehs/
  • U.S. Department of Homeland Security, for family preparedness: www.ready.gov/
  • AHRQ bioterrorism link: www.ahrq.gov/news/pubcat/c_biot.htm#biot002
  • George Washington University Institute for Crisis, Disaster, and Risk Management offers programs, including training, in the area of crisis, emergency and risk management: www.gwu.edu/~icdrm/
  • North Carolina Links—North Carolina Office of Public Health Preparedness and Response (NC PHPR): www.epi.state.nc.us/epi/phpr/provides information and resources regarding the threat of bioterrorism and other emerging infectious diseases within the state and around the nation.
  • The Health Alert Network (HAN) system is designed to immediately alert key health officials and care providers in North Carolina to acts of bioterrorism as well as other types of emerging disease threats: www.nchan.org/
  • DPH Immunization branch: www.immunizenc.com/
  • State Web sites, such as San Diego Country Office of Emergency Systems: www.co.sandiego.ca.us/oes/ or the County of San Diego Health and Human Services Terrorism Preparedness: www.co.san-diego.ca.us/terrorism/links.html

In March 2005 the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality and the HHS Office of Public Health Emergency Preparedness published a report of guidelines for officials on how to plan for delivering health and medical care in a mass casualty event.1

After federal, state, and local authorities’ failure to supply desperately needed assistance following Hurricane Katrina, that report of recommendations from a 39-member panel of experts in bioethics, emergency medicine, emergency management, health administration, health law, and policy is more crucial than ever. This report offers a framework for providing optimal medical care during a potential bioterrorist attack or other public health emergency.

How well do you know your institutions’ plans and protocols for these types of events? How personally prepared are you and your families? Overall, what should your highest concerns be in order to prepare yourself now and in the future?

Definitions

The term disaster is defined many ways, but typically all definitions involve some sort of impact on the community and interruption of services from business as usual beyond the point where outside assistance is needed. Defining what is meant by a mass casualty incident (MCI), on the other hand, is more relative to the location in which it is being declared.

“Typically a mass casualty event is thought of as one in which the number of patients exceeds the amount of resources that are routinely available,” says Andrew Garrett, MD, FAAP, the director of disaster response and pediatric preparedness programs at the National Center for Disaster Preparedness at Columbia University’s Joseph L. Mailman School of Public Health, New York. “But that is a dynamic definition because in Chicago a bus accident with 15 patients might not be a mass casualty incident, but in rural Cody, Wyoming, a car accident with four people might be. It’s where you exceed the resources that are available locally that is important.”

The difference between an emergency, a disaster, or an MCI revolves more around semantics, the environment in which you will work, and the short-term goals of patient care. “We’re not asking people to reinvent the way in which they practice medicine,” says Dr. Garrett “but a disaster or MCI changes the paradigm in which they do it—to do the most good for the most people.”

Gurneys, patients, and staff members fill the hallway in the Red Zone trauma center at the Grady Hospital’s ED in downtown Atlanta. At this city's main trauma hospital, multi-hour lines of waiting patients clog the hallways—even on slow days. Doctors at Grady say they probably couldn't handle an MCI or incident with more than 20 or 30 severe injuries.

Who’s in Charge?

The Hospital Emergency Incident Command System (HEICS) was adapted from a plan to coordinate and improve the safety of the wildland firefighting system in California. It was transitioned to serve as a model in hospitals to meet the same goals of staff accountability and safety during a disaster response. HEICS places one “incident commander” at the top of the pyramid in charge of all the separate areas of responsibility, such as logistics, finance, operations, medical care, safety, and so on.

“The way the system works,” says Dr. Garrett, “is that everyone working in a hospital response is supervised by only one person who answers to the command staff. The goal is that there’s one incident commander who knows everything that’s going on at the incident to avoid the trap of multiple people making command decisions at the same time.”

Redundant command structure is a common problem in a large-scale response to disaster. That was certainly the case in Hurricane Katrina, he says, where multiple agencies—federal, state, and local—did not follow this model of disaster response.

 

 

“It’s a simple concept,” says Dr. Garrett, “but unless responders practice it, it is difficult to utilize in a real emergency.”

Every hospital should have a HEICS or similar structure set up and the key emergency response roles pre-identified by job title, he says. And while knowledge of weapons of mass destruction (WMD) and incident command is improving, says Stephen V. Cantrill, MD, FACEP, associate director, Department of Emergency Medicine at Denver Health Medical Center, “Some hospitals have taken it seriously; others wish the whole thing would go away.”

More than likely, in the event of a disaster, the HEICS organizational tree is outlined all the way to the top commander in your hospital’s plan. Your role, in general, may have already been determined in this plan, but the conventional wisdom in your hospital (as in most) may be: You’ll learn your roles and responsibilities when the time comes. In fact, depending on your setting, the hospitalist may hold the most senior position in-house overnight or on the weekend—especially if there is not an emergency department at the hospital.

“The thing is, at first people are going to look to the most senior clinician to be in charge during a crisis,” says Dr. Garrett. Perhaps the smaller the hospital, the more you need to know what to do and what is expected of you to fit into the larger picture in the community. “And even if it is a smaller hospital the system and the needs are the same.”

Hospitalists are invaluable resources in an institution and [in disaster events] they will be pressed into service because of their location. Especially in the private sector when it hits the fan, the hospitalist is going to be one of the first people to be called.—Stephen Cantrill, MD, FACEP

What Types of Care?

Although many types of events can be handled the same way, some involve additional concerns. “With WMD or a contagious disease outbreak, there is the added issue of ‘What’s the risk to me as a provider in the hospital?’” says Dr. Garrett. “And if it’s a community or statewide or national event, ‘What’s the risk to my family?’ Then you’re dealing with issues that aren’t business as usual.”

The hospitalist and the administration will then have to think about other complex issues such as how many people are not going to come to work. Added to that, with a smaller staff, you may need to ask, “What will the scope of my practice be if I’m called to the front of the hospital to help do triage? Roles and responsibilities can change very quickly,” he says.

“Hospitalists are invaluable resources in an institution and in fact [in disaster events] they will be pressed into service because of their location,” says Dr. Cantrill, who with colleagues has trained 15,000 healthcare providers throughout Colorado as one of 17 centers to receive a three-year grant from the Health Resources Services Administration (HRSA) to conduct WMD training. “Especially in the private sector when it hits the fan, the hospitalist is going to be one of the first people to be called.”

What to Ask Yourself, Your Staff, and Your Institution

Administration, Incident Command, Plans, and Instructions

  1. Who handles the plan in your institution? Who will be incident commander? At any hospital these key figures will usually include at least the chief operating officer, vice president of medical affairs, and an institutional facilities manager.
  2. Hospitals run the gamut on the range of their preparedness for disasters. Where is my hospital located on such a continuum?
  3. What do they expect of my hospital? What are the nursing expectations? What is our surge capacity for beds?
  4. What supports will my institution make available for populations with special needs such as the disabled and non-English speakers?
  5. What is the plan to help or provide for all kinds of visitors who are in the facility when an event occurs? This may include everything from people visiting patients to corporate administrators, drug representatives, suppliers, surgeons, or primary-care physicians on rounds, or volunteers.
  6. How involved will I be in larger outer levels of the facility’s plans (such as medical triage) or the more finite levels (such as moving patients when electricity goes out and use of elevators may be impeded)?
  7. What training has my institution done?

    1. How do we run mock disasters here?
    2. What kinds of mocks are we running?
    3. What kinds of mocks should we be running?

Staffing

  1. How prepared are we to go to flex staffing and scheduling to meet surge capacity?
  2. What will be the allowances for staff to leave because of their own family emergencies?
  3. Who will run equipment such as ventilators if electricity goes out (e.g., hand bagging by individual nurses or respiratory therapists)?

Personal and Family Disaster Plans

  1. What is my own personal plan for my family?

    1. Children’s schools?
    2. Spouse’s workplace?
    3. Parents or other older relatives if they are in long-term care or are incapacitated in some way?

  2. What do I need ready to meet my personal 72-hour capacity?

Communications

  1. What are the communication system plans for the external to internal, within internal, and then internal back out to external again—to providers, families, or my own staff’s sick patients?
  2. What data are being relied upon, and where does my accountability lie in terms of documentation we must supply?
  3. Am I going to be expected to do something in addition to the normal documentation I must complete in order to feed state or national data collection and analysis systems?
  4. Is there a way our IT people could create an alert for us with the top priorities in the event of disaster? (An example is an in-your-face pop-up dialogue box that flashes onto every computer in the hospital.)
  5. If we do not have a large-scale disaster plan, can we begin to step up our template for smaller internal disasters such as a fire or a water pipe breakage?
  6. Counties tend to be the sites that coordinate and direct the complete response.

    1. Is my institution’s facilities manager sitting at the table during countywide meetings, or is he/she electronically connected to know what county plans are?
    2. What does my county do? Do we know what our county emergency systems can offer?
    3. Who is responsible in my county for activating a disaster response?
    4. How do they connect to my institution?
    5. With whom do they connect at my institution?
    6. What is my hospital’s system of being notified and notifying me?

Expectations, Roles, and Responsibilities

  1. What responsibilities outside of patient care may I be called upon to take on?
  2. What will or might be expected of me?

    1. Where does my institution’s algorithm end? At the emergency department, or are hospitalists specifically mentioned?
    2. Where does the hospital see me fitting? If that is unknown, have I told my hospital what my own skill set is and what I can offer?
    3. What kind of specialty care do I offer that they think that I can then gear up for?

Resources: Supplies, Equipment, and Support

  1. What is our hospital’s 72-hour capacity? What do I/we need and how do I get it to exist for 72 hours? Some questions may include:

    1. What does the hospital have in storage?
    2. Who are my delivery people?
    3. How often does the hospital obtain delivery?
    4. If I’m at home, could emergency personnel or others get to me? What’s an alternate route?

  2. How many patients can the hospital support with ventilators?

Risks and Protection

  1. What are our largest areas of vulnerability?
  2. What are my local public health resources? What are my best local Web links that will tell me what I need to do for my work and for my family?
  3. What are the personal legal ramifications of acting outside my scope of practice?
  4. What is my institution’s policy and plan for administering antiviral or antibiotic prophylaxis to providers? To their families?
  5. What special risks does my hospital or geography face? What is makes my facility potentially at risk for having a disaster?

    1. Is this a border town?
    2. Do we have earthquakes? Tornadoes, hurricanes, floods?
    3. Do I have a changing transportation structure because freeways are now being closed down?

  6. Overall, what assumptions am I making?

 

 

In most disasters, the hospitalist’s medical practice will be a departure from the details of daily practice. “Because the majority of hospitalists have internal medicine as their background … they tend to be very detail oriented, which is really their strength,” says Dr. Cantrill. “But in a case like this, they may not have that luxury.”

Another major consideration and “probably the stickiest one,” is altering your standards of care in terms of providing efficiency care or austere care as opposed to what you normally consider appropriate medical care.

What hospitalists will do in any disaster depends on the event—natural, biological, chemical, or use of weaponry—and how your metropolitan or rural area is set up. If it is a biological or bioterrorist event, the pathogen involved may make a difference. Although anthrax is not contagious, for instance, in the event of a large-scale airborne anthrax attack, the need for ventilators will quickly overwhelm resources.2 “That’s one of our largest areas of vulnerability,” says Dr. Cantrill, “whether we’re talking influenza or pneumonic plague, it still is an important factor: How many people can I support?”

The issue of limited ventilators may not be completely soluble, he explains. In ordinary circumstances hospitals can get, say, ventilators from a strategic national stockpile from which equipment can be flown out within 12 hours. Yet if an influenza pandemic breaks out, then the entire country may be involved, rendering that plan inoperable. And even if you have extra ventilators, do you have extra respiratory techs to administer them?

Dr. Cantrill’s institution, with a grant received from HRSA, offers a two-hour course to train people with some medical knowledge to be respiratory assistants who can manage ventilated patients in an emergency.

Injuries may increase exponentially in the case of a disaster. Other needs include vaccinations, treatment for dehydration, serious heat- and cold-related illness, or threats from floodwater (i.e., water laced with toxic chemicals, human waste, fire ants, rats, and snakes).3

Kate Rathbun, MD, MPH, family physician in Baton Rouge, La., is certified in disaster management and knows well the problems that can arise in providing medical care in such an event.4 When Hurricane Katrina hit in 2005, everyone in range of the winds, rain, and destruction, “hunkered down to weather the storm.” The day after the storm, Dr. Rathbun joined other providers and administrators, opened their clinic, and readied themselves to treat trauma and lacerations. It soon became obvious that their biggest health issue was the inability of the displaced to manage their chronic diseases. (Baton Rouge’s normal population of 600,000 exceeded a million within days.)

In cases of diabetes, cardiac disease, HIV infection, or tuberculosis, for example, being without medications might mean lethal disease exacerbations.3 In many cases, patients have no prior history documentation on presentation, and with computers often shut down the provider is faced with prescribing for or actually putting a stock of medications into patients’ hands.

Additional concerns pertain to those who cannot receive hemodialysis or seizure prophylaxis; or disrupted care for those with special needs such as hospice patients, the mentally and physically disabled, the elderly, and individuals in detox programs.

When Dr. Rathbun and her coworkers put a couple of nurses on the phones to handle incoming requests for drugs, she gave them some standards: If it’s for chronic disease medications, prescribe a 30-day supply and three refills (to ensure that 30 days later they would not once again be inundated with calls). When patients requested narcotics or scheduled drugs, they were told they would have to be seen by a provider.

 

 

Branching Points and Skill Sets

What will your community expect your institution to respond to and provide in the event of disaster? Here is where hospitalists can delineate what they can do when the time comes, says Erin Stucky, MD, a pediatric hospitalist at Children’s Hospital, San Diego.

“Most disaster preparedness algorithms have roles based on ‘hospital-based providers,’” she says, “but when it comes down to medical administration, many of them stop at the emergency department.”

From that point on they are likely to say “I don’t know”—that is, the rest of that decision tree is left in the hands of whoever is in the lead positions of physician, administrator, and nurse.

“That’s where the hospitalist can say, ‘Let me tell you my skill set,’” says Dr. Stucky, such as “I can triage patients; I can help to coordinate and disseminate information or help to outside providers who are calling; I can help to coordinate provider groups to go to different areas within our hospital to coordinate staffing … because I know operating rooms or I know this subset of patient types.”

At some institutions where hospitalists have been around for a longer time the disaster plan’s algorithm has branching points that don’t end in the emergency department. “Each [branch] has separate blocks that are horizontally equivalent,” says Dr. Stucky, “and the bleed-down [recognizes] the hospitalist as the major ward medical officer responsible for ensuring that floor 6, that’s neuro, and floor 5, hem-onc, and so on, have the correct staffing and are responsible for people reporting to them as well as dividing them as a labor pool into who’s available to go where.”

In general, however, regardless of setting, she says, a “hospitalist knows intimately the structure of the hospital, the flow between units, and can help other patients to get to different parts of the institution where care is still safe, such as observation areas.”

Communications: Up and Down, Out and In

Part of the global-facility thought process must include what communications will be for everything from the county medical system and EMS response to, within an institution, the communication between floors and between people on horizontal lines of authority. In addition, information in and out of the hospital from workers to their families is crucial so that workers can concentrate on the tasks at hand.

Questions must be considered ahead of time: How do I communicate to those people outside whom I need to have come in? How do I get response to the appropriate people who are calling in to find out how many patients we’re caring for? There may be other calls from someone who says, for example, that the ventilator has stopped working for her elderly mother.

And hospitalists must also be ready to support the urgent care or primary care satellite clinics and communicate what’s going on at the hospital, says Dr. Rathbun, “so that someone like me, who is a primary care practitioner in the community, can know that if I call this number or this person, I’m going to be able to say, ‘I’m down here at the [clinic] and here’s what I’ve got,’ or “I know things are terrible, but I have a diabetic you had in the hospital three weeks ago who’s crashed again, and you’ve got to find him a bed.’”

Communication plans might include the provision of satellite phones or two-way radios, says Dr. Stucky, and this will affect concrete issues, such as staffing and allowances for who can come and leave.

“In our institution we make this [communication] a unit-specific responsibility of the nurse team leader,” she says. “The nurses each have a phone and those nurse phones are freed up for any person available on that unit to be used to communicate with the outside world.”

 

 

Personal Disaster Plans

“I think another vitally important—and I mean vital importance in the same manner as vital signs—is for each hospitalist to have a personal disaster plan for their family/personal life,” says Mitchell Wilson, MD, medical director, FirstHealth of the Carolinas Hospitalist Services and section chief of Hospital Medicine in the Department of Medicine at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. “As the front line ‘foot soldier,’ the potential to harm our families during a pandemic is enormous.”

Dr. Garrett agrees. “One of the things that we’re not so good at in this country is coming up with emergency plans for our own family—even those of us who are in the medical business and take care of others,” he says. “Taking this step just makes good sense—and serves to be able to maximize your own availability and also be confident that you have the ways and means to know that your family is safe and secure and given the best opportunity to survive in a disaster.”

According to Dr. Wilson, families with vulnerable members, such as the young, elderly, and infirm, must have a plan in place to minimize the risk to them. “The hospitalist who comes home sick [or] infected is a danger to the very safe place [to] which [hospitalists and their families] seek refuge,” he says.

Preparedness includes delineating in your family what your points of contact will be. “Part of the stress that’s involved in being a physician and being expected to report to work [may involve] worrying where your family is or whether they have a safe meeting place; who’s picking up the children from school; does the school for my children have a plan, etc.,” says Dr. Garrett.

If you know that your children’s school has an emergency plan, your spouse’s workplace has a plan, and any relative in a long-term care facility has a plan, you’ll be much more likely to stay on the job and care for patients.

“And if my child is on a school bus that needs to be evacuated somewhere out of town,” he says, “I want to know there’s a phone number that my whole family knows to reconnect somehow.”

Disease Surveillance

Disease surveillance is of huge importance to detect and monitor biological terrorist and natural threats. The North Carolina Disease Event Tracking and Epidemiological Collection Tool (NC DETECT), a reporting and surveillance system, was awarded the 2005 Nicholas E. Davies Award of Excellence in the Public Health category by the Healthcare Information and Management Systems Society. The Davies Award program honors Nicholas Davies, MD, an Atlanta-based practice physician and former chairperson-elect of the American College of Physicians, who was committed to improving patient care through better health information management. Dr. Davies was killed in a plane crash with Senator John G. Tower (R-TX) in April 1991.

“One of the things that we’ve done in North Carolina that contributed to our receiving the award was the fact that we really did build this from the bottom up,” says NC DETECT’s Waller. There was guidance from the top down, she explains, but efforts began on a basis whereby hospitals came on board voluntarily and agreed to provide the information they had electronically. In turn, the epidemiology team agreed to give information back to them. “It was very much a joint effort working with the local hospitals and the state-level public health people and bringing them together and designing a system that would meet everyone’s needs with the least impact on the workload for the local hospital.”

Waller says the program was designed to alleviate emergency department clinicians from having to do anything extra in addition to their normal methods of documentation. “We were just going to pull out the electronic information they were collecting and then standardize it centrally, utilize it, and provide a report back to them,” she explains.

Although this system is clearly driven to supply needed information to the state, “we recognize that individual clinicians, administrators, and people at the hospital level also need to know what’s going on in their emergency department,” says Waller. “And it gives them a window into the sort of information that they might not have ever had before.”—AS

 

 

No Assumptions

Losing utility power is always a concern in emergencies and disasters. “After 9/11 in New York City, lots of people flooded into emergency departments,” says Ann Waller, ScD, an associate professor in the Department of Emergency Medicine at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill and the UNC director for NC DETECT. (See “Disease Surveillance,” p. 20.)

“The emergency departments abandoned their electronic systems and went back to paper and pencil because it was faster to just do the bare minimum … and get them into each team than to enter all the information required,” she explains. “That was a real eye-opener for those of us who rely on electronic data.”

Preparing for crisis involves imagining the inaccessibility of all electronic communications and records, including data collection and surveillance, pharmacy, e-mail, and historical documentation and other medical records.

The general rule in disaster preparedness is to plan for 72-hour capacity: How and what do I need to exist for 72 hours? “And the standard is that you should try to do that for your average daily census plus 100 patients,” says Dr. Stucky.

Scheduling and staffing is another issue. “Be prepared to provide flex staffing and scheduling to provide surge capacity,” says Dr. Wilson.

Think on Your Feet: Training

If they are so inclined, hospitalists can become involved in disaster response, through disaster medical assistance teams, community emergency response teams, or through the Red Cross—to name a few. And there are plenty of ways to take advantage of free training, some of which provide CME.

Another important question to ask of your institution, says Dr. Stucky (who co-presented on the topic of disaster preparedness at this year’s SHM Annual Meeting) is whether they have run any mock disasters.

“You have to do that,” she says. “Half of disaster response is preparedness, but the other half is thinking on your feet. And there’s no way to do that without mocking a drill.”

While there can be value in computer-run mock-ups, “there’s nothing like doing it,” she says. “We learn at least 25 things every time we do it.” And though one drill does not a totally prepared institution make, “it does mean at least you have the right people in those strategic positions [and they] are people who can think on their feet.”

A valuable training resource from AHRQ is listed in the resources at the end of this article.5

Be Prepared

With the vast amount of information on disaster preparedness available, one clear goal is to narrow it to avoid feeling overwhelmed.

“I think that is a real challenge,” says Dr. Cantrill, “but the first step is the motivation to at least look.”

Take for example the motivation of a flu pandemic. “It’s going to happen sooner or later, one of these days, but we know it this time,” says Waller. “We have the ability to be more prepared. … This is a huge opportunity to see it coming and to do as much as we can [correctly]. Which is not to say we can avoid everything, but at least we can be as prepared as we’ve ever been able to be.”

Conclusion

For hospitalists, there are several key techniques for individuals to be able to increase their readiness for disaster in the workplace. The first is to avoid relying initially or entirely on external help to supply a response, says Dr. Garrett: “You are the medical response, and there may be a delay until outside assistance is available.”

 

 

A second key is to visualize—as well as possible—any circumstances you might face personally and professionally and to formulate questions, seek answers, and talk to colleagues and supervisors about what your role will be. A third factor is to participate in training in the form of drills and tabletop exercises for your hospital. An unpracticed disaster plan may be more dangerous than no plan at all. TH

Andrea Sattinger also writes the “Alliances” department in this issue.

References

  1. AHRQ. Altered Standards of Care in Mass Casualty Events. Rockville, MD: Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality; April 2005:Health Systems Research Inc. under Contract No. 290-04-0010.
  2. Hick JL, Hanfling D, Burstein JL, et al. Health care facility and community strategies for patient care surge capacity. Ann Emerg Med. 2004 Sep;44(3):253-261.
  3. Greenough PG, Kirsch TD. Hurricane Katrina. Public health response—assessing needs. N Engl J Med. 2005 Oct 13;353(15):1544-1546.
  4. Rathbun KC, Cranmer H. Hurricane Katrina and disaster medical care. N Engl J Med. 2006 Feb 16;354:772-773.
  5. Hsu EB, Jenckes MW, Catlett CL, et al. Training of hospital staff to respond to a mass casualty incident. Evidence Report/Technology Assessment No. 95. Rockville, MD: Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality. Prepared by the Johns Hopkins University Evidence-based Practice Center under Contract No. 290-02-0018; June 2004: AHRQ Publication No. 04-E015-2. Accessible at: www.ahrq.gov/downloads/pub/evidence/pdf/hospmci/hospmci.pdf. Last accessed June 1, 2006.

Resources

National Links

  • Centers for Disease Control, Emergency Preparedness and Response: www.bt.cdc.gov/
  • The Hospital Emergency Incident Command System (HEICS) is an emergency management system that employs a logical management structure, defined responsibilities, clear reporting channels, and a common nomenclature to help unify hospitals with other emergency responders: www.emsa.cahwnet.gov/dms2/heics3.htm
  • State, local, and tribal public health departments have their own public health preparedness and response plans.
  • The National Center for Environmental Health (NCEH): www.cdc.gov/nceh/emergency.htm.
  • Two other CDC resources contain materials to address public health preparedness needs: the Division of Emergency and Environmental Health Services (EEHS) and the Environmental Public Health Readiness Branch (EPHRB). See all-hazards public health emergency response guide): www.cdc.gov/nceh/eehs/
  • U.S. Department of Homeland Security, for family preparedness: www.ready.gov/
  • AHRQ bioterrorism link: www.ahrq.gov/news/pubcat/c_biot.htm#biot002
  • George Washington University Institute for Crisis, Disaster, and Risk Management offers programs, including training, in the area of crisis, emergency and risk management: www.gwu.edu/~icdrm/
  • North Carolina Links—North Carolina Office of Public Health Preparedness and Response (NC PHPR): www.epi.state.nc.us/epi/phpr/provides information and resources regarding the threat of bioterrorism and other emerging infectious diseases within the state and around the nation.
  • The Health Alert Network (HAN) system is designed to immediately alert key health officials and care providers in North Carolina to acts of bioterrorism as well as other types of emerging disease threats: www.nchan.org/
  • DPH Immunization branch: www.immunizenc.com/
  • State Web sites, such as San Diego Country Office of Emergency Systems: www.co.sandiego.ca.us/oes/ or the County of San Diego Health and Human Services Terrorism Preparedness: www.co.san-diego.ca.us/terrorism/links.html
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(07)
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(07)
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
The Big One
Display Headline
The Big One
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)

Tips to differentiate bipolar II disorder and borderline personality disorder

Article Type
Changed
Wed, 09/26/2018 - 09:49
Display Headline
Tips to differentiate bipolar II disorder and borderline personality disorder

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 08(07)
Publications
Topics
Sections

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 08(07)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 08(07)
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Tips to differentiate bipolar II disorder and borderline personality disorder
Display Headline
Tips to differentiate bipolar II disorder and borderline personality disorder
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Alternative CME
Use ProPublica

Alternative modes of mechanical ventilation: A review for the hospitalist

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 03/05/2018 - 09:33
Display Headline
Alternative modes of mechanical ventilation: A review for the hospitalist

Technologic advances and computerized control of mechanical ventilators have made it possible to deliver ventilatory assistance in new modes. Driving these innovations is the desire to prevent ventilator-induced lung injury, improve patient comfort, and liberate the patient from mechanical ventilation as soon as possible.

We call these innovations “alternative” modes to differentiate them from the plain volume-control and pressure-control modes. Some clinicians rarely use these new modes, but in some medical centers they have become the most common ones used, or are being used unknowingly (the operator misunderstands the mode name). The information we provide on these modes of ventilation is by no means an endorsement of their use, but rather a tool to help the clinician understand their physiologic, theoretical, and clinical effects.

We focused on two goals:

  • Explain what the mode does
  • Briefly review the theoretical benefits and the actual evidence supporting these alternative modes of ventilation.

STANDARD NOMENCLATURE NEEDED

Since its invention, mechanical ventilation has been plagued by multiple names being used to describe the same things. For example, volume-control ventilation is also called volume-cycled ventilation, assist-control ventilation, volume-limited ventilation, and controlled mechanical ventilation. Similarly, multiple abbreviations are used, each depending on the brand of ventilator, and new acronyms have been added in recent years as new modes have been developed. The vast number of names and modes can confuse even the most seasoned critical care physician.

Efforts to establish a common nomenclature are under way.1

WHAT IS A MODE?

A mode of mechanical ventilation has three essential components:

  • The control variable
  • The breath sequence
  • The targeting scheme.

Similar modes may require more detailed descriptions to distinguish them, but the basic function can be explained by these three components.

The control variable

In general, inspiration is an active process, driven by the patient’s effort, the ventilator, or both, while expiration is passive. For simplicity, in this article a mechanical breath means the inspiratory phase of the breath.

The machine can only control the volume (and flow) or the pressure given. The breaths can be further described on the basis of what triggers the breath, what limits it (the maximum value of a control variable), and what ends (cycles) it.

Figure 1. Volume control (top) and pressure control (bottom) are modes of continuous mandatory ventilation. Each mode is depicted as patient effort increases. Notice that the mode’s control variable (volume or pressure) remains constant as patient effort increases. Contrast these findings with those in Figure 2.
Therefore, a volume-controlled breath is triggered by the patient or by the machine, limited by flow, and cycled by volume (Figure 1). A pressure-controlled breath is triggered by the patient or the machine, limited by pressure, and cycled by time or flow (Figure 1).

The breath sequence

There are three possible breath sequences:

  • Continuous mandatory ventilation, in which all breaths are controlled by the machine (but can be triggered by the patient)
  • Intermittent mandatory ventilation, in which the patient can take spontaneous breaths between mandatory breaths
  • Continuous spontaneous ventilation, in which all breaths are spontaneous (Table 1).

The targeting scheme

The targeting or feedback scheme refers to the ventilator settings and programming that dictate its response to the patient’s lung compliance, lung resistance, and respiratory effort. The regulation can be as simple as controlling the pressure in pressure-control mode, or it can be based on a complicated algorithm.

In the sections that follow, we describe some of the available alternative modes of mechanical ventilation. We will explain only the targeting schemes in the modes reviewed (Table 1, Table 2), but more information on other targeting schemes can be found elsewhere.1,2 We will focus on evidence generated in adult patients receiving invasive mechanical ventilation.

 

 

ADAPTIVE PRESSURE CONTROL

Figure 2. A machine in adaptive pressure control mode (top) adjusts the inspiratory pressure to maintain a set tidal volume. Adaptive support ventilation (bottom) automatically selects the appropriate tidal volume and frequency for mandatory breaths and the appropriate tidal volume for spontaneous breaths on the basis of the respiratory system mechanics and the target minute ventilation.
One of the concerns with pressure-control ventilation is that it cannot guarantee a minimum minute ventilation (the volume of air that goes in and out in 1 minute; the tidal volume × breaths per minute) in the face of changing lung mechanics or patient effort, or both. To solve this problem, in 1991 the Siemens Servo 300 ventilator (Siemens, Maquet Critical Care AB, Solna, Sweden) introduced Pressure Regulated Volume Control, a mode that delivers pressure-controlled breaths with a target tidal volume and that is otherwise known as adaptive pressure control (APC) (Figure 2).

Other names for adaptive pressure control

  • Pressure Regulated Volume Control (Maquet Servo-i, Rastatt, Germany)
  • AutoFlow (Dräger Medical AG, Lübeck, Germany)
  • Adaptive Pressure Ventilation (Hamilton Galileo, Hamilton Medical AG, Bonaduz, Switzerland)
  • Volume Control+ (Puritan Bennett, Tyco Healthcare; Mansfield, MA)
  • Volume Targeted Pressure Control, Pressure Controlled Volume Guaranteed (Engström, General Electric, Madison, WI).

What does adaptive pressure control do?

The APC mode delivers pressure-controlled breaths with an adaptive targeting scheme (Table 2).

In pressure-control ventilation, tidal volumes depend on the lung’s physiologic mechanics (compliance and resistance) and patient effort (Figure 1). Therefore, the tidal volume varies with changes in lung physiology (ie, larger or smaller tidal volumes than targeted).

To overcome this effect, a machine in APC mode adjusts the inspiratory pressure to deliver the set minimal target tidal volume. If tidal volume increases, the machine decreases the inspiratory pressure, and if tidal volume decreases, the machine increases the inspiratory pressure. However, if the patient effort is large enough, the tidal volume will increase in spite of decreasing the inspiratory pressure (Figure 2). The adjustments to the inspiratory pressure occur after the tidal volume is off-target in a number of breaths.

Common sources of confusion with adaptive pressure control

First, APC is not a volume-control mode. In volume control, the tidal volume does not change; in APC the tidal volume can increase or decrease, and the ventilator will adjust the inflation pressure to achieve the target volume. Thus, APC guarantees an average minimum tidal volume but not a maximum tidal volume.

Second, a characteristic of pressure control (and hence, APC) is that the flow of gas varies to maintain constant airway pressure (ie, maintain the set inspiratory pressure). This characteristic allows a patient who generates an inspiratory effort to receive flow as demanded, which is likely more comfortable. This is essentially different from volume control, in which flow is set by the operator and hence is fixed. Thus, if the patient effort is strong enough (Figure 1), this leads to what is called flow asynchrony, in which the patient does not get the flow asked for in a breath.

Ventilator settings in adaptive pressure control

Ventilator settings in APC are:

  • Tidal volume
  • Time spent in inspiration (inspiratory time)
  • Frequency
  • Fraction of inspired oxygen (Fio2)
  • Positive end-expiratory pressure (PEEP).

Some ventilators also require setting the speed to reach the peak pressure (also known as slope percent or inspiratory rise time).

Clinical applications of adaptive pressure control

This mode is designed to maintain a consistent tidal volume during pressure-control ventilation and to promote inspiratory flow synchrony. It is a means of automatically reducing ventilatory support (ie, weaning) as the patient’s inspiratory effort becomes stronger, as in awakening from anesthesia.

APC may not be ideal for patients who have an inappropriately increased respiratory drive (eg, in severe metabolic acidosis), since the inspiratory pressure will decrease to maintain the targeted average tidal volume, inappropriately shifting the work of breathing onto the patient.

Theoretical benefits of adaptive pressure control

APC guarantees a minimum average tidal volume (unless the pressure alarm threshold is set too low, so that the target tidal volume is not delivered). Other theoretical benefits are flow synchrony, less ventilator manipulation by the operator, and automatic weaning of ventilator support.

Evidence of benefit of adaptive pressure control

Physiologic benefits. This mode has lower peak inspiratory pressures than does volume-control ventilation,3,4 which is often reported as a positive finding. However, in volume-control mode (the usual comparator), the peak inspiratory pressure is a manifestation of both resistance and compliance. Hence, peak inspiratory pressure is expected to be higher but does not reflect actual lung-distending pressures. It is the plateau pressure, a manifestation of lung compliance, that is related to lung injury.

Patient comfort. APC may increase the work of breathing when using low tidal volume ventilation and when there is increased respiratory effort (drive).5 Interestingly, APC was less comfortable than pressure support ventilation in a small trial.6

Outcomes have not been studied.7

Adaptive pressure control: Bottom line

APC is widely available and widely used, sometimes unknowingly (eg, if the operator thinks it is volume control). It is relatively easy to use and to set; however, evidence of its benefit is scant.

 

 

ADAPTIVE SUPPORT VENTILATION

Adaptive support ventilation (ASV) evolved as a form of mandatory minute ventilation implemented with adaptive pressure control. Mandatory minute ventilation is a mode that allows the operator to preset a target minute ventilation, and the ventilator then supplies mandatory breaths, either volume- or pressure-controlled, if the patient’s spontaneous breaths generate a lower minute ventilation.

ASV automatically selects the appropriate tidal volume and frequency for mandatory breaths and the appropriate tidal volume for spontaneous breaths on the basis of the respiratory system mechanics and target minute alveolar ventilation.

Described in 1994 by Laubscher et al,8,9 ASV became commercially available in 1998 in Europe and in 2007 in the United States (Hamilton Galileo ventilator, Hamilton Medical AG). This is the first commercially available ventilator that uses an “optimal” targeting scheme (see below).

What does adaptive support ventilation do?

ASV delivers pressure-controlled breaths using an adaptive (optimal) scheme (Table 2). “Optimal,” in this context, means minimizing the mechanical work of breathing: the machine selects a tidal volume and frequency that the patient’s brain would presumably select if the patient were not connected to a ventilator. This pattern is assumed to encourage the patient to generate spontaneous breaths.

The ventilator calculates the normal required minute ventilation based on the patient’s ideal weight and estimated dead space volume (ie, 2.2 mL/kg). This calculation represents 100% of minute ventilation. The clinician at the bedside sets a target percent of minute ventilation that the ventilator will support—higher than 100% if the patient has increased requirements due, eg, to sepsis or increased dead space, or less than 100% during weaning.

The ventilator initially delivers test breaths, in which it measures the expiratory time constant for the respiratory system and then uses this along with the estimated dead space and normal minute ventilation to calculate an optimal breathing frequency in terms of mechanical work.

The optimal or target tidal volume is calculated as the normal minute ventilation divided by the optimal frequency. The target tidal volume is achieved by the use of APC (see above) (Figure 2). This means that the pressure limit is automatically adjusted to achieve an average delivered tidal volume equal to the target. The ventilator continuously monitors the respiratory system mechanics and adjusts its settings accordingly.

The ventilator adjusts its breaths to avoid air trapping by allowing enough time to exhale, to avoid hypoventilation by delivering tidal volume greater than the dead space, and to avoid volutrauma by avoiding large tidal volumes.

Ventilator settings in adaptive support ventilation

Ventilator settings in ASV are:

  • Patient height (to calculate the ideal body weight)
  • Sex
  • Percent of normal predicted minute ventilation goal
  • Fio2
  • PEEP.

Clinical applications of adaptive support ventilation

ASV is intended as a sole mode of ventilation, from initial support to weaning.

Theoretical benefits of adaptive support ventilation

In theory, ASV offers automatic selection of ventilator settings, automatic adaptation to changing patient lung mechanics, less need for human manipulation of the machine, improved synchrony, and automatic weaning.

Evidence of benefit of adaptive support ventilation

Physiologic benefits. Ventilator settings are adjusted automatically. ASV selects different tidal volume-respiratory rate combinations based on respiratory mechanics in passive and paralyzed patients.10–12 In actively breathing patients, there was no difference in the ventilator settings chosen by ASV for different clinical scenarios (and lung physiology).10 Compared with pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation, with ASV, the inspiratory load is less and patient-ventilator interaction is better.13

Patient-ventilator synchrony and comfort have not been studied.

Outcomes. Two trials suggest that ASV may decrease time on mechanical ventilation.14,15 However, in another trial,16 compared with a standard protocol, ASV led to fewer ventilator adjustments but achieved similar postsurgical weaning outcomes. The effect of this mode on the death rate has not been examined.17,18

Adaptive support ventilation: Bottom line

ASV is the first commercially available mode that automatically selects all the ventilator settings except PEEP and Fio2. These seem appropriate for different clinical scenarios in patients with poor respiratory effort or in paralyzed patients. Evidence of the effect in actively breathing patients and on outcomes such as length of stay or death is still lacking.

PROPORTIONAL ASSIST VENTILATION

Patients who have normal respiratory drive but who have difficulty sustaining adequate spontaneous ventilation are often subjected to pressure support ventilation (PSV), in which the ventilator generates a constant pressure throughout inspiration regardless of the intensity of the patient’s effort.

In 1992, Younes and colleagues19,20 developed proportional assist ventilation (PAV) as an alternative in which the ventilator generates pressure in proportion to the patient’s effort. PAV became commercially available in Europe in 1999 and was approved in the United States in 2006, available on the Puritan Bennett 840 ventilator (Puritan Bennett Co, Boulder, CO). PAV has also been used for noninvasive ventilation, but this is not available in the United States.

Other names for proportional assist ventilation

Proportional Pressure Support (Dräger Medical; not yet available in the United States).

 

 

What does proportional assist ventilation do?

This mode delivers pressure-controlled breaths with a servo control scheme (Table 2).

To better understand PAV, we can compare it with PSV. With PSV, the pressure applied by the ventilator rises to a preset level that is held constant (a set-point scheme) until a cycling criterion (a percent of the maximum inspiratory flow value) is reached. The inspiratory flow and tidal volume are the result of the patient’s inspiratory effort, the level of pressure applied, and the respiratory system mechanics.

Figure 3. In proportional assist ventilation, the flow, pressure, and volume delivered are adjusted proportionally to the patient’s effort.
In contrast, during PAV, the pressure applied is a function of patient effort: the greater the inspiratory effort, the greater the increase in applied pressure (servo targeting scheme) (Figure 3). The operator sets the percentage of support to be delivered by the ventilator. The ventilator intermittently measures the compliance and resistance of the patient’s respiratory system and the instantaneous patient-generated flow and volume, and on the basis of these it delivers a proportional amount of inspiratory pressure.

In PAV, as in PSV, all breaths are spontaneous (Table 1). The patient controls the timing and size of the breath. There are no preset pressure, flow, or volume goals, but safety limits on the volume and pressure delivered can be set.

Ventilator settings in proportional assist ventilation

Ventilator settings in PAV are:

  • Airway type (endotracheal tube, tracheostomy)
  • Airway size (inner diameter)
  • Percentage of work supported (assist range 5%–95%)
  • Tidal volume limit
  • Pressure limit
  • Expiratory sensitivity (normally, as inspiration ends, flow should stop; this parameter tells the ventilator at what flow to end inspiration).

Caution when assessing the literature. Earlier ventilator versions, ie, Dräger and Manitoba (University of Manitoba, Winnipeg, MB, Canada), which are not available in the United States, required the repeated calculation of the respiratory system mechanics and the manual setting of flow and volume assists (amplification factors) independently. To overcome this limitation, new software automatically adjusts the flow and volume amplification to support the loads imposed by the automatically measured values of resistance and elastance (inverse of compliance) of the respiratory system.21 This software is included in the model (Puritan Bennett) available in the United States.

Clinical applications of proportional assist ventilation

The PAV mode is indicated for maximizing ventilator patient synchrony for assisted spontaneous ventilation.

PAV is contraindicated in patients with respiratory depression (bradypnea) or large air leaks (eg, bronchopleural fistulas). It should be used with caution in patients with severe hyperinflation, in which the patient may still be exhaling but the ventilator doesn’t recognize it. Another group in which PAV should be used with caution is those with high ventilatory drives, in which the ventilator overestimates respiratory system mechanics. This situation can lead to overassistance due to the “runaway phenomenon,” in which the ventilator continues to provide support even if the patient has stopped inspiration.22

Theoretical benefits of proportional assist ventilation

In theory, PAV should reduce the work of breathing, improve synchrony, automatically adapt to changing patient lung mechanics and effort, decrease the need for ventilator intervention and manipulation, decrease the need for sedation, and improve sleep.

Evidence of benefit of proportional assist ventilation

Physiologic benefits. PAV reduces the work of breathing better than PSV,21 even in the face of changing respiratory mechanics or increased respiratory demand (hypercapnia).23–25 The hemodynamic profile is similar to that in PSV. Tidal volumes are variable; however, in recent reports the tidal volumes were within the lung-protective range (6–8 mL/kg, plateau pressure < 30 cm H20).26,27

Comfort. PAV entails less patient effort and discomfort that PSV does.23,25 PAV significantly reduces asynchrony,27 which in turn may favorably affect sleep in critically ill patients. 28

Outcomes. The probability of spontaneous breathing without assistance was significantly better in critically ill patients ventilated with PAV than with PSV. No trial has reported the effect of PAV on deaths.27,29

Proportional assist ventilation: Bottom line

Extensive basic research has been done with PAV in different forms of respiratory failure, such as obstructive lung disease, acute respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), and chronic respiratory failure. It fulfills its main goal, which is to improve patient-ventilator synchrony. Clinical experience with PAV in the United States is limited, as it was only recently approved.

 

 

AIRWAY PRESSURE-RELEASE VENTILATION AND BIPHASIC POSITIVE AIRWAY PRESSURE

Airway pressure-release ventilation (APRV) was described in 1987 by Stock et al30 as a mode for delivering ventilation in acute lung injury while avoiding high airway pressures. APRV combines high constant positive airway pressure (improving oxygenation and promoting alveolar recruitment) with intermittent releases (causing exhalation).

Figure 4. Airway pressure-release ventilation (top) and biphasic positive airway pressure (bottom) are forms of pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation in which spontaneous breaths can occur at any point without altering the ventilator-delivered breaths. The difference is that the time spent in high pressure is greater in airway pressure-release ventilation.
In 1989, Baum et al31 described biphasic positive airway pressure ventilation as a mode in which spontaneous ventilation could be achieved at any point in the mechanical ventilation cycle—inspiration or exhalation (Figure 4). The goal was to allow unrestricted spontaneous breathing to reduce sedation and promote weaning. These modes are conceptually the same, the main difference being that the time spent in low pressure (Tlow; see below) is less than 1.5 seconds for APRV. Otherwise, they have identical characteristics, thus allowing any ventilator with the capability of delivering APRV to deliver biphasic positive airway pressure, and vice versa. Machines with these modes became commercially available in the mid 1990s.

Other names for biphasic positive airway pressure

Other names for biphasic positive airway pressure are:

  • BiLevel (Puritan Bennett)
  • BIPAP (Dräger Europe)
  • Bi Vent (Siemens)
  • BiPhasic (Avea, Cardinal Health, Inc, Dublin, OH)
  • PCV+ (Dräger Medical)
  • DuoPAP (Hamilton).

Caution—name confusion. In North America, BiPAP (Respironics, Murrysville, PA) and BiLevel are used to refer to noninvasive modes of ventilation.

APRV has no other name.

What do these modes do?

These modes deliver pressure-controlled, time-triggered, and time-cycled breaths using a set-point targeting scheme (Table 2). This means that the ventilator maintains a constant pressure (set point) even in the face of spontaneous breaths.

Caution—source of confusion. The term continuous positive airway pressure (CPAP) is often used to describe this mode. However, CPAP is pressure that is applied continuously at the same level; the patient generates all the work to maintain ventilation (“pressure-controlled continuous spontaneous ventilation” in the current nomenclature). In APRV, the airway pressure is intermittently released and reapplied, generating a tidal volume that supports ventilation. In other words, this is a pressure-controlled breath with a very prolonged inspiratory time and a short expiratory time in which spontaneous ventilation is possible at any point (“pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation” in the current nomenclature).

How these modes are set in the ventilator may also be a source of confusion. To describe the time spent in high and low airway pressures, we use the terms Thigh and Tlow, respectively. By convention, the difference between APRV and biphasic mode is the duration of Tlow (< 1.5 sec for APRV).

Similarly, Phigh and Plow are used to describe the high and low airway pressure. To better understand this concept, you can create the same mode in conventional pressure-control ventilation by thinking of the Thigh as the inspiratory time, the Tlow as the expiratory time, the Phigh as inspiratory pressure, and the Plow as PEEP.

Hence, APRV is an extreme form of inverse ratio ventilation, with an inspiration-to-expiration ratio of 4:1. This means a patient spends most of the time in Phigh and Thigh, and exhalations are short (Tlow and Plow). In contrast, the biphasic mode uses conventional inspiration-expiration ratios (Figure 4).

As with any form of pressure control, the tidal volume is generated by airway pressure rising above baseline (ie, the end-expiratory value). Hence, to ensure an increase in minute ventilation, the mandatory breath rate must be increased (ie, decreasing Thigh, Tlow, or both) or the tidal volume must be increased (ie, increasing the difference between Phigh and Plow). This means that in APRV the Tlow has to happen more often (by increasing the number of breaths) or be more prolonged (allowing more air to exhale). Because unrestricted spontaneous breaths are permitted at any point of the cycle, the patient contributes to the total minute ventilation (usually 10%–40%).

In APRV and biphasic mode, the operator’s set time and pressure in inspiration and expiration will be delivered regardless of the patient’s breathing efforts—the patient’s spontaneous breath does not trigger a mechanical breath. Some ventilators have automatic adjustments to improve the trigger synchrony.

Ventilator settings in APRV and biphasic mode

These modes require the setting of two pressure levels (Phigh and Plow) and two time durations (Thigh and Tlow). One can add pressure support or automatic tube compensation to assist spontaneous breaths. The difference in Tlow generates differences in the Thigh:Tlow ratio: APRV has a short Tlow (an inspiration-expiration ratio of 4:1). Biphasic mode has a conventional inspiration-expiration ratio of 1:1 to 1:4.

Clinical applications

APRV is used in acute lung injury and ARDS. This mode should be used with caution or not at all in patients with obstructive lung disease or inappropriately increased respiratory drive.32–35

Biphasic mode is intended for both ventilation and weaning. In a patient who has poor respiratory effort or who is paralyzed, biphasic is identical to pressure-control/continuous mandatory ventilation.

Theoretical benefits of APRV and biphasic mode

Multiple benefits have been ascribed to these modes. In theory, APRV will maximize and maintain alveolar recruitment, improve oxygenation, lower inflation pressures, and decrease overinflation. Both APRV and biphasic, by preserving spontaneous breathing, will improve ventilation-perfusion matching and gas diffusion, improve the hemodynamic profile (less need for vasopressors, higher cardiac output, reduced ventricular workload, improved organ perfusion), and improve synchrony (decrease the work of breathing and the need for sedation).

Evidence of benefit of APRV and biphasic mode

APRV and biphasic are different modes. However studies evaluating their effects are combined. This is in part the result of the nomenclature confusion and different practice in different countries.36

Physiologic benefits. In studies, spontaneous breaths contributed to 10% to 40% of minute ventilation,37,38 improved ventilation of dependent areas of the lung, improved ventilation-perfusion match and recruitment,39 and improved hemodynamic profile.40

Patient comfort. These modes are thought to decrease the need for analgesia and sedation,38 but a recent trial showed no difference with pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation.41 Patient ventilator synchrony and comfort have not been studied.32,42

Outcomes. In small trials, these modes made no difference in terms of deaths, but they may decrease the length of mechanical ventilation.38,41,43,44

APRV and biphasic mode: Bottom line

Maintaining spontaneous breathing while on mechanical ventilation has hemodynamic and ventilatory benefits.

APRV and biphasic mode are not the same thing. APRV’s main goal is to maximize mean airway pressure and, hence, lung recruitment, whereas the main goal of the biphasic mode is synchrony.

There is a plethora of ventilator settings and questions related to physiologic effects.33,34,36

Although these modes are widely used in some centers, there is no evidence yet that they are superior to conventional volume- or pressure-control ventilation with low tidal volume for ARDS and acute lung injury. There is no conclusive evidence that these modes improve synchrony, time to weaning, or patient comfort.

 

 

HIGH-FREQUENCY OSCILLATORY VENTILATION

High-frequency oscillatory ventilation (HFOV) was first described and patented in 1952 by Emerson and was clinically developed in the early 1970s by Lunkenheimer.45

The goal of HFOV is to minimize lung injury; its characteristics (discussed below) make it useful in patients with severe ARDS. The US Food and Drug Administration approved it for infants in 1991 and for children in 1995. The adult model has been available since 1993, but it was not approved until 2001 (SensorMedics 3100B, Cardinal Health, Inc).

Other names for high-frequency oscillatory ventilation

While HFOV has no alternative names, the following acronyms describe similar modes:

  • HFPPV (high-frequency positive pressure ventilation)
  • HFJV (high-frequency jet ventilation)
  • HFFI (high-frequency flow interruption)
  • HFPV (high-frequency percussive ventilation)
  • HFCWO (high-frequency chest wall oscillation).

All of these modes require different specialized ventilators.

What does high-frequency oscillatory ventilation do?

Conceptually, HFOV is a form of pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation with a set-point control scheme. In contrast to conventional pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation, in which relatively small spontaneous breaths may be superimposed on relatively large mandatory breaths, HFOV superimposes very small mandatory breaths (oscillations) on top of spontaneous breaths.

Figure 5. High-frequency oscillatory ventilation delivers very small mandatory breaths (oscillations) at frequencies of up to 900 breaths per minute.
HFOV can be delivered only with a special ventilator. The ventilator delivers a constant flow (bias flow), while a valve creates resistance to maintain airway pressure, on top of which a piston pump oscillates at frequencies of 3 to 15 Hz (160–900 breaths/minute). This creates a constant airway pressure with small oscillations (Figure 5); often, clinicians at the bedside look for the “chest wiggle” to assess the appropriate amplitude settings, although this has not been systematically studied.

Adult patients are usually paralyzed or deeply sedated, since deep spontaneous breathing will trigger alarms and affect ventilator performance.

To manage ventilation (CO2 clearance), one or several of the following maneuvers can be done: decrease the oscillation frequency, increase the amplitude of the oscillations, increase the inspiratory time, or increase bias flow (while allowing an endotracheal tube cuff leak). Oxygenation adjustments are controlled by manipulating the mean airway pressure and the Fio2.

Ventilator settings in high-frequency oscillatory ventilation

Ventilator settings in HFOV are46:

  • Airway pressure amplitude (delta P or power)
  • Mean airway pressure
  • Percent inspiration
  • Inspiratory bias flow
  • Fio2.

Clinical applications of high-frequency oscillatory ventilation

This mode is usually reserved for ARDS patients for whom conventional ventilation is failing. A recently published protocol46 suggests considering HFOV when there is oxygenation failure (Fio2 ≥ 0.7 and PEEP ≥ 14 cm H2O) or ventilation failure (pH < 7.25 with tidal volume ≥ 6 mL/kg predicted body weight and plateau airway pressure ≥ 30 cm H2O).

This mode is contraindicated when there is known severe airflow obstruction or intracranial hypertension.

Theoretical benefits of high-frequency oscillatory ventilation

Conceptually, HFOV can provide the highest mean airway pressure paired with the lowest tidal volume of any mode. These benefits might make HFOV the ideal lung-protective ventilation strategy.

Evidence of benefit of high-frequency oscillatory ventilation

Physiologic benefits. Animal models have shown less histologic damage and lung inflammation with HFOV than with high-tidal-volume conventional ventilation47,48 and low-tidal-volume conventional ventilation.49

Patient comfort has not been studied. However, current technology does impose undue work of breathing in spontaneously breathing patients.50

Outcomes. Several retrospective case series have described better oxygenation with HFOV as rescue therapy for severe ARDS than with conventional mechanical ventilation. Two randomized controlled trials have studied HFOV vs high-tidal-volume conventional mechanical ventilation for early severe ARDS; HFOV was safe but made no difference in terms of deaths.42,51–54

High-frequency oscillatory ventilation: Bottom line

In theory, HFOV provides all the benefits of an ideal lung-protective strategy, at least for paralyzed or deeply sedated patients. Animal studies support these concepts. In human adults, HFOV has been shown to be safe and to provide better oxygenation but no improvement in death rates compared with conventional mechanical ventilation. Currently, HFOV is better reserved for patients with severe ARDS for whom conventional mechanical ventilation is failing.

References
  1. Chatburn RL. Classification of ventilator modes: update and proposal for implementation. Respir Care 2007; 52:301323.
  2. Chatburn RL. Computer control of mechanical ventilation. Respir Care 2004; 49:507517.
  3. Alvarez A, Subirana M, Benito S. Decelerating flow ventilation effects in acute respiratory failure. J Crit Care 1998; 13:2125.
  4. Guldager H, Nielsen SL, Carl P, Soerensen MB. A comparison of volume control and pressure regulated volume control ventilation in acute respiratory failure. Crit Care 1997; 1:7577.
  5. Kallet RH, Campbell AR, Dicker RA, Katz JA, Mackersie RC. Work of breathing during lung protective ventilation in patients with acute lung injury and acute respiratory distress syndrome: a comparison between volume and pressure regulated breathing modes. Respir Care 2005; 50:16231631.
  6. Betensley AD, Khalid I, Crawford J, Pensler RA, DiGiovine B. Patient comfort during pressure support and volume controlled continuous mandatory ventilation. Respir Care 2008; 53:897902.
  7. Branson RD, Chatburn RL. Controversies in the critical care setting. Should adaptive pressure control modes be utilized for virtually all patients receiving mechanical ventilation? Respir Care 2007; 52:478485.
  8. Laubscher TP, Frutiger A, Fanconi S, Jutzi H, Brunner JX. Automatic selection of tidal volume, respiratory frequency and minute ventilation in intubated ICU patients as start up procedure for closed-loop controlled ventilation. Int J Clin Monit Comput 1994; 11:1930.
  9. Laubscher TP, Heinrichs W, Weiler N, Hartmann G, Brunner JX. An adaptive lung ventilation controller. IEEE Trans Biomed Eng 1994; 41:5159.
  10. Arnal JM, Wysocki M, Nafati C, et al. Automatic selection of breathing pattern using adaptive support ventilation. Intensive Care Med 2008; 34:7581.
  11. Campbell RS, Sinamban RP, Johannigman JA, et al. Clinical evaluation of a new closed loop ventilation mode: adaptive supportive ventilation (ASV). Crit Care 1999; 3( suppl 1):083.
  12. Belliato M, Palo A, Pasero D, Iotti GA, Mojoli F, Braschi A. Evaluation of adaptive support ventilation in paralysed patients and in a physical lung model. Int J Artif Organs 2004; 27:709716.
  13. Tassaux D, Dalmas E, Gratadour P, Jolliet P. Patient ventilator interactions during partial ventilatory support: a preliminary study comparing the effects of adaptive support ventilation with synchronized intermittent mandatory ventilation plus inspiratory pressure support. Crit Care Med 2002; 30:801807.
  14. Gruber PC, Gomersall CD, Leung P, et al. Randomized controlled trial comparing adaptive-support ventilation with pressure-regulated volume-controlled ventilation with automode in weaning patients after cardiac surgery. Anesthesiology 2008; 109:8187.
  15. Sulzer CF, Chiolero R, Chassot PG, et al. Adaptive support ventilation for fast tracheal extubation after cardiac surgery: a randomized controlled study. Anesthesiology 2001; 95:13391345.
  16. Petter AH, Chiolèro RL, Cassina T, Chassot PG, Müller XM, Revelly JP. Automatic “respirator/weaning” with adaptive support ventilation: the effect on duration of endotracheal intubation and patient management. Anesth Analg 2003; 97:17431750.
  17. Brunner JX, Iotti GA. Adaptive support ventilation (ASV). Minerva Anestesiol 2002; 68:365368.
  18. Campbell RS, Branson RD, Johannigman JA. Adaptive support ventilation. Respir Care Clin North Am 2001; 7:425440.
  19. Younes M. Proportional assist ventilation, a new approach to ventilatory support. Theory. Am Rev Respir Dis 1992; 145:114120.
  20. Younes M, Puddy A, Roberts D, et al. Proportional assist ventilation. Results of an initial clinical trial. Am Rev Respir Dis 1992; 145:121129.
  21. Kondili E, Prinianakis G, Alexopoulou C, Vakouti E, Klimathianaki M, Georgopoulos D. Respiratory load compensation during mechanical ventilatio—proportional assist ventilation with load-adjustable gain factors versus pressure support. Intensive Care Med 2006; 32:692699.
  22. Kondili E, Prinianakis G, Alexopoulou C, Vakouti E, Klimathianaki M, Georgopoulos D. Effect of different levels of pressure support and proportional assist ventilation on breathing pattern, work of breathing and gas exchange in mechanically ventilated hypercapnic COPD patients with acute respiratory failure. Respiration 2003; 70:355361.
  23. Grasso S, Puntillo F, Mascia L, et al. Compensation for increase in respiratory workload during mechanical ventilation. Pressure support versus proportional assist ventilation. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2000; 161:819826.
  24. Wrigge H, Golisch W, Zinserling J, Sydow M, Almeling G, Burchardi H. Proportional assist versus pressure support ventilation: effects on breathing pattern and respiratory work of patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Intensive Care Med 1999; 25:790798.
  25. Ranieri VM, Giuliani R, Mascia L, et al. Patient ventilator interaction during acute hypercapnia: pressure support vs. proportional assist ventilation. J Appl Physiol 1996; 81:426436.
  26. Kondili E, Xirouchaki N, Vaporidi K, Klimathianaki M, Georgopoulos D. Short-term cardiorespiratory effects of proportional assist and pressure support ventilation in patients with acute lung injury/acute respiratory distress syndrome. Anesthesiology 2006; 105:703708.
  27. Xirouchaki N, Kondili E, Vaporidi K, et al. Proportional assist ventilation with load-adjustable gain factors in critically ill patients: comparison with pressure support. Intensive Care Med 2008; 34:20262034.
  28. Bosma K, Ferreyra G, Ambrogio C, et al. Patient ventilator interaction and sleep in mechanically ventilated patients: pressure support versus proportional assist ventilation. Crit Care Med 2007; 35:10481054.
  29. Sinderby C, Beck J. Proportional assist ventilation and neurally adjusted ventilatory assist—better approaches to patient ventilator synchrony? Clin Chest Med 2008; 29:329342.
  30. Stock MC, Downs JB, Frolicher DA. Airway pressure release ventilation. Crit Care Med 1987; 15:462466.
  31. Baum M, Benzer H, Putensen C, Koller W, Putz G. [Biphasic positive airway pressure (BIPAP)—a new form of augmented ventilation]. Anaesthesist 1989; 38:452458.
  32. Seymour CW, Frazer M, Reilly PM, Fuchs BD. Airway pressure release and biphasic intermittent positive airway pressure ventilation: are they ready for prime time? J Trauma 2007; 62:12981308.
  33. Myers TR, MacIntyre NR. Respiratory controversies in the critical care setting. Does airway pressure release ventilation offer important new advantages in mechanical ventilator support? Respir Care 2007; 52:452458.
  34. Neumann P, Golisch W, Strohmeyer A, Buscher H, Burchardi H, Sydow M. Influence of different release times on spontaneous breathing pattern during airway pressure release ventilation. Intensive Care Med 2002; 28:17421749.
  35. Calzia E, Lindner KH, Witt S, et al. Pressure-time product and work of breathing during biphasic continuous positive airway pressure and assisted spontaneous breathing. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 1994; 150:904910.
  36. Rose L, Hawkins M. Airway pressure release ventilation and biphasic positive airway pressure: a systematic review of definitional criteria. Intensive Care Med 2008; 34:17661773.
  37. Sydow M, Burchardi H, Ephraim E, Zielmann S, Crozier TA. Longterm effects of two different ventilatory modes on oxygenation in acute lung injury. Comparison of airway pressure release ventilation and volume-controlled inverse ratio ventilation. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 1994; 149:15501556.
  38. Putensen C, Zech S, Wrigge H, et al. Long-term effects of spontaneous breathing during ventilatory support in patients with acute lung injury. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2001; 164:4349.
  39. Davis K, Johnson DJ, Branson RD, Campbell RS, Johannigman JA, Porembka D. Airway pressure release ventilation. Arch Surg 1993; 128:13481352.
  40. Kaplan LJ, Bailey H, Formosa V. Airway pressure release ventilation increases cardiac performance in patients with acute lung injury/adult respiratory distress syndrome. Crit Care 2001; 5:221226.
  41. Varpula T, Valta P, Niemi R, Takkunen O, Hynynen M, Pettilä VV. Airway pressure release ventilation as a primary ventilatory mode in acute respiratory distress syndrome. Acta Anaesthesiol Scand 2004; 48:722731.
  42. Siau C, Stewart TE. Current role of high frequency oscillatory ventilation and airway pressure release ventilation in acute lung injury and acute respiratory distress syndrome. Clin Chest Med 2008; 29:265275.
  43. Rathgeber J, Schorn B, Falk V, Kazmaier S, Spiegel T, Burchardi H. The influence of controlled mandatory ventilation (CMV), intermittent mandatory ventilation (IMV) and biphasic intermittent positive airway pressure (BIPAP) on duration of intubation and consumption of analgesics and sedatives. A prospective analysis in 596 patients following adult cardiac surgery. Eur J Anaesthesiol 1997; 14:576582.
  44. Habashi NM. Other approaches to open lung ventilation: airway pressure release ventilation. Crit Care Med 2005; 33 suppl 3:S228S240.
  45. Hess D, Mason S, Branson R. High-frequency ventilation design and equipment issues. Respir Care Clin North Am 2001; 7:577598.
  46. Fessler HE, Derdak S, Ferguson ND, et al. A protocol for high frequency oscillatory ventilation in adults: results from a roundtable discussion. Crit Care Med 2007; 35:16491654.
  47. Hamilton PP, Onayemi A, Smyth JA, et al. Comparison of conventional and high-frequency ventilation: oxygenation and lung pathology. J Appl Physiol 1983; 55:131138.
  48. Sedeek KA, Takeuchi M, Suchodolski K, et al. Open-lung protective ventilation with pressure control ventilation, high-frequency oscillation, and intratracheal pulmonary ventilation results in similar gas exchange, hemodynamics, and lung mechanics. Anesthesiology 2003; 99:11021111.
  49. Imai Y, Nakagawa S, Ito Y, Kawano T, Slutsky AS, Miyasaka K. Comparison of lung protection strategies using conventional and high-frequency oscillatory ventilation. J Appl Physiol 2001; 91:18361844.
  50. van Heerde M, Roubik K, Kopelent V, Plötz FB, Markhorst DG. Unloading work of breathing during high-frequency oscillatory ventilation: a bench study. Crit Care 2006; 10:R103.
  51. Derdak S, Mehta S, Stewart TE, et al., Multicenter Oscillatory Ventilation For Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome Trial (MOAT) Study Investigators. High-frequency oscillatory ventilation for acute respiratory distress syndrome in adults: a randomized, controlled trial. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2002; 166:801808.
  52. Bollen CW, van Well GT, Sherry T, et al. High-frequency oscillatory ventilation compared with conventional mechanical ventilation in adult respiratory distress syndrome: a randomized controlled trial [ISRCTN24242669]. Crit Care 2005; 9:R430R439.
  53. Mehta S, Granton J, MacDonald RJ, et al. High frequency oscillatory ventilation in adults: the Toronto experience. Chest 2004; 126:518527.
  54. Chan KP, Stewart TE, Mehta S. High-frequency oscillatory ventilation for adult patients with ARDS. Chest 2007; 131:19071916.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Eduardo Mireles-Cabodevila, MD
Department of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences, Little Rock, AR

Enrique Diaz-Guzman, MD
Respiratory Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Gustavo A. Heresi, MD
Respiratory Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Robert L. Chatburn, BS, RRT-NPS
Respiratory Institute, Respiratory Therapy Section, Cleveland Clinic

Address: Eduardo Mireles-Cabodevila, MD, Department of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences, 4301 West Markham Street, Slot 555, Little Rock, AR 77205; e mail mirelee@uams.edu

Mr. Chatburn has disclosed that he has received fees from Cardinal Health for serving on advisory committees or review panels and from Strategic Dynamics Inc for consulting.

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 76(7)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
417-430
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Eduardo Mireles-Cabodevila, MD
Department of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences, Little Rock, AR

Enrique Diaz-Guzman, MD
Respiratory Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Gustavo A. Heresi, MD
Respiratory Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Robert L. Chatburn, BS, RRT-NPS
Respiratory Institute, Respiratory Therapy Section, Cleveland Clinic

Address: Eduardo Mireles-Cabodevila, MD, Department of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences, 4301 West Markham Street, Slot 555, Little Rock, AR 77205; e mail mirelee@uams.edu

Mr. Chatburn has disclosed that he has received fees from Cardinal Health for serving on advisory committees or review panels and from Strategic Dynamics Inc for consulting.

Author and Disclosure Information

Eduardo Mireles-Cabodevila, MD
Department of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences, Little Rock, AR

Enrique Diaz-Guzman, MD
Respiratory Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Gustavo A. Heresi, MD
Respiratory Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Robert L. Chatburn, BS, RRT-NPS
Respiratory Institute, Respiratory Therapy Section, Cleveland Clinic

Address: Eduardo Mireles-Cabodevila, MD, Department of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences, 4301 West Markham Street, Slot 555, Little Rock, AR 77205; e mail mirelee@uams.edu

Mr. Chatburn has disclosed that he has received fees from Cardinal Health for serving on advisory committees or review panels and from Strategic Dynamics Inc for consulting.

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Technologic advances and computerized control of mechanical ventilators have made it possible to deliver ventilatory assistance in new modes. Driving these innovations is the desire to prevent ventilator-induced lung injury, improve patient comfort, and liberate the patient from mechanical ventilation as soon as possible.

We call these innovations “alternative” modes to differentiate them from the plain volume-control and pressure-control modes. Some clinicians rarely use these new modes, but in some medical centers they have become the most common ones used, or are being used unknowingly (the operator misunderstands the mode name). The information we provide on these modes of ventilation is by no means an endorsement of their use, but rather a tool to help the clinician understand their physiologic, theoretical, and clinical effects.

We focused on two goals:

  • Explain what the mode does
  • Briefly review the theoretical benefits and the actual evidence supporting these alternative modes of ventilation.

STANDARD NOMENCLATURE NEEDED

Since its invention, mechanical ventilation has been plagued by multiple names being used to describe the same things. For example, volume-control ventilation is also called volume-cycled ventilation, assist-control ventilation, volume-limited ventilation, and controlled mechanical ventilation. Similarly, multiple abbreviations are used, each depending on the brand of ventilator, and new acronyms have been added in recent years as new modes have been developed. The vast number of names and modes can confuse even the most seasoned critical care physician.

Efforts to establish a common nomenclature are under way.1

WHAT IS A MODE?

A mode of mechanical ventilation has three essential components:

  • The control variable
  • The breath sequence
  • The targeting scheme.

Similar modes may require more detailed descriptions to distinguish them, but the basic function can be explained by these three components.

The control variable

In general, inspiration is an active process, driven by the patient’s effort, the ventilator, or both, while expiration is passive. For simplicity, in this article a mechanical breath means the inspiratory phase of the breath.

The machine can only control the volume (and flow) or the pressure given. The breaths can be further described on the basis of what triggers the breath, what limits it (the maximum value of a control variable), and what ends (cycles) it.

Figure 1. Volume control (top) and pressure control (bottom) are modes of continuous mandatory ventilation. Each mode is depicted as patient effort increases. Notice that the mode’s control variable (volume or pressure) remains constant as patient effort increases. Contrast these findings with those in Figure 2.
Therefore, a volume-controlled breath is triggered by the patient or by the machine, limited by flow, and cycled by volume (Figure 1). A pressure-controlled breath is triggered by the patient or the machine, limited by pressure, and cycled by time or flow (Figure 1).

The breath sequence

There are three possible breath sequences:

  • Continuous mandatory ventilation, in which all breaths are controlled by the machine (but can be triggered by the patient)
  • Intermittent mandatory ventilation, in which the patient can take spontaneous breaths between mandatory breaths
  • Continuous spontaneous ventilation, in which all breaths are spontaneous (Table 1).

The targeting scheme

The targeting or feedback scheme refers to the ventilator settings and programming that dictate its response to the patient’s lung compliance, lung resistance, and respiratory effort. The regulation can be as simple as controlling the pressure in pressure-control mode, or it can be based on a complicated algorithm.

In the sections that follow, we describe some of the available alternative modes of mechanical ventilation. We will explain only the targeting schemes in the modes reviewed (Table 1, Table 2), but more information on other targeting schemes can be found elsewhere.1,2 We will focus on evidence generated in adult patients receiving invasive mechanical ventilation.

 

 

ADAPTIVE PRESSURE CONTROL

Figure 2. A machine in adaptive pressure control mode (top) adjusts the inspiratory pressure to maintain a set tidal volume. Adaptive support ventilation (bottom) automatically selects the appropriate tidal volume and frequency for mandatory breaths and the appropriate tidal volume for spontaneous breaths on the basis of the respiratory system mechanics and the target minute ventilation.
One of the concerns with pressure-control ventilation is that it cannot guarantee a minimum minute ventilation (the volume of air that goes in and out in 1 minute; the tidal volume × breaths per minute) in the face of changing lung mechanics or patient effort, or both. To solve this problem, in 1991 the Siemens Servo 300 ventilator (Siemens, Maquet Critical Care AB, Solna, Sweden) introduced Pressure Regulated Volume Control, a mode that delivers pressure-controlled breaths with a target tidal volume and that is otherwise known as adaptive pressure control (APC) (Figure 2).

Other names for adaptive pressure control

  • Pressure Regulated Volume Control (Maquet Servo-i, Rastatt, Germany)
  • AutoFlow (Dräger Medical AG, Lübeck, Germany)
  • Adaptive Pressure Ventilation (Hamilton Galileo, Hamilton Medical AG, Bonaduz, Switzerland)
  • Volume Control+ (Puritan Bennett, Tyco Healthcare; Mansfield, MA)
  • Volume Targeted Pressure Control, Pressure Controlled Volume Guaranteed (Engström, General Electric, Madison, WI).

What does adaptive pressure control do?

The APC mode delivers pressure-controlled breaths with an adaptive targeting scheme (Table 2).

In pressure-control ventilation, tidal volumes depend on the lung’s physiologic mechanics (compliance and resistance) and patient effort (Figure 1). Therefore, the tidal volume varies with changes in lung physiology (ie, larger or smaller tidal volumes than targeted).

To overcome this effect, a machine in APC mode adjusts the inspiratory pressure to deliver the set minimal target tidal volume. If tidal volume increases, the machine decreases the inspiratory pressure, and if tidal volume decreases, the machine increases the inspiratory pressure. However, if the patient effort is large enough, the tidal volume will increase in spite of decreasing the inspiratory pressure (Figure 2). The adjustments to the inspiratory pressure occur after the tidal volume is off-target in a number of breaths.

Common sources of confusion with adaptive pressure control

First, APC is not a volume-control mode. In volume control, the tidal volume does not change; in APC the tidal volume can increase or decrease, and the ventilator will adjust the inflation pressure to achieve the target volume. Thus, APC guarantees an average minimum tidal volume but not a maximum tidal volume.

Second, a characteristic of pressure control (and hence, APC) is that the flow of gas varies to maintain constant airway pressure (ie, maintain the set inspiratory pressure). This characteristic allows a patient who generates an inspiratory effort to receive flow as demanded, which is likely more comfortable. This is essentially different from volume control, in which flow is set by the operator and hence is fixed. Thus, if the patient effort is strong enough (Figure 1), this leads to what is called flow asynchrony, in which the patient does not get the flow asked for in a breath.

Ventilator settings in adaptive pressure control

Ventilator settings in APC are:

  • Tidal volume
  • Time spent in inspiration (inspiratory time)
  • Frequency
  • Fraction of inspired oxygen (Fio2)
  • Positive end-expiratory pressure (PEEP).

Some ventilators also require setting the speed to reach the peak pressure (also known as slope percent or inspiratory rise time).

Clinical applications of adaptive pressure control

This mode is designed to maintain a consistent tidal volume during pressure-control ventilation and to promote inspiratory flow synchrony. It is a means of automatically reducing ventilatory support (ie, weaning) as the patient’s inspiratory effort becomes stronger, as in awakening from anesthesia.

APC may not be ideal for patients who have an inappropriately increased respiratory drive (eg, in severe metabolic acidosis), since the inspiratory pressure will decrease to maintain the targeted average tidal volume, inappropriately shifting the work of breathing onto the patient.

Theoretical benefits of adaptive pressure control

APC guarantees a minimum average tidal volume (unless the pressure alarm threshold is set too low, so that the target tidal volume is not delivered). Other theoretical benefits are flow synchrony, less ventilator manipulation by the operator, and automatic weaning of ventilator support.

Evidence of benefit of adaptive pressure control

Physiologic benefits. This mode has lower peak inspiratory pressures than does volume-control ventilation,3,4 which is often reported as a positive finding. However, in volume-control mode (the usual comparator), the peak inspiratory pressure is a manifestation of both resistance and compliance. Hence, peak inspiratory pressure is expected to be higher but does not reflect actual lung-distending pressures. It is the plateau pressure, a manifestation of lung compliance, that is related to lung injury.

Patient comfort. APC may increase the work of breathing when using low tidal volume ventilation and when there is increased respiratory effort (drive).5 Interestingly, APC was less comfortable than pressure support ventilation in a small trial.6

Outcomes have not been studied.7

Adaptive pressure control: Bottom line

APC is widely available and widely used, sometimes unknowingly (eg, if the operator thinks it is volume control). It is relatively easy to use and to set; however, evidence of its benefit is scant.

 

 

ADAPTIVE SUPPORT VENTILATION

Adaptive support ventilation (ASV) evolved as a form of mandatory minute ventilation implemented with adaptive pressure control. Mandatory minute ventilation is a mode that allows the operator to preset a target minute ventilation, and the ventilator then supplies mandatory breaths, either volume- or pressure-controlled, if the patient’s spontaneous breaths generate a lower minute ventilation.

ASV automatically selects the appropriate tidal volume and frequency for mandatory breaths and the appropriate tidal volume for spontaneous breaths on the basis of the respiratory system mechanics and target minute alveolar ventilation.

Described in 1994 by Laubscher et al,8,9 ASV became commercially available in 1998 in Europe and in 2007 in the United States (Hamilton Galileo ventilator, Hamilton Medical AG). This is the first commercially available ventilator that uses an “optimal” targeting scheme (see below).

What does adaptive support ventilation do?

ASV delivers pressure-controlled breaths using an adaptive (optimal) scheme (Table 2). “Optimal,” in this context, means minimizing the mechanical work of breathing: the machine selects a tidal volume and frequency that the patient’s brain would presumably select if the patient were not connected to a ventilator. This pattern is assumed to encourage the patient to generate spontaneous breaths.

The ventilator calculates the normal required minute ventilation based on the patient’s ideal weight and estimated dead space volume (ie, 2.2 mL/kg). This calculation represents 100% of minute ventilation. The clinician at the bedside sets a target percent of minute ventilation that the ventilator will support—higher than 100% if the patient has increased requirements due, eg, to sepsis or increased dead space, or less than 100% during weaning.

The ventilator initially delivers test breaths, in which it measures the expiratory time constant for the respiratory system and then uses this along with the estimated dead space and normal minute ventilation to calculate an optimal breathing frequency in terms of mechanical work.

The optimal or target tidal volume is calculated as the normal minute ventilation divided by the optimal frequency. The target tidal volume is achieved by the use of APC (see above) (Figure 2). This means that the pressure limit is automatically adjusted to achieve an average delivered tidal volume equal to the target. The ventilator continuously monitors the respiratory system mechanics and adjusts its settings accordingly.

The ventilator adjusts its breaths to avoid air trapping by allowing enough time to exhale, to avoid hypoventilation by delivering tidal volume greater than the dead space, and to avoid volutrauma by avoiding large tidal volumes.

Ventilator settings in adaptive support ventilation

Ventilator settings in ASV are:

  • Patient height (to calculate the ideal body weight)
  • Sex
  • Percent of normal predicted minute ventilation goal
  • Fio2
  • PEEP.

Clinical applications of adaptive support ventilation

ASV is intended as a sole mode of ventilation, from initial support to weaning.

Theoretical benefits of adaptive support ventilation

In theory, ASV offers automatic selection of ventilator settings, automatic adaptation to changing patient lung mechanics, less need for human manipulation of the machine, improved synchrony, and automatic weaning.

Evidence of benefit of adaptive support ventilation

Physiologic benefits. Ventilator settings are adjusted automatically. ASV selects different tidal volume-respiratory rate combinations based on respiratory mechanics in passive and paralyzed patients.10–12 In actively breathing patients, there was no difference in the ventilator settings chosen by ASV for different clinical scenarios (and lung physiology).10 Compared with pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation, with ASV, the inspiratory load is less and patient-ventilator interaction is better.13

Patient-ventilator synchrony and comfort have not been studied.

Outcomes. Two trials suggest that ASV may decrease time on mechanical ventilation.14,15 However, in another trial,16 compared with a standard protocol, ASV led to fewer ventilator adjustments but achieved similar postsurgical weaning outcomes. The effect of this mode on the death rate has not been examined.17,18

Adaptive support ventilation: Bottom line

ASV is the first commercially available mode that automatically selects all the ventilator settings except PEEP and Fio2. These seem appropriate for different clinical scenarios in patients with poor respiratory effort or in paralyzed patients. Evidence of the effect in actively breathing patients and on outcomes such as length of stay or death is still lacking.

PROPORTIONAL ASSIST VENTILATION

Patients who have normal respiratory drive but who have difficulty sustaining adequate spontaneous ventilation are often subjected to pressure support ventilation (PSV), in which the ventilator generates a constant pressure throughout inspiration regardless of the intensity of the patient’s effort.

In 1992, Younes and colleagues19,20 developed proportional assist ventilation (PAV) as an alternative in which the ventilator generates pressure in proportion to the patient’s effort. PAV became commercially available in Europe in 1999 and was approved in the United States in 2006, available on the Puritan Bennett 840 ventilator (Puritan Bennett Co, Boulder, CO). PAV has also been used for noninvasive ventilation, but this is not available in the United States.

Other names for proportional assist ventilation

Proportional Pressure Support (Dräger Medical; not yet available in the United States).

 

 

What does proportional assist ventilation do?

This mode delivers pressure-controlled breaths with a servo control scheme (Table 2).

To better understand PAV, we can compare it with PSV. With PSV, the pressure applied by the ventilator rises to a preset level that is held constant (a set-point scheme) until a cycling criterion (a percent of the maximum inspiratory flow value) is reached. The inspiratory flow and tidal volume are the result of the patient’s inspiratory effort, the level of pressure applied, and the respiratory system mechanics.

Figure 3. In proportional assist ventilation, the flow, pressure, and volume delivered are adjusted proportionally to the patient’s effort.
In contrast, during PAV, the pressure applied is a function of patient effort: the greater the inspiratory effort, the greater the increase in applied pressure (servo targeting scheme) (Figure 3). The operator sets the percentage of support to be delivered by the ventilator. The ventilator intermittently measures the compliance and resistance of the patient’s respiratory system and the instantaneous patient-generated flow and volume, and on the basis of these it delivers a proportional amount of inspiratory pressure.

In PAV, as in PSV, all breaths are spontaneous (Table 1). The patient controls the timing and size of the breath. There are no preset pressure, flow, or volume goals, but safety limits on the volume and pressure delivered can be set.

Ventilator settings in proportional assist ventilation

Ventilator settings in PAV are:

  • Airway type (endotracheal tube, tracheostomy)
  • Airway size (inner diameter)
  • Percentage of work supported (assist range 5%–95%)
  • Tidal volume limit
  • Pressure limit
  • Expiratory sensitivity (normally, as inspiration ends, flow should stop; this parameter tells the ventilator at what flow to end inspiration).

Caution when assessing the literature. Earlier ventilator versions, ie, Dräger and Manitoba (University of Manitoba, Winnipeg, MB, Canada), which are not available in the United States, required the repeated calculation of the respiratory system mechanics and the manual setting of flow and volume assists (amplification factors) independently. To overcome this limitation, new software automatically adjusts the flow and volume amplification to support the loads imposed by the automatically measured values of resistance and elastance (inverse of compliance) of the respiratory system.21 This software is included in the model (Puritan Bennett) available in the United States.

Clinical applications of proportional assist ventilation

The PAV mode is indicated for maximizing ventilator patient synchrony for assisted spontaneous ventilation.

PAV is contraindicated in patients with respiratory depression (bradypnea) or large air leaks (eg, bronchopleural fistulas). It should be used with caution in patients with severe hyperinflation, in which the patient may still be exhaling but the ventilator doesn’t recognize it. Another group in which PAV should be used with caution is those with high ventilatory drives, in which the ventilator overestimates respiratory system mechanics. This situation can lead to overassistance due to the “runaway phenomenon,” in which the ventilator continues to provide support even if the patient has stopped inspiration.22

Theoretical benefits of proportional assist ventilation

In theory, PAV should reduce the work of breathing, improve synchrony, automatically adapt to changing patient lung mechanics and effort, decrease the need for ventilator intervention and manipulation, decrease the need for sedation, and improve sleep.

Evidence of benefit of proportional assist ventilation

Physiologic benefits. PAV reduces the work of breathing better than PSV,21 even in the face of changing respiratory mechanics or increased respiratory demand (hypercapnia).23–25 The hemodynamic profile is similar to that in PSV. Tidal volumes are variable; however, in recent reports the tidal volumes were within the lung-protective range (6–8 mL/kg, plateau pressure < 30 cm H20).26,27

Comfort. PAV entails less patient effort and discomfort that PSV does.23,25 PAV significantly reduces asynchrony,27 which in turn may favorably affect sleep in critically ill patients. 28

Outcomes. The probability of spontaneous breathing without assistance was significantly better in critically ill patients ventilated with PAV than with PSV. No trial has reported the effect of PAV on deaths.27,29

Proportional assist ventilation: Bottom line

Extensive basic research has been done with PAV in different forms of respiratory failure, such as obstructive lung disease, acute respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), and chronic respiratory failure. It fulfills its main goal, which is to improve patient-ventilator synchrony. Clinical experience with PAV in the United States is limited, as it was only recently approved.

 

 

AIRWAY PRESSURE-RELEASE VENTILATION AND BIPHASIC POSITIVE AIRWAY PRESSURE

Airway pressure-release ventilation (APRV) was described in 1987 by Stock et al30 as a mode for delivering ventilation in acute lung injury while avoiding high airway pressures. APRV combines high constant positive airway pressure (improving oxygenation and promoting alveolar recruitment) with intermittent releases (causing exhalation).

Figure 4. Airway pressure-release ventilation (top) and biphasic positive airway pressure (bottom) are forms of pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation in which spontaneous breaths can occur at any point without altering the ventilator-delivered breaths. The difference is that the time spent in high pressure is greater in airway pressure-release ventilation.
In 1989, Baum et al31 described biphasic positive airway pressure ventilation as a mode in which spontaneous ventilation could be achieved at any point in the mechanical ventilation cycle—inspiration or exhalation (Figure 4). The goal was to allow unrestricted spontaneous breathing to reduce sedation and promote weaning. These modes are conceptually the same, the main difference being that the time spent in low pressure (Tlow; see below) is less than 1.5 seconds for APRV. Otherwise, they have identical characteristics, thus allowing any ventilator with the capability of delivering APRV to deliver biphasic positive airway pressure, and vice versa. Machines with these modes became commercially available in the mid 1990s.

Other names for biphasic positive airway pressure

Other names for biphasic positive airway pressure are:

  • BiLevel (Puritan Bennett)
  • BIPAP (Dräger Europe)
  • Bi Vent (Siemens)
  • BiPhasic (Avea, Cardinal Health, Inc, Dublin, OH)
  • PCV+ (Dräger Medical)
  • DuoPAP (Hamilton).

Caution—name confusion. In North America, BiPAP (Respironics, Murrysville, PA) and BiLevel are used to refer to noninvasive modes of ventilation.

APRV has no other name.

What do these modes do?

These modes deliver pressure-controlled, time-triggered, and time-cycled breaths using a set-point targeting scheme (Table 2). This means that the ventilator maintains a constant pressure (set point) even in the face of spontaneous breaths.

Caution—source of confusion. The term continuous positive airway pressure (CPAP) is often used to describe this mode. However, CPAP is pressure that is applied continuously at the same level; the patient generates all the work to maintain ventilation (“pressure-controlled continuous spontaneous ventilation” in the current nomenclature). In APRV, the airway pressure is intermittently released and reapplied, generating a tidal volume that supports ventilation. In other words, this is a pressure-controlled breath with a very prolonged inspiratory time and a short expiratory time in which spontaneous ventilation is possible at any point (“pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation” in the current nomenclature).

How these modes are set in the ventilator may also be a source of confusion. To describe the time spent in high and low airway pressures, we use the terms Thigh and Tlow, respectively. By convention, the difference between APRV and biphasic mode is the duration of Tlow (< 1.5 sec for APRV).

Similarly, Phigh and Plow are used to describe the high and low airway pressure. To better understand this concept, you can create the same mode in conventional pressure-control ventilation by thinking of the Thigh as the inspiratory time, the Tlow as the expiratory time, the Phigh as inspiratory pressure, and the Plow as PEEP.

Hence, APRV is an extreme form of inverse ratio ventilation, with an inspiration-to-expiration ratio of 4:1. This means a patient spends most of the time in Phigh and Thigh, and exhalations are short (Tlow and Plow). In contrast, the biphasic mode uses conventional inspiration-expiration ratios (Figure 4).

As with any form of pressure control, the tidal volume is generated by airway pressure rising above baseline (ie, the end-expiratory value). Hence, to ensure an increase in minute ventilation, the mandatory breath rate must be increased (ie, decreasing Thigh, Tlow, or both) or the tidal volume must be increased (ie, increasing the difference between Phigh and Plow). This means that in APRV the Tlow has to happen more often (by increasing the number of breaths) or be more prolonged (allowing more air to exhale). Because unrestricted spontaneous breaths are permitted at any point of the cycle, the patient contributes to the total minute ventilation (usually 10%–40%).

In APRV and biphasic mode, the operator’s set time and pressure in inspiration and expiration will be delivered regardless of the patient’s breathing efforts—the patient’s spontaneous breath does not trigger a mechanical breath. Some ventilators have automatic adjustments to improve the trigger synchrony.

Ventilator settings in APRV and biphasic mode

These modes require the setting of two pressure levels (Phigh and Plow) and two time durations (Thigh and Tlow). One can add pressure support or automatic tube compensation to assist spontaneous breaths. The difference in Tlow generates differences in the Thigh:Tlow ratio: APRV has a short Tlow (an inspiration-expiration ratio of 4:1). Biphasic mode has a conventional inspiration-expiration ratio of 1:1 to 1:4.

Clinical applications

APRV is used in acute lung injury and ARDS. This mode should be used with caution or not at all in patients with obstructive lung disease or inappropriately increased respiratory drive.32–35

Biphasic mode is intended for both ventilation and weaning. In a patient who has poor respiratory effort or who is paralyzed, biphasic is identical to pressure-control/continuous mandatory ventilation.

Theoretical benefits of APRV and biphasic mode

Multiple benefits have been ascribed to these modes. In theory, APRV will maximize and maintain alveolar recruitment, improve oxygenation, lower inflation pressures, and decrease overinflation. Both APRV and biphasic, by preserving spontaneous breathing, will improve ventilation-perfusion matching and gas diffusion, improve the hemodynamic profile (less need for vasopressors, higher cardiac output, reduced ventricular workload, improved organ perfusion), and improve synchrony (decrease the work of breathing and the need for sedation).

Evidence of benefit of APRV and biphasic mode

APRV and biphasic are different modes. However studies evaluating their effects are combined. This is in part the result of the nomenclature confusion and different practice in different countries.36

Physiologic benefits. In studies, spontaneous breaths contributed to 10% to 40% of minute ventilation,37,38 improved ventilation of dependent areas of the lung, improved ventilation-perfusion match and recruitment,39 and improved hemodynamic profile.40

Patient comfort. These modes are thought to decrease the need for analgesia and sedation,38 but a recent trial showed no difference with pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation.41 Patient ventilator synchrony and comfort have not been studied.32,42

Outcomes. In small trials, these modes made no difference in terms of deaths, but they may decrease the length of mechanical ventilation.38,41,43,44

APRV and biphasic mode: Bottom line

Maintaining spontaneous breathing while on mechanical ventilation has hemodynamic and ventilatory benefits.

APRV and biphasic mode are not the same thing. APRV’s main goal is to maximize mean airway pressure and, hence, lung recruitment, whereas the main goal of the biphasic mode is synchrony.

There is a plethora of ventilator settings and questions related to physiologic effects.33,34,36

Although these modes are widely used in some centers, there is no evidence yet that they are superior to conventional volume- or pressure-control ventilation with low tidal volume for ARDS and acute lung injury. There is no conclusive evidence that these modes improve synchrony, time to weaning, or patient comfort.

 

 

HIGH-FREQUENCY OSCILLATORY VENTILATION

High-frequency oscillatory ventilation (HFOV) was first described and patented in 1952 by Emerson and was clinically developed in the early 1970s by Lunkenheimer.45

The goal of HFOV is to minimize lung injury; its characteristics (discussed below) make it useful in patients with severe ARDS. The US Food and Drug Administration approved it for infants in 1991 and for children in 1995. The adult model has been available since 1993, but it was not approved until 2001 (SensorMedics 3100B, Cardinal Health, Inc).

Other names for high-frequency oscillatory ventilation

While HFOV has no alternative names, the following acronyms describe similar modes:

  • HFPPV (high-frequency positive pressure ventilation)
  • HFJV (high-frequency jet ventilation)
  • HFFI (high-frequency flow interruption)
  • HFPV (high-frequency percussive ventilation)
  • HFCWO (high-frequency chest wall oscillation).

All of these modes require different specialized ventilators.

What does high-frequency oscillatory ventilation do?

Conceptually, HFOV is a form of pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation with a set-point control scheme. In contrast to conventional pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation, in which relatively small spontaneous breaths may be superimposed on relatively large mandatory breaths, HFOV superimposes very small mandatory breaths (oscillations) on top of spontaneous breaths.

Figure 5. High-frequency oscillatory ventilation delivers very small mandatory breaths (oscillations) at frequencies of up to 900 breaths per minute.
HFOV can be delivered only with a special ventilator. The ventilator delivers a constant flow (bias flow), while a valve creates resistance to maintain airway pressure, on top of which a piston pump oscillates at frequencies of 3 to 15 Hz (160–900 breaths/minute). This creates a constant airway pressure with small oscillations (Figure 5); often, clinicians at the bedside look for the “chest wiggle” to assess the appropriate amplitude settings, although this has not been systematically studied.

Adult patients are usually paralyzed or deeply sedated, since deep spontaneous breathing will trigger alarms and affect ventilator performance.

To manage ventilation (CO2 clearance), one or several of the following maneuvers can be done: decrease the oscillation frequency, increase the amplitude of the oscillations, increase the inspiratory time, or increase bias flow (while allowing an endotracheal tube cuff leak). Oxygenation adjustments are controlled by manipulating the mean airway pressure and the Fio2.

Ventilator settings in high-frequency oscillatory ventilation

Ventilator settings in HFOV are46:

  • Airway pressure amplitude (delta P or power)
  • Mean airway pressure
  • Percent inspiration
  • Inspiratory bias flow
  • Fio2.

Clinical applications of high-frequency oscillatory ventilation

This mode is usually reserved for ARDS patients for whom conventional ventilation is failing. A recently published protocol46 suggests considering HFOV when there is oxygenation failure (Fio2 ≥ 0.7 and PEEP ≥ 14 cm H2O) or ventilation failure (pH < 7.25 with tidal volume ≥ 6 mL/kg predicted body weight and plateau airway pressure ≥ 30 cm H2O).

This mode is contraindicated when there is known severe airflow obstruction or intracranial hypertension.

Theoretical benefits of high-frequency oscillatory ventilation

Conceptually, HFOV can provide the highest mean airway pressure paired with the lowest tidal volume of any mode. These benefits might make HFOV the ideal lung-protective ventilation strategy.

Evidence of benefit of high-frequency oscillatory ventilation

Physiologic benefits. Animal models have shown less histologic damage and lung inflammation with HFOV than with high-tidal-volume conventional ventilation47,48 and low-tidal-volume conventional ventilation.49

Patient comfort has not been studied. However, current technology does impose undue work of breathing in spontaneously breathing patients.50

Outcomes. Several retrospective case series have described better oxygenation with HFOV as rescue therapy for severe ARDS than with conventional mechanical ventilation. Two randomized controlled trials have studied HFOV vs high-tidal-volume conventional mechanical ventilation for early severe ARDS; HFOV was safe but made no difference in terms of deaths.42,51–54

High-frequency oscillatory ventilation: Bottom line

In theory, HFOV provides all the benefits of an ideal lung-protective strategy, at least for paralyzed or deeply sedated patients. Animal studies support these concepts. In human adults, HFOV has been shown to be safe and to provide better oxygenation but no improvement in death rates compared with conventional mechanical ventilation. Currently, HFOV is better reserved for patients with severe ARDS for whom conventional mechanical ventilation is failing.

Technologic advances and computerized control of mechanical ventilators have made it possible to deliver ventilatory assistance in new modes. Driving these innovations is the desire to prevent ventilator-induced lung injury, improve patient comfort, and liberate the patient from mechanical ventilation as soon as possible.

We call these innovations “alternative” modes to differentiate them from the plain volume-control and pressure-control modes. Some clinicians rarely use these new modes, but in some medical centers they have become the most common ones used, or are being used unknowingly (the operator misunderstands the mode name). The information we provide on these modes of ventilation is by no means an endorsement of their use, but rather a tool to help the clinician understand their physiologic, theoretical, and clinical effects.

We focused on two goals:

  • Explain what the mode does
  • Briefly review the theoretical benefits and the actual evidence supporting these alternative modes of ventilation.

STANDARD NOMENCLATURE NEEDED

Since its invention, mechanical ventilation has been plagued by multiple names being used to describe the same things. For example, volume-control ventilation is also called volume-cycled ventilation, assist-control ventilation, volume-limited ventilation, and controlled mechanical ventilation. Similarly, multiple abbreviations are used, each depending on the brand of ventilator, and new acronyms have been added in recent years as new modes have been developed. The vast number of names and modes can confuse even the most seasoned critical care physician.

Efforts to establish a common nomenclature are under way.1

WHAT IS A MODE?

A mode of mechanical ventilation has three essential components:

  • The control variable
  • The breath sequence
  • The targeting scheme.

Similar modes may require more detailed descriptions to distinguish them, but the basic function can be explained by these three components.

The control variable

In general, inspiration is an active process, driven by the patient’s effort, the ventilator, or both, while expiration is passive. For simplicity, in this article a mechanical breath means the inspiratory phase of the breath.

The machine can only control the volume (and flow) or the pressure given. The breaths can be further described on the basis of what triggers the breath, what limits it (the maximum value of a control variable), and what ends (cycles) it.

Figure 1. Volume control (top) and pressure control (bottom) are modes of continuous mandatory ventilation. Each mode is depicted as patient effort increases. Notice that the mode’s control variable (volume or pressure) remains constant as patient effort increases. Contrast these findings with those in Figure 2.
Therefore, a volume-controlled breath is triggered by the patient or by the machine, limited by flow, and cycled by volume (Figure 1). A pressure-controlled breath is triggered by the patient or the machine, limited by pressure, and cycled by time or flow (Figure 1).

The breath sequence

There are three possible breath sequences:

  • Continuous mandatory ventilation, in which all breaths are controlled by the machine (but can be triggered by the patient)
  • Intermittent mandatory ventilation, in which the patient can take spontaneous breaths between mandatory breaths
  • Continuous spontaneous ventilation, in which all breaths are spontaneous (Table 1).

The targeting scheme

The targeting or feedback scheme refers to the ventilator settings and programming that dictate its response to the patient’s lung compliance, lung resistance, and respiratory effort. The regulation can be as simple as controlling the pressure in pressure-control mode, or it can be based on a complicated algorithm.

In the sections that follow, we describe some of the available alternative modes of mechanical ventilation. We will explain only the targeting schemes in the modes reviewed (Table 1, Table 2), but more information on other targeting schemes can be found elsewhere.1,2 We will focus on evidence generated in adult patients receiving invasive mechanical ventilation.

 

 

ADAPTIVE PRESSURE CONTROL

Figure 2. A machine in adaptive pressure control mode (top) adjusts the inspiratory pressure to maintain a set tidal volume. Adaptive support ventilation (bottom) automatically selects the appropriate tidal volume and frequency for mandatory breaths and the appropriate tidal volume for spontaneous breaths on the basis of the respiratory system mechanics and the target minute ventilation.
One of the concerns with pressure-control ventilation is that it cannot guarantee a minimum minute ventilation (the volume of air that goes in and out in 1 minute; the tidal volume × breaths per minute) in the face of changing lung mechanics or patient effort, or both. To solve this problem, in 1991 the Siemens Servo 300 ventilator (Siemens, Maquet Critical Care AB, Solna, Sweden) introduced Pressure Regulated Volume Control, a mode that delivers pressure-controlled breaths with a target tidal volume and that is otherwise known as adaptive pressure control (APC) (Figure 2).

Other names for adaptive pressure control

  • Pressure Regulated Volume Control (Maquet Servo-i, Rastatt, Germany)
  • AutoFlow (Dräger Medical AG, Lübeck, Germany)
  • Adaptive Pressure Ventilation (Hamilton Galileo, Hamilton Medical AG, Bonaduz, Switzerland)
  • Volume Control+ (Puritan Bennett, Tyco Healthcare; Mansfield, MA)
  • Volume Targeted Pressure Control, Pressure Controlled Volume Guaranteed (Engström, General Electric, Madison, WI).

What does adaptive pressure control do?

The APC mode delivers pressure-controlled breaths with an adaptive targeting scheme (Table 2).

In pressure-control ventilation, tidal volumes depend on the lung’s physiologic mechanics (compliance and resistance) and patient effort (Figure 1). Therefore, the tidal volume varies with changes in lung physiology (ie, larger or smaller tidal volumes than targeted).

To overcome this effect, a machine in APC mode adjusts the inspiratory pressure to deliver the set minimal target tidal volume. If tidal volume increases, the machine decreases the inspiratory pressure, and if tidal volume decreases, the machine increases the inspiratory pressure. However, if the patient effort is large enough, the tidal volume will increase in spite of decreasing the inspiratory pressure (Figure 2). The adjustments to the inspiratory pressure occur after the tidal volume is off-target in a number of breaths.

Common sources of confusion with adaptive pressure control

First, APC is not a volume-control mode. In volume control, the tidal volume does not change; in APC the tidal volume can increase or decrease, and the ventilator will adjust the inflation pressure to achieve the target volume. Thus, APC guarantees an average minimum tidal volume but not a maximum tidal volume.

Second, a characteristic of pressure control (and hence, APC) is that the flow of gas varies to maintain constant airway pressure (ie, maintain the set inspiratory pressure). This characteristic allows a patient who generates an inspiratory effort to receive flow as demanded, which is likely more comfortable. This is essentially different from volume control, in which flow is set by the operator and hence is fixed. Thus, if the patient effort is strong enough (Figure 1), this leads to what is called flow asynchrony, in which the patient does not get the flow asked for in a breath.

Ventilator settings in adaptive pressure control

Ventilator settings in APC are:

  • Tidal volume
  • Time spent in inspiration (inspiratory time)
  • Frequency
  • Fraction of inspired oxygen (Fio2)
  • Positive end-expiratory pressure (PEEP).

Some ventilators also require setting the speed to reach the peak pressure (also known as slope percent or inspiratory rise time).

Clinical applications of adaptive pressure control

This mode is designed to maintain a consistent tidal volume during pressure-control ventilation and to promote inspiratory flow synchrony. It is a means of automatically reducing ventilatory support (ie, weaning) as the patient’s inspiratory effort becomes stronger, as in awakening from anesthesia.

APC may not be ideal for patients who have an inappropriately increased respiratory drive (eg, in severe metabolic acidosis), since the inspiratory pressure will decrease to maintain the targeted average tidal volume, inappropriately shifting the work of breathing onto the patient.

Theoretical benefits of adaptive pressure control

APC guarantees a minimum average tidal volume (unless the pressure alarm threshold is set too low, so that the target tidal volume is not delivered). Other theoretical benefits are flow synchrony, less ventilator manipulation by the operator, and automatic weaning of ventilator support.

Evidence of benefit of adaptive pressure control

Physiologic benefits. This mode has lower peak inspiratory pressures than does volume-control ventilation,3,4 which is often reported as a positive finding. However, in volume-control mode (the usual comparator), the peak inspiratory pressure is a manifestation of both resistance and compliance. Hence, peak inspiratory pressure is expected to be higher but does not reflect actual lung-distending pressures. It is the plateau pressure, a manifestation of lung compliance, that is related to lung injury.

Patient comfort. APC may increase the work of breathing when using low tidal volume ventilation and when there is increased respiratory effort (drive).5 Interestingly, APC was less comfortable than pressure support ventilation in a small trial.6

Outcomes have not been studied.7

Adaptive pressure control: Bottom line

APC is widely available and widely used, sometimes unknowingly (eg, if the operator thinks it is volume control). It is relatively easy to use and to set; however, evidence of its benefit is scant.

 

 

ADAPTIVE SUPPORT VENTILATION

Adaptive support ventilation (ASV) evolved as a form of mandatory minute ventilation implemented with adaptive pressure control. Mandatory minute ventilation is a mode that allows the operator to preset a target minute ventilation, and the ventilator then supplies mandatory breaths, either volume- or pressure-controlled, if the patient’s spontaneous breaths generate a lower minute ventilation.

ASV automatically selects the appropriate tidal volume and frequency for mandatory breaths and the appropriate tidal volume for spontaneous breaths on the basis of the respiratory system mechanics and target minute alveolar ventilation.

Described in 1994 by Laubscher et al,8,9 ASV became commercially available in 1998 in Europe and in 2007 in the United States (Hamilton Galileo ventilator, Hamilton Medical AG). This is the first commercially available ventilator that uses an “optimal” targeting scheme (see below).

What does adaptive support ventilation do?

ASV delivers pressure-controlled breaths using an adaptive (optimal) scheme (Table 2). “Optimal,” in this context, means minimizing the mechanical work of breathing: the machine selects a tidal volume and frequency that the patient’s brain would presumably select if the patient were not connected to a ventilator. This pattern is assumed to encourage the patient to generate spontaneous breaths.

The ventilator calculates the normal required minute ventilation based on the patient’s ideal weight and estimated dead space volume (ie, 2.2 mL/kg). This calculation represents 100% of minute ventilation. The clinician at the bedside sets a target percent of minute ventilation that the ventilator will support—higher than 100% if the patient has increased requirements due, eg, to sepsis or increased dead space, or less than 100% during weaning.

The ventilator initially delivers test breaths, in which it measures the expiratory time constant for the respiratory system and then uses this along with the estimated dead space and normal minute ventilation to calculate an optimal breathing frequency in terms of mechanical work.

The optimal or target tidal volume is calculated as the normal minute ventilation divided by the optimal frequency. The target tidal volume is achieved by the use of APC (see above) (Figure 2). This means that the pressure limit is automatically adjusted to achieve an average delivered tidal volume equal to the target. The ventilator continuously monitors the respiratory system mechanics and adjusts its settings accordingly.

The ventilator adjusts its breaths to avoid air trapping by allowing enough time to exhale, to avoid hypoventilation by delivering tidal volume greater than the dead space, and to avoid volutrauma by avoiding large tidal volumes.

Ventilator settings in adaptive support ventilation

Ventilator settings in ASV are:

  • Patient height (to calculate the ideal body weight)
  • Sex
  • Percent of normal predicted minute ventilation goal
  • Fio2
  • PEEP.

Clinical applications of adaptive support ventilation

ASV is intended as a sole mode of ventilation, from initial support to weaning.

Theoretical benefits of adaptive support ventilation

In theory, ASV offers automatic selection of ventilator settings, automatic adaptation to changing patient lung mechanics, less need for human manipulation of the machine, improved synchrony, and automatic weaning.

Evidence of benefit of adaptive support ventilation

Physiologic benefits. Ventilator settings are adjusted automatically. ASV selects different tidal volume-respiratory rate combinations based on respiratory mechanics in passive and paralyzed patients.10–12 In actively breathing patients, there was no difference in the ventilator settings chosen by ASV for different clinical scenarios (and lung physiology).10 Compared with pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation, with ASV, the inspiratory load is less and patient-ventilator interaction is better.13

Patient-ventilator synchrony and comfort have not been studied.

Outcomes. Two trials suggest that ASV may decrease time on mechanical ventilation.14,15 However, in another trial,16 compared with a standard protocol, ASV led to fewer ventilator adjustments but achieved similar postsurgical weaning outcomes. The effect of this mode on the death rate has not been examined.17,18

Adaptive support ventilation: Bottom line

ASV is the first commercially available mode that automatically selects all the ventilator settings except PEEP and Fio2. These seem appropriate for different clinical scenarios in patients with poor respiratory effort or in paralyzed patients. Evidence of the effect in actively breathing patients and on outcomes such as length of stay or death is still lacking.

PROPORTIONAL ASSIST VENTILATION

Patients who have normal respiratory drive but who have difficulty sustaining adequate spontaneous ventilation are often subjected to pressure support ventilation (PSV), in which the ventilator generates a constant pressure throughout inspiration regardless of the intensity of the patient’s effort.

In 1992, Younes and colleagues19,20 developed proportional assist ventilation (PAV) as an alternative in which the ventilator generates pressure in proportion to the patient’s effort. PAV became commercially available in Europe in 1999 and was approved in the United States in 2006, available on the Puritan Bennett 840 ventilator (Puritan Bennett Co, Boulder, CO). PAV has also been used for noninvasive ventilation, but this is not available in the United States.

Other names for proportional assist ventilation

Proportional Pressure Support (Dräger Medical; not yet available in the United States).

 

 

What does proportional assist ventilation do?

This mode delivers pressure-controlled breaths with a servo control scheme (Table 2).

To better understand PAV, we can compare it with PSV. With PSV, the pressure applied by the ventilator rises to a preset level that is held constant (a set-point scheme) until a cycling criterion (a percent of the maximum inspiratory flow value) is reached. The inspiratory flow and tidal volume are the result of the patient’s inspiratory effort, the level of pressure applied, and the respiratory system mechanics.

Figure 3. In proportional assist ventilation, the flow, pressure, and volume delivered are adjusted proportionally to the patient’s effort.
In contrast, during PAV, the pressure applied is a function of patient effort: the greater the inspiratory effort, the greater the increase in applied pressure (servo targeting scheme) (Figure 3). The operator sets the percentage of support to be delivered by the ventilator. The ventilator intermittently measures the compliance and resistance of the patient’s respiratory system and the instantaneous patient-generated flow and volume, and on the basis of these it delivers a proportional amount of inspiratory pressure.

In PAV, as in PSV, all breaths are spontaneous (Table 1). The patient controls the timing and size of the breath. There are no preset pressure, flow, or volume goals, but safety limits on the volume and pressure delivered can be set.

Ventilator settings in proportional assist ventilation

Ventilator settings in PAV are:

  • Airway type (endotracheal tube, tracheostomy)
  • Airway size (inner diameter)
  • Percentage of work supported (assist range 5%–95%)
  • Tidal volume limit
  • Pressure limit
  • Expiratory sensitivity (normally, as inspiration ends, flow should stop; this parameter tells the ventilator at what flow to end inspiration).

Caution when assessing the literature. Earlier ventilator versions, ie, Dräger and Manitoba (University of Manitoba, Winnipeg, MB, Canada), which are not available in the United States, required the repeated calculation of the respiratory system mechanics and the manual setting of flow and volume assists (amplification factors) independently. To overcome this limitation, new software automatically adjusts the flow and volume amplification to support the loads imposed by the automatically measured values of resistance and elastance (inverse of compliance) of the respiratory system.21 This software is included in the model (Puritan Bennett) available in the United States.

Clinical applications of proportional assist ventilation

The PAV mode is indicated for maximizing ventilator patient synchrony for assisted spontaneous ventilation.

PAV is contraindicated in patients with respiratory depression (bradypnea) or large air leaks (eg, bronchopleural fistulas). It should be used with caution in patients with severe hyperinflation, in which the patient may still be exhaling but the ventilator doesn’t recognize it. Another group in which PAV should be used with caution is those with high ventilatory drives, in which the ventilator overestimates respiratory system mechanics. This situation can lead to overassistance due to the “runaway phenomenon,” in which the ventilator continues to provide support even if the patient has stopped inspiration.22

Theoretical benefits of proportional assist ventilation

In theory, PAV should reduce the work of breathing, improve synchrony, automatically adapt to changing patient lung mechanics and effort, decrease the need for ventilator intervention and manipulation, decrease the need for sedation, and improve sleep.

Evidence of benefit of proportional assist ventilation

Physiologic benefits. PAV reduces the work of breathing better than PSV,21 even in the face of changing respiratory mechanics or increased respiratory demand (hypercapnia).23–25 The hemodynamic profile is similar to that in PSV. Tidal volumes are variable; however, in recent reports the tidal volumes were within the lung-protective range (6–8 mL/kg, plateau pressure < 30 cm H20).26,27

Comfort. PAV entails less patient effort and discomfort that PSV does.23,25 PAV significantly reduces asynchrony,27 which in turn may favorably affect sleep in critically ill patients. 28

Outcomes. The probability of spontaneous breathing without assistance was significantly better in critically ill patients ventilated with PAV than with PSV. No trial has reported the effect of PAV on deaths.27,29

Proportional assist ventilation: Bottom line

Extensive basic research has been done with PAV in different forms of respiratory failure, such as obstructive lung disease, acute respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), and chronic respiratory failure. It fulfills its main goal, which is to improve patient-ventilator synchrony. Clinical experience with PAV in the United States is limited, as it was only recently approved.

 

 

AIRWAY PRESSURE-RELEASE VENTILATION AND BIPHASIC POSITIVE AIRWAY PRESSURE

Airway pressure-release ventilation (APRV) was described in 1987 by Stock et al30 as a mode for delivering ventilation in acute lung injury while avoiding high airway pressures. APRV combines high constant positive airway pressure (improving oxygenation and promoting alveolar recruitment) with intermittent releases (causing exhalation).

Figure 4. Airway pressure-release ventilation (top) and biphasic positive airway pressure (bottom) are forms of pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation in which spontaneous breaths can occur at any point without altering the ventilator-delivered breaths. The difference is that the time spent in high pressure is greater in airway pressure-release ventilation.
In 1989, Baum et al31 described biphasic positive airway pressure ventilation as a mode in which spontaneous ventilation could be achieved at any point in the mechanical ventilation cycle—inspiration or exhalation (Figure 4). The goal was to allow unrestricted spontaneous breathing to reduce sedation and promote weaning. These modes are conceptually the same, the main difference being that the time spent in low pressure (Tlow; see below) is less than 1.5 seconds for APRV. Otherwise, they have identical characteristics, thus allowing any ventilator with the capability of delivering APRV to deliver biphasic positive airway pressure, and vice versa. Machines with these modes became commercially available in the mid 1990s.

Other names for biphasic positive airway pressure

Other names for biphasic positive airway pressure are:

  • BiLevel (Puritan Bennett)
  • BIPAP (Dräger Europe)
  • Bi Vent (Siemens)
  • BiPhasic (Avea, Cardinal Health, Inc, Dublin, OH)
  • PCV+ (Dräger Medical)
  • DuoPAP (Hamilton).

Caution—name confusion. In North America, BiPAP (Respironics, Murrysville, PA) and BiLevel are used to refer to noninvasive modes of ventilation.

APRV has no other name.

What do these modes do?

These modes deliver pressure-controlled, time-triggered, and time-cycled breaths using a set-point targeting scheme (Table 2). This means that the ventilator maintains a constant pressure (set point) even in the face of spontaneous breaths.

Caution—source of confusion. The term continuous positive airway pressure (CPAP) is often used to describe this mode. However, CPAP is pressure that is applied continuously at the same level; the patient generates all the work to maintain ventilation (“pressure-controlled continuous spontaneous ventilation” in the current nomenclature). In APRV, the airway pressure is intermittently released and reapplied, generating a tidal volume that supports ventilation. In other words, this is a pressure-controlled breath with a very prolonged inspiratory time and a short expiratory time in which spontaneous ventilation is possible at any point (“pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation” in the current nomenclature).

How these modes are set in the ventilator may also be a source of confusion. To describe the time spent in high and low airway pressures, we use the terms Thigh and Tlow, respectively. By convention, the difference between APRV and biphasic mode is the duration of Tlow (< 1.5 sec for APRV).

Similarly, Phigh and Plow are used to describe the high and low airway pressure. To better understand this concept, you can create the same mode in conventional pressure-control ventilation by thinking of the Thigh as the inspiratory time, the Tlow as the expiratory time, the Phigh as inspiratory pressure, and the Plow as PEEP.

Hence, APRV is an extreme form of inverse ratio ventilation, with an inspiration-to-expiration ratio of 4:1. This means a patient spends most of the time in Phigh and Thigh, and exhalations are short (Tlow and Plow). In contrast, the biphasic mode uses conventional inspiration-expiration ratios (Figure 4).

As with any form of pressure control, the tidal volume is generated by airway pressure rising above baseline (ie, the end-expiratory value). Hence, to ensure an increase in minute ventilation, the mandatory breath rate must be increased (ie, decreasing Thigh, Tlow, or both) or the tidal volume must be increased (ie, increasing the difference between Phigh and Plow). This means that in APRV the Tlow has to happen more often (by increasing the number of breaths) or be more prolonged (allowing more air to exhale). Because unrestricted spontaneous breaths are permitted at any point of the cycle, the patient contributes to the total minute ventilation (usually 10%–40%).

In APRV and biphasic mode, the operator’s set time and pressure in inspiration and expiration will be delivered regardless of the patient’s breathing efforts—the patient’s spontaneous breath does not trigger a mechanical breath. Some ventilators have automatic adjustments to improve the trigger synchrony.

Ventilator settings in APRV and biphasic mode

These modes require the setting of two pressure levels (Phigh and Plow) and two time durations (Thigh and Tlow). One can add pressure support or automatic tube compensation to assist spontaneous breaths. The difference in Tlow generates differences in the Thigh:Tlow ratio: APRV has a short Tlow (an inspiration-expiration ratio of 4:1). Biphasic mode has a conventional inspiration-expiration ratio of 1:1 to 1:4.

Clinical applications

APRV is used in acute lung injury and ARDS. This mode should be used with caution or not at all in patients with obstructive lung disease or inappropriately increased respiratory drive.32–35

Biphasic mode is intended for both ventilation and weaning. In a patient who has poor respiratory effort or who is paralyzed, biphasic is identical to pressure-control/continuous mandatory ventilation.

Theoretical benefits of APRV and biphasic mode

Multiple benefits have been ascribed to these modes. In theory, APRV will maximize and maintain alveolar recruitment, improve oxygenation, lower inflation pressures, and decrease overinflation. Both APRV and biphasic, by preserving spontaneous breathing, will improve ventilation-perfusion matching and gas diffusion, improve the hemodynamic profile (less need for vasopressors, higher cardiac output, reduced ventricular workload, improved organ perfusion), and improve synchrony (decrease the work of breathing and the need for sedation).

Evidence of benefit of APRV and biphasic mode

APRV and biphasic are different modes. However studies evaluating their effects are combined. This is in part the result of the nomenclature confusion and different practice in different countries.36

Physiologic benefits. In studies, spontaneous breaths contributed to 10% to 40% of minute ventilation,37,38 improved ventilation of dependent areas of the lung, improved ventilation-perfusion match and recruitment,39 and improved hemodynamic profile.40

Patient comfort. These modes are thought to decrease the need for analgesia and sedation,38 but a recent trial showed no difference with pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation.41 Patient ventilator synchrony and comfort have not been studied.32,42

Outcomes. In small trials, these modes made no difference in terms of deaths, but they may decrease the length of mechanical ventilation.38,41,43,44

APRV and biphasic mode: Bottom line

Maintaining spontaneous breathing while on mechanical ventilation has hemodynamic and ventilatory benefits.

APRV and biphasic mode are not the same thing. APRV’s main goal is to maximize mean airway pressure and, hence, lung recruitment, whereas the main goal of the biphasic mode is synchrony.

There is a plethora of ventilator settings and questions related to physiologic effects.33,34,36

Although these modes are widely used in some centers, there is no evidence yet that they are superior to conventional volume- or pressure-control ventilation with low tidal volume for ARDS and acute lung injury. There is no conclusive evidence that these modes improve synchrony, time to weaning, or patient comfort.

 

 

HIGH-FREQUENCY OSCILLATORY VENTILATION

High-frequency oscillatory ventilation (HFOV) was first described and patented in 1952 by Emerson and was clinically developed in the early 1970s by Lunkenheimer.45

The goal of HFOV is to minimize lung injury; its characteristics (discussed below) make it useful in patients with severe ARDS. The US Food and Drug Administration approved it for infants in 1991 and for children in 1995. The adult model has been available since 1993, but it was not approved until 2001 (SensorMedics 3100B, Cardinal Health, Inc).

Other names for high-frequency oscillatory ventilation

While HFOV has no alternative names, the following acronyms describe similar modes:

  • HFPPV (high-frequency positive pressure ventilation)
  • HFJV (high-frequency jet ventilation)
  • HFFI (high-frequency flow interruption)
  • HFPV (high-frequency percussive ventilation)
  • HFCWO (high-frequency chest wall oscillation).

All of these modes require different specialized ventilators.

What does high-frequency oscillatory ventilation do?

Conceptually, HFOV is a form of pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation with a set-point control scheme. In contrast to conventional pressure-controlled intermittent mandatory ventilation, in which relatively small spontaneous breaths may be superimposed on relatively large mandatory breaths, HFOV superimposes very small mandatory breaths (oscillations) on top of spontaneous breaths.

Figure 5. High-frequency oscillatory ventilation delivers very small mandatory breaths (oscillations) at frequencies of up to 900 breaths per minute.
HFOV can be delivered only with a special ventilator. The ventilator delivers a constant flow (bias flow), while a valve creates resistance to maintain airway pressure, on top of which a piston pump oscillates at frequencies of 3 to 15 Hz (160–900 breaths/minute). This creates a constant airway pressure with small oscillations (Figure 5); often, clinicians at the bedside look for the “chest wiggle” to assess the appropriate amplitude settings, although this has not been systematically studied.

Adult patients are usually paralyzed or deeply sedated, since deep spontaneous breathing will trigger alarms and affect ventilator performance.

To manage ventilation (CO2 clearance), one or several of the following maneuvers can be done: decrease the oscillation frequency, increase the amplitude of the oscillations, increase the inspiratory time, or increase bias flow (while allowing an endotracheal tube cuff leak). Oxygenation adjustments are controlled by manipulating the mean airway pressure and the Fio2.

Ventilator settings in high-frequency oscillatory ventilation

Ventilator settings in HFOV are46:

  • Airway pressure amplitude (delta P or power)
  • Mean airway pressure
  • Percent inspiration
  • Inspiratory bias flow
  • Fio2.

Clinical applications of high-frequency oscillatory ventilation

This mode is usually reserved for ARDS patients for whom conventional ventilation is failing. A recently published protocol46 suggests considering HFOV when there is oxygenation failure (Fio2 ≥ 0.7 and PEEP ≥ 14 cm H2O) or ventilation failure (pH < 7.25 with tidal volume ≥ 6 mL/kg predicted body weight and plateau airway pressure ≥ 30 cm H2O).

This mode is contraindicated when there is known severe airflow obstruction or intracranial hypertension.

Theoretical benefits of high-frequency oscillatory ventilation

Conceptually, HFOV can provide the highest mean airway pressure paired with the lowest tidal volume of any mode. These benefits might make HFOV the ideal lung-protective ventilation strategy.

Evidence of benefit of high-frequency oscillatory ventilation

Physiologic benefits. Animal models have shown less histologic damage and lung inflammation with HFOV than with high-tidal-volume conventional ventilation47,48 and low-tidal-volume conventional ventilation.49

Patient comfort has not been studied. However, current technology does impose undue work of breathing in spontaneously breathing patients.50

Outcomes. Several retrospective case series have described better oxygenation with HFOV as rescue therapy for severe ARDS than with conventional mechanical ventilation. Two randomized controlled trials have studied HFOV vs high-tidal-volume conventional mechanical ventilation for early severe ARDS; HFOV was safe but made no difference in terms of deaths.42,51–54

High-frequency oscillatory ventilation: Bottom line

In theory, HFOV provides all the benefits of an ideal lung-protective strategy, at least for paralyzed or deeply sedated patients. Animal studies support these concepts. In human adults, HFOV has been shown to be safe and to provide better oxygenation but no improvement in death rates compared with conventional mechanical ventilation. Currently, HFOV is better reserved for patients with severe ARDS for whom conventional mechanical ventilation is failing.

References
  1. Chatburn RL. Classification of ventilator modes: update and proposal for implementation. Respir Care 2007; 52:301323.
  2. Chatburn RL. Computer control of mechanical ventilation. Respir Care 2004; 49:507517.
  3. Alvarez A, Subirana M, Benito S. Decelerating flow ventilation effects in acute respiratory failure. J Crit Care 1998; 13:2125.
  4. Guldager H, Nielsen SL, Carl P, Soerensen MB. A comparison of volume control and pressure regulated volume control ventilation in acute respiratory failure. Crit Care 1997; 1:7577.
  5. Kallet RH, Campbell AR, Dicker RA, Katz JA, Mackersie RC. Work of breathing during lung protective ventilation in patients with acute lung injury and acute respiratory distress syndrome: a comparison between volume and pressure regulated breathing modes. Respir Care 2005; 50:16231631.
  6. Betensley AD, Khalid I, Crawford J, Pensler RA, DiGiovine B. Patient comfort during pressure support and volume controlled continuous mandatory ventilation. Respir Care 2008; 53:897902.
  7. Branson RD, Chatburn RL. Controversies in the critical care setting. Should adaptive pressure control modes be utilized for virtually all patients receiving mechanical ventilation? Respir Care 2007; 52:478485.
  8. Laubscher TP, Frutiger A, Fanconi S, Jutzi H, Brunner JX. Automatic selection of tidal volume, respiratory frequency and minute ventilation in intubated ICU patients as start up procedure for closed-loop controlled ventilation. Int J Clin Monit Comput 1994; 11:1930.
  9. Laubscher TP, Heinrichs W, Weiler N, Hartmann G, Brunner JX. An adaptive lung ventilation controller. IEEE Trans Biomed Eng 1994; 41:5159.
  10. Arnal JM, Wysocki M, Nafati C, et al. Automatic selection of breathing pattern using adaptive support ventilation. Intensive Care Med 2008; 34:7581.
  11. Campbell RS, Sinamban RP, Johannigman JA, et al. Clinical evaluation of a new closed loop ventilation mode: adaptive supportive ventilation (ASV). Crit Care 1999; 3( suppl 1):083.
  12. Belliato M, Palo A, Pasero D, Iotti GA, Mojoli F, Braschi A. Evaluation of adaptive support ventilation in paralysed patients and in a physical lung model. Int J Artif Organs 2004; 27:709716.
  13. Tassaux D, Dalmas E, Gratadour P, Jolliet P. Patient ventilator interactions during partial ventilatory support: a preliminary study comparing the effects of adaptive support ventilation with synchronized intermittent mandatory ventilation plus inspiratory pressure support. Crit Care Med 2002; 30:801807.
  14. Gruber PC, Gomersall CD, Leung P, et al. Randomized controlled trial comparing adaptive-support ventilation with pressure-regulated volume-controlled ventilation with automode in weaning patients after cardiac surgery. Anesthesiology 2008; 109:8187.
  15. Sulzer CF, Chiolero R, Chassot PG, et al. Adaptive support ventilation for fast tracheal extubation after cardiac surgery: a randomized controlled study. Anesthesiology 2001; 95:13391345.
  16. Petter AH, Chiolèro RL, Cassina T, Chassot PG, Müller XM, Revelly JP. Automatic “respirator/weaning” with adaptive support ventilation: the effect on duration of endotracheal intubation and patient management. Anesth Analg 2003; 97:17431750.
  17. Brunner JX, Iotti GA. Adaptive support ventilation (ASV). Minerva Anestesiol 2002; 68:365368.
  18. Campbell RS, Branson RD, Johannigman JA. Adaptive support ventilation. Respir Care Clin North Am 2001; 7:425440.
  19. Younes M. Proportional assist ventilation, a new approach to ventilatory support. Theory. Am Rev Respir Dis 1992; 145:114120.
  20. Younes M, Puddy A, Roberts D, et al. Proportional assist ventilation. Results of an initial clinical trial. Am Rev Respir Dis 1992; 145:121129.
  21. Kondili E, Prinianakis G, Alexopoulou C, Vakouti E, Klimathianaki M, Georgopoulos D. Respiratory load compensation during mechanical ventilatio—proportional assist ventilation with load-adjustable gain factors versus pressure support. Intensive Care Med 2006; 32:692699.
  22. Kondili E, Prinianakis G, Alexopoulou C, Vakouti E, Klimathianaki M, Georgopoulos D. Effect of different levels of pressure support and proportional assist ventilation on breathing pattern, work of breathing and gas exchange in mechanically ventilated hypercapnic COPD patients with acute respiratory failure. Respiration 2003; 70:355361.
  23. Grasso S, Puntillo F, Mascia L, et al. Compensation for increase in respiratory workload during mechanical ventilation. Pressure support versus proportional assist ventilation. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2000; 161:819826.
  24. Wrigge H, Golisch W, Zinserling J, Sydow M, Almeling G, Burchardi H. Proportional assist versus pressure support ventilation: effects on breathing pattern and respiratory work of patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Intensive Care Med 1999; 25:790798.
  25. Ranieri VM, Giuliani R, Mascia L, et al. Patient ventilator interaction during acute hypercapnia: pressure support vs. proportional assist ventilation. J Appl Physiol 1996; 81:426436.
  26. Kondili E, Xirouchaki N, Vaporidi K, Klimathianaki M, Georgopoulos D. Short-term cardiorespiratory effects of proportional assist and pressure support ventilation in patients with acute lung injury/acute respiratory distress syndrome. Anesthesiology 2006; 105:703708.
  27. Xirouchaki N, Kondili E, Vaporidi K, et al. Proportional assist ventilation with load-adjustable gain factors in critically ill patients: comparison with pressure support. Intensive Care Med 2008; 34:20262034.
  28. Bosma K, Ferreyra G, Ambrogio C, et al. Patient ventilator interaction and sleep in mechanically ventilated patients: pressure support versus proportional assist ventilation. Crit Care Med 2007; 35:10481054.
  29. Sinderby C, Beck J. Proportional assist ventilation and neurally adjusted ventilatory assist—better approaches to patient ventilator synchrony? Clin Chest Med 2008; 29:329342.
  30. Stock MC, Downs JB, Frolicher DA. Airway pressure release ventilation. Crit Care Med 1987; 15:462466.
  31. Baum M, Benzer H, Putensen C, Koller W, Putz G. [Biphasic positive airway pressure (BIPAP)—a new form of augmented ventilation]. Anaesthesist 1989; 38:452458.
  32. Seymour CW, Frazer M, Reilly PM, Fuchs BD. Airway pressure release and biphasic intermittent positive airway pressure ventilation: are they ready for prime time? J Trauma 2007; 62:12981308.
  33. Myers TR, MacIntyre NR. Respiratory controversies in the critical care setting. Does airway pressure release ventilation offer important new advantages in mechanical ventilator support? Respir Care 2007; 52:452458.
  34. Neumann P, Golisch W, Strohmeyer A, Buscher H, Burchardi H, Sydow M. Influence of different release times on spontaneous breathing pattern during airway pressure release ventilation. Intensive Care Med 2002; 28:17421749.
  35. Calzia E, Lindner KH, Witt S, et al. Pressure-time product and work of breathing during biphasic continuous positive airway pressure and assisted spontaneous breathing. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 1994; 150:904910.
  36. Rose L, Hawkins M. Airway pressure release ventilation and biphasic positive airway pressure: a systematic review of definitional criteria. Intensive Care Med 2008; 34:17661773.
  37. Sydow M, Burchardi H, Ephraim E, Zielmann S, Crozier TA. Longterm effects of two different ventilatory modes on oxygenation in acute lung injury. Comparison of airway pressure release ventilation and volume-controlled inverse ratio ventilation. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 1994; 149:15501556.
  38. Putensen C, Zech S, Wrigge H, et al. Long-term effects of spontaneous breathing during ventilatory support in patients with acute lung injury. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2001; 164:4349.
  39. Davis K, Johnson DJ, Branson RD, Campbell RS, Johannigman JA, Porembka D. Airway pressure release ventilation. Arch Surg 1993; 128:13481352.
  40. Kaplan LJ, Bailey H, Formosa V. Airway pressure release ventilation increases cardiac performance in patients with acute lung injury/adult respiratory distress syndrome. Crit Care 2001; 5:221226.
  41. Varpula T, Valta P, Niemi R, Takkunen O, Hynynen M, Pettilä VV. Airway pressure release ventilation as a primary ventilatory mode in acute respiratory distress syndrome. Acta Anaesthesiol Scand 2004; 48:722731.
  42. Siau C, Stewart TE. Current role of high frequency oscillatory ventilation and airway pressure release ventilation in acute lung injury and acute respiratory distress syndrome. Clin Chest Med 2008; 29:265275.
  43. Rathgeber J, Schorn B, Falk V, Kazmaier S, Spiegel T, Burchardi H. The influence of controlled mandatory ventilation (CMV), intermittent mandatory ventilation (IMV) and biphasic intermittent positive airway pressure (BIPAP) on duration of intubation and consumption of analgesics and sedatives. A prospective analysis in 596 patients following adult cardiac surgery. Eur J Anaesthesiol 1997; 14:576582.
  44. Habashi NM. Other approaches to open lung ventilation: airway pressure release ventilation. Crit Care Med 2005; 33 suppl 3:S228S240.
  45. Hess D, Mason S, Branson R. High-frequency ventilation design and equipment issues. Respir Care Clin North Am 2001; 7:577598.
  46. Fessler HE, Derdak S, Ferguson ND, et al. A protocol for high frequency oscillatory ventilation in adults: results from a roundtable discussion. Crit Care Med 2007; 35:16491654.
  47. Hamilton PP, Onayemi A, Smyth JA, et al. Comparison of conventional and high-frequency ventilation: oxygenation and lung pathology. J Appl Physiol 1983; 55:131138.
  48. Sedeek KA, Takeuchi M, Suchodolski K, et al. Open-lung protective ventilation with pressure control ventilation, high-frequency oscillation, and intratracheal pulmonary ventilation results in similar gas exchange, hemodynamics, and lung mechanics. Anesthesiology 2003; 99:11021111.
  49. Imai Y, Nakagawa S, Ito Y, Kawano T, Slutsky AS, Miyasaka K. Comparison of lung protection strategies using conventional and high-frequency oscillatory ventilation. J Appl Physiol 2001; 91:18361844.
  50. van Heerde M, Roubik K, Kopelent V, Plötz FB, Markhorst DG. Unloading work of breathing during high-frequency oscillatory ventilation: a bench study. Crit Care 2006; 10:R103.
  51. Derdak S, Mehta S, Stewart TE, et al., Multicenter Oscillatory Ventilation For Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome Trial (MOAT) Study Investigators. High-frequency oscillatory ventilation for acute respiratory distress syndrome in adults: a randomized, controlled trial. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2002; 166:801808.
  52. Bollen CW, van Well GT, Sherry T, et al. High-frequency oscillatory ventilation compared with conventional mechanical ventilation in adult respiratory distress syndrome: a randomized controlled trial [ISRCTN24242669]. Crit Care 2005; 9:R430R439.
  53. Mehta S, Granton J, MacDonald RJ, et al. High frequency oscillatory ventilation in adults: the Toronto experience. Chest 2004; 126:518527.
  54. Chan KP, Stewart TE, Mehta S. High-frequency oscillatory ventilation for adult patients with ARDS. Chest 2007; 131:19071916.
References
  1. Chatburn RL. Classification of ventilator modes: update and proposal for implementation. Respir Care 2007; 52:301323.
  2. Chatburn RL. Computer control of mechanical ventilation. Respir Care 2004; 49:507517.
  3. Alvarez A, Subirana M, Benito S. Decelerating flow ventilation effects in acute respiratory failure. J Crit Care 1998; 13:2125.
  4. Guldager H, Nielsen SL, Carl P, Soerensen MB. A comparison of volume control and pressure regulated volume control ventilation in acute respiratory failure. Crit Care 1997; 1:7577.
  5. Kallet RH, Campbell AR, Dicker RA, Katz JA, Mackersie RC. Work of breathing during lung protective ventilation in patients with acute lung injury and acute respiratory distress syndrome: a comparison between volume and pressure regulated breathing modes. Respir Care 2005; 50:16231631.
  6. Betensley AD, Khalid I, Crawford J, Pensler RA, DiGiovine B. Patient comfort during pressure support and volume controlled continuous mandatory ventilation. Respir Care 2008; 53:897902.
  7. Branson RD, Chatburn RL. Controversies in the critical care setting. Should adaptive pressure control modes be utilized for virtually all patients receiving mechanical ventilation? Respir Care 2007; 52:478485.
  8. Laubscher TP, Frutiger A, Fanconi S, Jutzi H, Brunner JX. Automatic selection of tidal volume, respiratory frequency and minute ventilation in intubated ICU patients as start up procedure for closed-loop controlled ventilation. Int J Clin Monit Comput 1994; 11:1930.
  9. Laubscher TP, Heinrichs W, Weiler N, Hartmann G, Brunner JX. An adaptive lung ventilation controller. IEEE Trans Biomed Eng 1994; 41:5159.
  10. Arnal JM, Wysocki M, Nafati C, et al. Automatic selection of breathing pattern using adaptive support ventilation. Intensive Care Med 2008; 34:7581.
  11. Campbell RS, Sinamban RP, Johannigman JA, et al. Clinical evaluation of a new closed loop ventilation mode: adaptive supportive ventilation (ASV). Crit Care 1999; 3( suppl 1):083.
  12. Belliato M, Palo A, Pasero D, Iotti GA, Mojoli F, Braschi A. Evaluation of adaptive support ventilation in paralysed patients and in a physical lung model. Int J Artif Organs 2004; 27:709716.
  13. Tassaux D, Dalmas E, Gratadour P, Jolliet P. Patient ventilator interactions during partial ventilatory support: a preliminary study comparing the effects of adaptive support ventilation with synchronized intermittent mandatory ventilation plus inspiratory pressure support. Crit Care Med 2002; 30:801807.
  14. Gruber PC, Gomersall CD, Leung P, et al. Randomized controlled trial comparing adaptive-support ventilation with pressure-regulated volume-controlled ventilation with automode in weaning patients after cardiac surgery. Anesthesiology 2008; 109:8187.
  15. Sulzer CF, Chiolero R, Chassot PG, et al. Adaptive support ventilation for fast tracheal extubation after cardiac surgery: a randomized controlled study. Anesthesiology 2001; 95:13391345.
  16. Petter AH, Chiolèro RL, Cassina T, Chassot PG, Müller XM, Revelly JP. Automatic “respirator/weaning” with adaptive support ventilation: the effect on duration of endotracheal intubation and patient management. Anesth Analg 2003; 97:17431750.
  17. Brunner JX, Iotti GA. Adaptive support ventilation (ASV). Minerva Anestesiol 2002; 68:365368.
  18. Campbell RS, Branson RD, Johannigman JA. Adaptive support ventilation. Respir Care Clin North Am 2001; 7:425440.
  19. Younes M. Proportional assist ventilation, a new approach to ventilatory support. Theory. Am Rev Respir Dis 1992; 145:114120.
  20. Younes M, Puddy A, Roberts D, et al. Proportional assist ventilation. Results of an initial clinical trial. Am Rev Respir Dis 1992; 145:121129.
  21. Kondili E, Prinianakis G, Alexopoulou C, Vakouti E, Klimathianaki M, Georgopoulos D. Respiratory load compensation during mechanical ventilatio—proportional assist ventilation with load-adjustable gain factors versus pressure support. Intensive Care Med 2006; 32:692699.
  22. Kondili E, Prinianakis G, Alexopoulou C, Vakouti E, Klimathianaki M, Georgopoulos D. Effect of different levels of pressure support and proportional assist ventilation on breathing pattern, work of breathing and gas exchange in mechanically ventilated hypercapnic COPD patients with acute respiratory failure. Respiration 2003; 70:355361.
  23. Grasso S, Puntillo F, Mascia L, et al. Compensation for increase in respiratory workload during mechanical ventilation. Pressure support versus proportional assist ventilation. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2000; 161:819826.
  24. Wrigge H, Golisch W, Zinserling J, Sydow M, Almeling G, Burchardi H. Proportional assist versus pressure support ventilation: effects on breathing pattern and respiratory work of patients with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Intensive Care Med 1999; 25:790798.
  25. Ranieri VM, Giuliani R, Mascia L, et al. Patient ventilator interaction during acute hypercapnia: pressure support vs. proportional assist ventilation. J Appl Physiol 1996; 81:426436.
  26. Kondili E, Xirouchaki N, Vaporidi K, Klimathianaki M, Georgopoulos D. Short-term cardiorespiratory effects of proportional assist and pressure support ventilation in patients with acute lung injury/acute respiratory distress syndrome. Anesthesiology 2006; 105:703708.
  27. Xirouchaki N, Kondili E, Vaporidi K, et al. Proportional assist ventilation with load-adjustable gain factors in critically ill patients: comparison with pressure support. Intensive Care Med 2008; 34:20262034.
  28. Bosma K, Ferreyra G, Ambrogio C, et al. Patient ventilator interaction and sleep in mechanically ventilated patients: pressure support versus proportional assist ventilation. Crit Care Med 2007; 35:10481054.
  29. Sinderby C, Beck J. Proportional assist ventilation and neurally adjusted ventilatory assist—better approaches to patient ventilator synchrony? Clin Chest Med 2008; 29:329342.
  30. Stock MC, Downs JB, Frolicher DA. Airway pressure release ventilation. Crit Care Med 1987; 15:462466.
  31. Baum M, Benzer H, Putensen C, Koller W, Putz G. [Biphasic positive airway pressure (BIPAP)—a new form of augmented ventilation]. Anaesthesist 1989; 38:452458.
  32. Seymour CW, Frazer M, Reilly PM, Fuchs BD. Airway pressure release and biphasic intermittent positive airway pressure ventilation: are they ready for prime time? J Trauma 2007; 62:12981308.
  33. Myers TR, MacIntyre NR. Respiratory controversies in the critical care setting. Does airway pressure release ventilation offer important new advantages in mechanical ventilator support? Respir Care 2007; 52:452458.
  34. Neumann P, Golisch W, Strohmeyer A, Buscher H, Burchardi H, Sydow M. Influence of different release times on spontaneous breathing pattern during airway pressure release ventilation. Intensive Care Med 2002; 28:17421749.
  35. Calzia E, Lindner KH, Witt S, et al. Pressure-time product and work of breathing during biphasic continuous positive airway pressure and assisted spontaneous breathing. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 1994; 150:904910.
  36. Rose L, Hawkins M. Airway pressure release ventilation and biphasic positive airway pressure: a systematic review of definitional criteria. Intensive Care Med 2008; 34:17661773.
  37. Sydow M, Burchardi H, Ephraim E, Zielmann S, Crozier TA. Longterm effects of two different ventilatory modes on oxygenation in acute lung injury. Comparison of airway pressure release ventilation and volume-controlled inverse ratio ventilation. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 1994; 149:15501556.
  38. Putensen C, Zech S, Wrigge H, et al. Long-term effects of spontaneous breathing during ventilatory support in patients with acute lung injury. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2001; 164:4349.
  39. Davis K, Johnson DJ, Branson RD, Campbell RS, Johannigman JA, Porembka D. Airway pressure release ventilation. Arch Surg 1993; 128:13481352.
  40. Kaplan LJ, Bailey H, Formosa V. Airway pressure release ventilation increases cardiac performance in patients with acute lung injury/adult respiratory distress syndrome. Crit Care 2001; 5:221226.
  41. Varpula T, Valta P, Niemi R, Takkunen O, Hynynen M, Pettilä VV. Airway pressure release ventilation as a primary ventilatory mode in acute respiratory distress syndrome. Acta Anaesthesiol Scand 2004; 48:722731.
  42. Siau C, Stewart TE. Current role of high frequency oscillatory ventilation and airway pressure release ventilation in acute lung injury and acute respiratory distress syndrome. Clin Chest Med 2008; 29:265275.
  43. Rathgeber J, Schorn B, Falk V, Kazmaier S, Spiegel T, Burchardi H. The influence of controlled mandatory ventilation (CMV), intermittent mandatory ventilation (IMV) and biphasic intermittent positive airway pressure (BIPAP) on duration of intubation and consumption of analgesics and sedatives. A prospective analysis in 596 patients following adult cardiac surgery. Eur J Anaesthesiol 1997; 14:576582.
  44. Habashi NM. Other approaches to open lung ventilation: airway pressure release ventilation. Crit Care Med 2005; 33 suppl 3:S228S240.
  45. Hess D, Mason S, Branson R. High-frequency ventilation design and equipment issues. Respir Care Clin North Am 2001; 7:577598.
  46. Fessler HE, Derdak S, Ferguson ND, et al. A protocol for high frequency oscillatory ventilation in adults: results from a roundtable discussion. Crit Care Med 2007; 35:16491654.
  47. Hamilton PP, Onayemi A, Smyth JA, et al. Comparison of conventional and high-frequency ventilation: oxygenation and lung pathology. J Appl Physiol 1983; 55:131138.
  48. Sedeek KA, Takeuchi M, Suchodolski K, et al. Open-lung protective ventilation with pressure control ventilation, high-frequency oscillation, and intratracheal pulmonary ventilation results in similar gas exchange, hemodynamics, and lung mechanics. Anesthesiology 2003; 99:11021111.
  49. Imai Y, Nakagawa S, Ito Y, Kawano T, Slutsky AS, Miyasaka K. Comparison of lung protection strategies using conventional and high-frequency oscillatory ventilation. J Appl Physiol 2001; 91:18361844.
  50. van Heerde M, Roubik K, Kopelent V, Plötz FB, Markhorst DG. Unloading work of breathing during high-frequency oscillatory ventilation: a bench study. Crit Care 2006; 10:R103.
  51. Derdak S, Mehta S, Stewart TE, et al., Multicenter Oscillatory Ventilation For Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome Trial (MOAT) Study Investigators. High-frequency oscillatory ventilation for acute respiratory distress syndrome in adults: a randomized, controlled trial. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2002; 166:801808.
  52. Bollen CW, van Well GT, Sherry T, et al. High-frequency oscillatory ventilation compared with conventional mechanical ventilation in adult respiratory distress syndrome: a randomized controlled trial [ISRCTN24242669]. Crit Care 2005; 9:R430R439.
  53. Mehta S, Granton J, MacDonald RJ, et al. High frequency oscillatory ventilation in adults: the Toronto experience. Chest 2004; 126:518527.
  54. Chan KP, Stewart TE, Mehta S. High-frequency oscillatory ventilation for adult patients with ARDS. Chest 2007; 131:19071916.
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 76(7)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 76(7)
Page Number
417-430
Page Number
417-430
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Alternative modes of mechanical ventilation: A review for the hospitalist
Display Headline
Alternative modes of mechanical ventilation: A review for the hospitalist
Sections
Inside the Article

KEY POINTS

  • The alternative modes of ventilation were developed to prevent lung injury and asynchrony, promote better oxygenation and faster weaning, and be easier to use. However, evidence of their benefit is scant.
  • Until now, we have lacked a standard nomenclature for mechanical ventilation, leading to confusion.
  • Regardless of the mode used, the goals are to avoid lung injury, keep the patient comfortable, and wean the patient from mechanical ventilation as soon as possible.
Disallow All Ads
Alternative CME
Article PDF Media

A 48-year-old man with uncontrolled diabetes

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 05/03/2022 - 16:03
Display Headline
A 48-year-old man with uncontrolled diabetes

A 48-year-old white man who has had diabetes mellitus for 6 years presents to the outpatient clinic because his blood sugar levels have been rising for the past week.

Both his parents had diabetes, and at the time of his diagnosis he weighed 278 pounds, all of which supported a diagnosis of type 2 diabetes mellitus. His disease was initially managed with diet, exercise, and metformin (Glucophage). Four months later, with weight loss and exercise, his blood sugar levels were consistently under 100 mg/dL, and metformin was discontinued.

He did well until 1 week ago, when he noted polyuria, polydipsia, and rising fingerstick glucose values, higher than 200 mg/dL. He has been eating well, with no nausea, vomiting, or symptoms of dehydration. He denies having any fever, chills, cough, nasal congestion, chest pain, abdominal pain, or dysuria.

In addition to his type 2 diabetes, he has hypertension, for which he takes losartan (Cozaar); hyperlipidemia, for which he takes atorvastatin (Lipitor); and gout, for which he takes allopurinol (Zyloprim).

His blood pressure is 148/70 mm Hg, pulse 100, and weight 273 pounds, and he is afebrile. On examination, his skin, head, eyes, ears, nose, throat, lungs, heart, and abdomen are normal. Urinalysis in the clinic shows large amounts of glucose and ketones.

WHAT IS THE LEAST LIKELY CAUSE OF HIS POOR CONTROL?

1. Which of the following is the least likely cause of his poorly controlled diabetes?

  • Occult infection
  • Poor adherence to diet and exercise
  • Diabetic ketoacidosis
  • Pancreatitis

Until 1 week ago, this patient’s diabetes had been well controlled for several years. Pancreatitis is the least likely cause of his uncontrolled diabetes, because he has no history of pancreatitis and has none of the symptoms of acute pancreatitis (fever, vomiting, or severe midepigastric pain radiating into the back).

Poor adherence to medication and lifestyle issues are very common in patients with poorly controlled diabetes and should always be included in the differential diagnosis.

Occult infection should also be considered in a patient with uncontrolled diabetes. Although this patient had no symptoms or signs of infection, urinalysis was done to look for an occult urinary tract infection and, surprisingly, it showed a large amount of ketones.

Case continued: He is treated for diabetic ketoacidosis

Additional testing (Table 1) confirms he has a high serum ketone level and acidosis with a high anion gap, consistent with diabetic ketoacidosis. Blood cultures are negative. He is admitted to the hospital and treated with intravenous fluids and an insulin drip at 6 units/hour. Within 48 hours his anion gap normalizes, and he is discharged on a regimen of insulin glargine (Lantus) and insulin lispro (Humalog). A fasting C-peptide level drawn 7 days after his presentation is 1.9 ng/dL (normal 0.8–3.2 ng/dL).

Diabetic ketoacidosis in ‘atypical diabetes’

Diabetic ketoacidosis is one of the most serious complications of diabetes. Many patients present with nausea, vomiting, and abdominal pain. Dehydration is often present because hyperglycemia leads to glucosuria and volume depletion. Interestingly, our patient showed none of these symptoms or signs.

Diabetic ketoacidosis is increasingly being recognized as a complication in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus.1–4 Since the mid-1990s, clinicians have become increasingly aware of a condition variably termed “atypical diabetes,” “Flatbush diabetes,” “diabetes type 1B,” and “ketosis-prone type 2 diabetes mellitus,” in which patients, usually obese, present with diabetic ketoacidosis as their first manifestation, but are subsequently found to have type 2 diabetes mellitus. These patients typically are African American or of African, Hispanic, or Caribbean descent.

Ketoacidosis results from transient suppression of beta-cell function, the cause of which is unknown. A recent study comparing patients who have type 2 diabetes mellitus with and without diabetic ketoacidosis presenting with decompensated diabetes suggested insulinopenia was the predominant mechanism.5 For many of these patients, insulinopenia is transient: as the ketoacidosis resolves, betacell function improves and, with adequate insulin, lipolysis is reduced.

 

 

WHAT CAUSES DIABETIC KETOACIDOSIS?

2. Which of the following hormonal changes underlies the development of diabetic ketoacidosis?

  • Insulin resistance
  • Insulin deficiency
  • Glucagon excess
  • Glucagon deficiency
  • Insulin deficiency and glucagon excess
  • Insulin deficiency and glucagon deficiency

Diabetic ketoacidosis can occur when there is too much glucagon and not enough insulin. Insulin lowers the serum glucose level by promoting glucose uptake in peripheral tissues and by inhibiting gluconeogenesis and glycogenolysis in the liver. Insulin is also anabolic: it inhibits lipolysis in adipocytes and thus decreases the amount of substrate for ketogenesis.

Glucagon is the primary counterregulatory hormone responsible for ketogenesis.6 In the presence of glucagon excess, malonyl CoA production decreases, causing unblocking of carnitine acyltransferase I (CAT I) and allowing beta-oxidation to occur.6

Therefore, the sequence initiating ketogenesis begins with a shift in the ratio of glucagon to insulin, so that there is a relative or absolute excess of glucagon and a deficiency of insulin. A deficiency of insulin accelerates lipolysis, providing more substrate for ketogenesis, while excess glucagon turns on the oxidative sequence for fatty acids in the liver.

Three ketone bodies are produced in diabetic ketoacidosis: two ketoacids (beta-hydroxybutyric acid and acetoacetic acid), and one neutral ketone (acetone). The concentration of insulin required to suppress lipolysis is only one-tenth of that required to promote glucose utilization.7 Diabetic ketoacidosis is uncommon in patients with type 2 diabetes because they typically have enough insulin to inhibit lipolysis (and therefore ketoacid formation) but not enough to promote glucose utilization.

RISK FACTORS FOR DIABETIC KETOACIDOSIS

3. Which of the following is not a risk factor for diabetic ketoacidosis in type 2 diabetes mellitus?

  • Acute illness
  • Age > 65
  • Inadequate insulin doses
  • Antipsychotic drugs
  • Ethnicity

Diabetic ketoacidosis is often precipitated by an acute illness such as an infection, cerebrovascular accident, myocardial infarction, or acute pancreatitis.8–12 These acute illnesses induce stress in the body and elevate counterregulatory hormones.

Inadequate insulin doses can also lead to diabetic ketoacidosis.

Drugs that affect carbohydrate metabolism are also risk factors. These include glucocorticoids, thiazide diuretics in high doses (> 50 mg daily), sympathomimetic agents, and second-generation antipsychotic agents (also called “atypical” antipsychotics) such as clozapine (Clozaril) and olanzapine (Zyprexa), although some are worse than others.13,14

Ketosis-prone type 2 diabetes mellitus is more prevalent in African Americans and Hispanics.8,15,16

Age is not a risk factor for developing diabetic ketoacidosis. In fact, diabetic ketoacidosis is the leading cause of morbidity and death in children with type 1 diabetes and can also occur in children with type 2 diabetes, particularly in obese African American adolescents.2

DISTINGUISHING TYPE 1 FROM TYPE 2

4. Which of the following is most specific in distinguishing type 1 from type 2 diabetes mellitus?

  • C-peptide levels
  • Islet cell antibodies
  • Body mass index
  • Family history
  • Hemoglobin A1c level

Type 1 diabetes is characterized by destruction of pancreatic beta cells, leading to absolute insulin deficiency. The process is usually mediated by autoimmunity; therefore, testing for antibodies to islet cells, glutamic acid decarboxylase, insulin, and tyrosine phosphatase is the most specific way to distinguish type 1 from type 2 diabetes mellitus.

The hemoglobin A1c level correlates with the mean blood glucose level over the previous 8 to 12 weeks. The hemoglobin A1c is typically elevated in both type 1 and type 2 diabetes mellitus and therefore is not a useful distinguishing feature.

C-peptide is made when proinsulin is cleaved into insulin and C-peptide. It is released from endocytic vesicles with insulin in a one-to-one molar ratio. Thus, the level of C-peptide in the blood can show how much insulin is being made by the pancreas. C-peptide levels can help distinguish between type 1 and type 2 diabetes mellitus later in the course of the disease (levels are usually lower in a patient with type 1 diabetes), but they are not as useful early on because they can be normal early in the course of type 1 diabetes.17

A family history of diabetes is more common in type 2 diabetes, but patients with either type 1 or type 2 can have an affected close relative.

Patients with type 2 diabetes are generally overweight, with a body mass index greater than the 85th percentile for their age and sex. In contrast, patients with type 1 diabetes are usually not overweight and often have a recent history of weight loss. There are exceptions, however, and some patients with type 1 diabetes have an elevated body mass index, while some patients with type 2 diabetes are thin.

Although individually, C-peptide, family history, and body mass index are not very specific in distinguishing type 1 from type 2 diabetes mellitus, together they often give the clinician a good idea of the type of diabetes the patient has. In our case, although islet cell antibodies were not drawn, the normal C-peptide level, high body mass index, and family history all support a diagnosis of type 2 diabetes mellitus.

 

 

THE PATIENT CONTINUES TO DO WELL

The patient is discharged from the hospital on an insulin regimen. His blood sugar levels are closely monitored and remain near normal. Six months after the episode of diabetic ketoacidosis, his insulin is discontinued.

TAKE-HOME POINTS

Diabetic ketoacidosis is not unique to type 1 diabetes mellitus. It can occur in type 2, more commonly in patients who are nonwhite and who have precipitating factors such as acute illness, inadequate insulin treatment, or newly diagnosed diabetes. Clinicians should be aware of the possibility of diabetic ketoacidosis even in patients with type 2 diabetes who may not have these risk factors.

One approach to recognizing diabetic ketoacidosis better in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus would include checking urine for ketones and serum electrolytes for high anion gap acidosis when patients with type 2 diabetes present with uncontrolled blood sugar levels. If ketonuria or acidosis is present, serum ketone and beta-hydroxybutyrate levels should be obtained to evaluate for diabetic ketoacidosis.

Patients should take insulin for an indeterminate period of time after initial treatment of diabetic ketoacidosis. As our case illustrates, in many cases, beta-cell function will return sufficiently to allow insulin to be discontinued. There are no clear guidelines for how long to continue insulin, but most practitioners continue it for weeks to months and discontinue it when glucose levels are stable and remain so with tapering doses. Sometimes oral agents need to be added as insulin is tapered.

Insulin therapy is tailored to the individual patient on the basis of blood glucose values. There are no data on which type of insulin is the most effective, and there are no data on whether these patients are at greater risk of hypoglycemia than other patients taking insulin. In general, there is no evidence that “prophylactic” insulin (ie, giving insulin to prevent diabetic ketoacidosis during times of illness or stress) is required. However, blood glucose monitoring is appropriate during infection or stress, and if hyperglycemia occurs in these situations, insulin use is prudent to reduce the risks of recurrent diabetic ketoacidosis.

References
  1. Umpierrez GE, Casals MM, Gebhart SP, Mixon PS, Clark WS, Phillips LS. Diabetic ketoacidosis in obese African-Americans. Diabetes 1995; 44:790795.
  2. Valabhji J, Watson M, Cox J, Poulter C, Elwig C, Elkeles RS. Type 2 diabetes presenting as diabetic ketacidosis in adolescence. Diabet Med 2003; 20:416417.
  3. Westphal SA. The occurrence of diabetic ketoacidosis in non-insulin-dependent diabetes and newly diagnosed diabetic adults. Am J Med 1996; 101:1924.
  4. Welch B, Zib I. Case study: diabetic ketoacidosis in type 2 diabetes: “look under the sheets.” Clin Diabetes 2004; 22:198200.
  5. Linfoot P, Bergstrom C, Ipp E. Pathophysiology of ketoacidosis in type 2 diabetes mellitus. Diabet Med 2005; 22:14141419.
  6. Foster DW, McGarry JD. The regulation of ketogenesis. Ciba Found Symp 1982; 87:120131.
  7. Zierler KL, Rabinowitz D. Effect of very small concentrations of insulin on forearm metabolism: persistence of its action on potassium and free fatty acids without its effect on glucose. J Clin Invest 1964; 43:950962.
  8. Newton CA, Raskin P. Diabetic ketoacidosis in type 1 and type 2 diabetes mellitus: clinical and biochemical differences. Arch Intern Med 2004; 164:19251931.
  9. Umpierrez GE, Kelly JP, Navarrete JE, Casals MM, Kitabchi AE. Hyperglycemic crises in urban blacks. Arch Intern Med 1997; 157:669675.
  10. Jabbour SA, Miller JL. Uncontrolled diabetes mellitus. Clin Lab Med 2001; 21:99110.
  11. Ennis ED, Kreisberg RA. Diabetic ketoacidosis and the hyperglycemic hyperosmolar syndrome. In: Leroith D, Taylor SI, Olefsky JM, editors. Diabetes Mellitus. Lippincott-Raven Publishers; Philadelphia, 1996:276286.
  12. Case CC, Maldonado M. Diabetic ketoacidosis associated with Metabolife: a report of two cases. Diabetes Obes Metab 2002; 4:402406.
  13. Kitabchi AE, Umpierrez GE, Murphy MB. Diabetic ketoacidosis and hyperglycemic hyperosmolar state. In:DeFronzo RA, Ferrannini E, Keen H, Zimmet P, editors. International Textbook of Diabetes Mellitus, 3rd ed. John Wiley and Sons, Ltd: Chichester, UK, 2004:11011119.
  14. Newcomer JW. Second generation (atypical) antipsychotics and metabolic effects: a comprehensive literature review. CNS Drugs 2005; 19( suppl 1):193.
  15. Balasubramanyam A, Zern JW, Hyman DJ, Pavlik V. New profiles of diabetic ketoacidosis: type 1 vs. type 2 diabetes and the effect of ethnicity. Arch Intern Med 1999; 159:23172322.
  16. Davis SN, Umpierrez GE. Diabetic ketoacidosis in type 2 diabetes mellitus—pathophsyiology and clinical presentation. Nat Clin Pract Endocrinol Metab 2007; 3:730731.
  17. Hoogwerf B, Rich S, Barbosa J. Meal-stimulated Cpeptide and insulin antibodies in type I diabetic subjects and their nondiabetic siblings characterized by HLA-DR antigens. Diabetes 1985; 34:440445.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Mengjun Hu, BS
Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland

J. Harry Isaacson, MD
Department of General Internal Medicine, Cleveland Clinic

Address: J. Harry Isaacson, MD, General Internal Medicine, A91, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; e-mail isaacsj@ccf.org

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 76(7)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
413-416
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Mengjun Hu, BS
Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland

J. Harry Isaacson, MD
Department of General Internal Medicine, Cleveland Clinic

Address: J. Harry Isaacson, MD, General Internal Medicine, A91, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; e-mail isaacsj@ccf.org

Author and Disclosure Information

Mengjun Hu, BS
Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland

J. Harry Isaacson, MD
Department of General Internal Medicine, Cleveland Clinic

Address: J. Harry Isaacson, MD, General Internal Medicine, A91, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; e-mail isaacsj@ccf.org

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

A 48-year-old white man who has had diabetes mellitus for 6 years presents to the outpatient clinic because his blood sugar levels have been rising for the past week.

Both his parents had diabetes, and at the time of his diagnosis he weighed 278 pounds, all of which supported a diagnosis of type 2 diabetes mellitus. His disease was initially managed with diet, exercise, and metformin (Glucophage). Four months later, with weight loss and exercise, his blood sugar levels were consistently under 100 mg/dL, and metformin was discontinued.

He did well until 1 week ago, when he noted polyuria, polydipsia, and rising fingerstick glucose values, higher than 200 mg/dL. He has been eating well, with no nausea, vomiting, or symptoms of dehydration. He denies having any fever, chills, cough, nasal congestion, chest pain, abdominal pain, or dysuria.

In addition to his type 2 diabetes, he has hypertension, for which he takes losartan (Cozaar); hyperlipidemia, for which he takes atorvastatin (Lipitor); and gout, for which he takes allopurinol (Zyloprim).

His blood pressure is 148/70 mm Hg, pulse 100, and weight 273 pounds, and he is afebrile. On examination, his skin, head, eyes, ears, nose, throat, lungs, heart, and abdomen are normal. Urinalysis in the clinic shows large amounts of glucose and ketones.

WHAT IS THE LEAST LIKELY CAUSE OF HIS POOR CONTROL?

1. Which of the following is the least likely cause of his poorly controlled diabetes?

  • Occult infection
  • Poor adherence to diet and exercise
  • Diabetic ketoacidosis
  • Pancreatitis

Until 1 week ago, this patient’s diabetes had been well controlled for several years. Pancreatitis is the least likely cause of his uncontrolled diabetes, because he has no history of pancreatitis and has none of the symptoms of acute pancreatitis (fever, vomiting, or severe midepigastric pain radiating into the back).

Poor adherence to medication and lifestyle issues are very common in patients with poorly controlled diabetes and should always be included in the differential diagnosis.

Occult infection should also be considered in a patient with uncontrolled diabetes. Although this patient had no symptoms or signs of infection, urinalysis was done to look for an occult urinary tract infection and, surprisingly, it showed a large amount of ketones.

Case continued: He is treated for diabetic ketoacidosis

Additional testing (Table 1) confirms he has a high serum ketone level and acidosis with a high anion gap, consistent with diabetic ketoacidosis. Blood cultures are negative. He is admitted to the hospital and treated with intravenous fluids and an insulin drip at 6 units/hour. Within 48 hours his anion gap normalizes, and he is discharged on a regimen of insulin glargine (Lantus) and insulin lispro (Humalog). A fasting C-peptide level drawn 7 days after his presentation is 1.9 ng/dL (normal 0.8–3.2 ng/dL).

Diabetic ketoacidosis in ‘atypical diabetes’

Diabetic ketoacidosis is one of the most serious complications of diabetes. Many patients present with nausea, vomiting, and abdominal pain. Dehydration is often present because hyperglycemia leads to glucosuria and volume depletion. Interestingly, our patient showed none of these symptoms or signs.

Diabetic ketoacidosis is increasingly being recognized as a complication in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus.1–4 Since the mid-1990s, clinicians have become increasingly aware of a condition variably termed “atypical diabetes,” “Flatbush diabetes,” “diabetes type 1B,” and “ketosis-prone type 2 diabetes mellitus,” in which patients, usually obese, present with diabetic ketoacidosis as their first manifestation, but are subsequently found to have type 2 diabetes mellitus. These patients typically are African American or of African, Hispanic, or Caribbean descent.

Ketoacidosis results from transient suppression of beta-cell function, the cause of which is unknown. A recent study comparing patients who have type 2 diabetes mellitus with and without diabetic ketoacidosis presenting with decompensated diabetes suggested insulinopenia was the predominant mechanism.5 For many of these patients, insulinopenia is transient: as the ketoacidosis resolves, betacell function improves and, with adequate insulin, lipolysis is reduced.

 

 

WHAT CAUSES DIABETIC KETOACIDOSIS?

2. Which of the following hormonal changes underlies the development of diabetic ketoacidosis?

  • Insulin resistance
  • Insulin deficiency
  • Glucagon excess
  • Glucagon deficiency
  • Insulin deficiency and glucagon excess
  • Insulin deficiency and glucagon deficiency

Diabetic ketoacidosis can occur when there is too much glucagon and not enough insulin. Insulin lowers the serum glucose level by promoting glucose uptake in peripheral tissues and by inhibiting gluconeogenesis and glycogenolysis in the liver. Insulin is also anabolic: it inhibits lipolysis in adipocytes and thus decreases the amount of substrate for ketogenesis.

Glucagon is the primary counterregulatory hormone responsible for ketogenesis.6 In the presence of glucagon excess, malonyl CoA production decreases, causing unblocking of carnitine acyltransferase I (CAT I) and allowing beta-oxidation to occur.6

Therefore, the sequence initiating ketogenesis begins with a shift in the ratio of glucagon to insulin, so that there is a relative or absolute excess of glucagon and a deficiency of insulin. A deficiency of insulin accelerates lipolysis, providing more substrate for ketogenesis, while excess glucagon turns on the oxidative sequence for fatty acids in the liver.

Three ketone bodies are produced in diabetic ketoacidosis: two ketoacids (beta-hydroxybutyric acid and acetoacetic acid), and one neutral ketone (acetone). The concentration of insulin required to suppress lipolysis is only one-tenth of that required to promote glucose utilization.7 Diabetic ketoacidosis is uncommon in patients with type 2 diabetes because they typically have enough insulin to inhibit lipolysis (and therefore ketoacid formation) but not enough to promote glucose utilization.

RISK FACTORS FOR DIABETIC KETOACIDOSIS

3. Which of the following is not a risk factor for diabetic ketoacidosis in type 2 diabetes mellitus?

  • Acute illness
  • Age > 65
  • Inadequate insulin doses
  • Antipsychotic drugs
  • Ethnicity

Diabetic ketoacidosis is often precipitated by an acute illness such as an infection, cerebrovascular accident, myocardial infarction, or acute pancreatitis.8–12 These acute illnesses induce stress in the body and elevate counterregulatory hormones.

Inadequate insulin doses can also lead to diabetic ketoacidosis.

Drugs that affect carbohydrate metabolism are also risk factors. These include glucocorticoids, thiazide diuretics in high doses (> 50 mg daily), sympathomimetic agents, and second-generation antipsychotic agents (also called “atypical” antipsychotics) such as clozapine (Clozaril) and olanzapine (Zyprexa), although some are worse than others.13,14

Ketosis-prone type 2 diabetes mellitus is more prevalent in African Americans and Hispanics.8,15,16

Age is not a risk factor for developing diabetic ketoacidosis. In fact, diabetic ketoacidosis is the leading cause of morbidity and death in children with type 1 diabetes and can also occur in children with type 2 diabetes, particularly in obese African American adolescents.2

DISTINGUISHING TYPE 1 FROM TYPE 2

4. Which of the following is most specific in distinguishing type 1 from type 2 diabetes mellitus?

  • C-peptide levels
  • Islet cell antibodies
  • Body mass index
  • Family history
  • Hemoglobin A1c level

Type 1 diabetes is characterized by destruction of pancreatic beta cells, leading to absolute insulin deficiency. The process is usually mediated by autoimmunity; therefore, testing for antibodies to islet cells, glutamic acid decarboxylase, insulin, and tyrosine phosphatase is the most specific way to distinguish type 1 from type 2 diabetes mellitus.

The hemoglobin A1c level correlates with the mean blood glucose level over the previous 8 to 12 weeks. The hemoglobin A1c is typically elevated in both type 1 and type 2 diabetes mellitus and therefore is not a useful distinguishing feature.

C-peptide is made when proinsulin is cleaved into insulin and C-peptide. It is released from endocytic vesicles with insulin in a one-to-one molar ratio. Thus, the level of C-peptide in the blood can show how much insulin is being made by the pancreas. C-peptide levels can help distinguish between type 1 and type 2 diabetes mellitus later in the course of the disease (levels are usually lower in a patient with type 1 diabetes), but they are not as useful early on because they can be normal early in the course of type 1 diabetes.17

A family history of diabetes is more common in type 2 diabetes, but patients with either type 1 or type 2 can have an affected close relative.

Patients with type 2 diabetes are generally overweight, with a body mass index greater than the 85th percentile for their age and sex. In contrast, patients with type 1 diabetes are usually not overweight and often have a recent history of weight loss. There are exceptions, however, and some patients with type 1 diabetes have an elevated body mass index, while some patients with type 2 diabetes are thin.

Although individually, C-peptide, family history, and body mass index are not very specific in distinguishing type 1 from type 2 diabetes mellitus, together they often give the clinician a good idea of the type of diabetes the patient has. In our case, although islet cell antibodies were not drawn, the normal C-peptide level, high body mass index, and family history all support a diagnosis of type 2 diabetes mellitus.

 

 

THE PATIENT CONTINUES TO DO WELL

The patient is discharged from the hospital on an insulin regimen. His blood sugar levels are closely monitored and remain near normal. Six months after the episode of diabetic ketoacidosis, his insulin is discontinued.

TAKE-HOME POINTS

Diabetic ketoacidosis is not unique to type 1 diabetes mellitus. It can occur in type 2, more commonly in patients who are nonwhite and who have precipitating factors such as acute illness, inadequate insulin treatment, or newly diagnosed diabetes. Clinicians should be aware of the possibility of diabetic ketoacidosis even in patients with type 2 diabetes who may not have these risk factors.

One approach to recognizing diabetic ketoacidosis better in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus would include checking urine for ketones and serum electrolytes for high anion gap acidosis when patients with type 2 diabetes present with uncontrolled blood sugar levels. If ketonuria or acidosis is present, serum ketone and beta-hydroxybutyrate levels should be obtained to evaluate for diabetic ketoacidosis.

Patients should take insulin for an indeterminate period of time after initial treatment of diabetic ketoacidosis. As our case illustrates, in many cases, beta-cell function will return sufficiently to allow insulin to be discontinued. There are no clear guidelines for how long to continue insulin, but most practitioners continue it for weeks to months and discontinue it when glucose levels are stable and remain so with tapering doses. Sometimes oral agents need to be added as insulin is tapered.

Insulin therapy is tailored to the individual patient on the basis of blood glucose values. There are no data on which type of insulin is the most effective, and there are no data on whether these patients are at greater risk of hypoglycemia than other patients taking insulin. In general, there is no evidence that “prophylactic” insulin (ie, giving insulin to prevent diabetic ketoacidosis during times of illness or stress) is required. However, blood glucose monitoring is appropriate during infection or stress, and if hyperglycemia occurs in these situations, insulin use is prudent to reduce the risks of recurrent diabetic ketoacidosis.

A 48-year-old white man who has had diabetes mellitus for 6 years presents to the outpatient clinic because his blood sugar levels have been rising for the past week.

Both his parents had diabetes, and at the time of his diagnosis he weighed 278 pounds, all of which supported a diagnosis of type 2 diabetes mellitus. His disease was initially managed with diet, exercise, and metformin (Glucophage). Four months later, with weight loss and exercise, his blood sugar levels were consistently under 100 mg/dL, and metformin was discontinued.

He did well until 1 week ago, when he noted polyuria, polydipsia, and rising fingerstick glucose values, higher than 200 mg/dL. He has been eating well, with no nausea, vomiting, or symptoms of dehydration. He denies having any fever, chills, cough, nasal congestion, chest pain, abdominal pain, or dysuria.

In addition to his type 2 diabetes, he has hypertension, for which he takes losartan (Cozaar); hyperlipidemia, for which he takes atorvastatin (Lipitor); and gout, for which he takes allopurinol (Zyloprim).

His blood pressure is 148/70 mm Hg, pulse 100, and weight 273 pounds, and he is afebrile. On examination, his skin, head, eyes, ears, nose, throat, lungs, heart, and abdomen are normal. Urinalysis in the clinic shows large amounts of glucose and ketones.

WHAT IS THE LEAST LIKELY CAUSE OF HIS POOR CONTROL?

1. Which of the following is the least likely cause of his poorly controlled diabetes?

  • Occult infection
  • Poor adherence to diet and exercise
  • Diabetic ketoacidosis
  • Pancreatitis

Until 1 week ago, this patient’s diabetes had been well controlled for several years. Pancreatitis is the least likely cause of his uncontrolled diabetes, because he has no history of pancreatitis and has none of the symptoms of acute pancreatitis (fever, vomiting, or severe midepigastric pain radiating into the back).

Poor adherence to medication and lifestyle issues are very common in patients with poorly controlled diabetes and should always be included in the differential diagnosis.

Occult infection should also be considered in a patient with uncontrolled diabetes. Although this patient had no symptoms or signs of infection, urinalysis was done to look for an occult urinary tract infection and, surprisingly, it showed a large amount of ketones.

Case continued: He is treated for diabetic ketoacidosis

Additional testing (Table 1) confirms he has a high serum ketone level and acidosis with a high anion gap, consistent with diabetic ketoacidosis. Blood cultures are negative. He is admitted to the hospital and treated with intravenous fluids and an insulin drip at 6 units/hour. Within 48 hours his anion gap normalizes, and he is discharged on a regimen of insulin glargine (Lantus) and insulin lispro (Humalog). A fasting C-peptide level drawn 7 days after his presentation is 1.9 ng/dL (normal 0.8–3.2 ng/dL).

Diabetic ketoacidosis in ‘atypical diabetes’

Diabetic ketoacidosis is one of the most serious complications of diabetes. Many patients present with nausea, vomiting, and abdominal pain. Dehydration is often present because hyperglycemia leads to glucosuria and volume depletion. Interestingly, our patient showed none of these symptoms or signs.

Diabetic ketoacidosis is increasingly being recognized as a complication in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus.1–4 Since the mid-1990s, clinicians have become increasingly aware of a condition variably termed “atypical diabetes,” “Flatbush diabetes,” “diabetes type 1B,” and “ketosis-prone type 2 diabetes mellitus,” in which patients, usually obese, present with diabetic ketoacidosis as their first manifestation, but are subsequently found to have type 2 diabetes mellitus. These patients typically are African American or of African, Hispanic, or Caribbean descent.

Ketoacidosis results from transient suppression of beta-cell function, the cause of which is unknown. A recent study comparing patients who have type 2 diabetes mellitus with and without diabetic ketoacidosis presenting with decompensated diabetes suggested insulinopenia was the predominant mechanism.5 For many of these patients, insulinopenia is transient: as the ketoacidosis resolves, betacell function improves and, with adequate insulin, lipolysis is reduced.

 

 

WHAT CAUSES DIABETIC KETOACIDOSIS?

2. Which of the following hormonal changes underlies the development of diabetic ketoacidosis?

  • Insulin resistance
  • Insulin deficiency
  • Glucagon excess
  • Glucagon deficiency
  • Insulin deficiency and glucagon excess
  • Insulin deficiency and glucagon deficiency

Diabetic ketoacidosis can occur when there is too much glucagon and not enough insulin. Insulin lowers the serum glucose level by promoting glucose uptake in peripheral tissues and by inhibiting gluconeogenesis and glycogenolysis in the liver. Insulin is also anabolic: it inhibits lipolysis in adipocytes and thus decreases the amount of substrate for ketogenesis.

Glucagon is the primary counterregulatory hormone responsible for ketogenesis.6 In the presence of glucagon excess, malonyl CoA production decreases, causing unblocking of carnitine acyltransferase I (CAT I) and allowing beta-oxidation to occur.6

Therefore, the sequence initiating ketogenesis begins with a shift in the ratio of glucagon to insulin, so that there is a relative or absolute excess of glucagon and a deficiency of insulin. A deficiency of insulin accelerates lipolysis, providing more substrate for ketogenesis, while excess glucagon turns on the oxidative sequence for fatty acids in the liver.

Three ketone bodies are produced in diabetic ketoacidosis: two ketoacids (beta-hydroxybutyric acid and acetoacetic acid), and one neutral ketone (acetone). The concentration of insulin required to suppress lipolysis is only one-tenth of that required to promote glucose utilization.7 Diabetic ketoacidosis is uncommon in patients with type 2 diabetes because they typically have enough insulin to inhibit lipolysis (and therefore ketoacid formation) but not enough to promote glucose utilization.

RISK FACTORS FOR DIABETIC KETOACIDOSIS

3. Which of the following is not a risk factor for diabetic ketoacidosis in type 2 diabetes mellitus?

  • Acute illness
  • Age > 65
  • Inadequate insulin doses
  • Antipsychotic drugs
  • Ethnicity

Diabetic ketoacidosis is often precipitated by an acute illness such as an infection, cerebrovascular accident, myocardial infarction, or acute pancreatitis.8–12 These acute illnesses induce stress in the body and elevate counterregulatory hormones.

Inadequate insulin doses can also lead to diabetic ketoacidosis.

Drugs that affect carbohydrate metabolism are also risk factors. These include glucocorticoids, thiazide diuretics in high doses (> 50 mg daily), sympathomimetic agents, and second-generation antipsychotic agents (also called “atypical” antipsychotics) such as clozapine (Clozaril) and olanzapine (Zyprexa), although some are worse than others.13,14

Ketosis-prone type 2 diabetes mellitus is more prevalent in African Americans and Hispanics.8,15,16

Age is not a risk factor for developing diabetic ketoacidosis. In fact, diabetic ketoacidosis is the leading cause of morbidity and death in children with type 1 diabetes and can also occur in children with type 2 diabetes, particularly in obese African American adolescents.2

DISTINGUISHING TYPE 1 FROM TYPE 2

4. Which of the following is most specific in distinguishing type 1 from type 2 diabetes mellitus?

  • C-peptide levels
  • Islet cell antibodies
  • Body mass index
  • Family history
  • Hemoglobin A1c level

Type 1 diabetes is characterized by destruction of pancreatic beta cells, leading to absolute insulin deficiency. The process is usually mediated by autoimmunity; therefore, testing for antibodies to islet cells, glutamic acid decarboxylase, insulin, and tyrosine phosphatase is the most specific way to distinguish type 1 from type 2 diabetes mellitus.

The hemoglobin A1c level correlates with the mean blood glucose level over the previous 8 to 12 weeks. The hemoglobin A1c is typically elevated in both type 1 and type 2 diabetes mellitus and therefore is not a useful distinguishing feature.

C-peptide is made when proinsulin is cleaved into insulin and C-peptide. It is released from endocytic vesicles with insulin in a one-to-one molar ratio. Thus, the level of C-peptide in the blood can show how much insulin is being made by the pancreas. C-peptide levels can help distinguish between type 1 and type 2 diabetes mellitus later in the course of the disease (levels are usually lower in a patient with type 1 diabetes), but they are not as useful early on because they can be normal early in the course of type 1 diabetes.17

A family history of diabetes is more common in type 2 diabetes, but patients with either type 1 or type 2 can have an affected close relative.

Patients with type 2 diabetes are generally overweight, with a body mass index greater than the 85th percentile for their age and sex. In contrast, patients with type 1 diabetes are usually not overweight and often have a recent history of weight loss. There are exceptions, however, and some patients with type 1 diabetes have an elevated body mass index, while some patients with type 2 diabetes are thin.

Although individually, C-peptide, family history, and body mass index are not very specific in distinguishing type 1 from type 2 diabetes mellitus, together they often give the clinician a good idea of the type of diabetes the patient has. In our case, although islet cell antibodies were not drawn, the normal C-peptide level, high body mass index, and family history all support a diagnosis of type 2 diabetes mellitus.

 

 

THE PATIENT CONTINUES TO DO WELL

The patient is discharged from the hospital on an insulin regimen. His blood sugar levels are closely monitored and remain near normal. Six months after the episode of diabetic ketoacidosis, his insulin is discontinued.

TAKE-HOME POINTS

Diabetic ketoacidosis is not unique to type 1 diabetes mellitus. It can occur in type 2, more commonly in patients who are nonwhite and who have precipitating factors such as acute illness, inadequate insulin treatment, or newly diagnosed diabetes. Clinicians should be aware of the possibility of diabetic ketoacidosis even in patients with type 2 diabetes who may not have these risk factors.

One approach to recognizing diabetic ketoacidosis better in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus would include checking urine for ketones and serum electrolytes for high anion gap acidosis when patients with type 2 diabetes present with uncontrolled blood sugar levels. If ketonuria or acidosis is present, serum ketone and beta-hydroxybutyrate levels should be obtained to evaluate for diabetic ketoacidosis.

Patients should take insulin for an indeterminate period of time after initial treatment of diabetic ketoacidosis. As our case illustrates, in many cases, beta-cell function will return sufficiently to allow insulin to be discontinued. There are no clear guidelines for how long to continue insulin, but most practitioners continue it for weeks to months and discontinue it when glucose levels are stable and remain so with tapering doses. Sometimes oral agents need to be added as insulin is tapered.

Insulin therapy is tailored to the individual patient on the basis of blood glucose values. There are no data on which type of insulin is the most effective, and there are no data on whether these patients are at greater risk of hypoglycemia than other patients taking insulin. In general, there is no evidence that “prophylactic” insulin (ie, giving insulin to prevent diabetic ketoacidosis during times of illness or stress) is required. However, blood glucose monitoring is appropriate during infection or stress, and if hyperglycemia occurs in these situations, insulin use is prudent to reduce the risks of recurrent diabetic ketoacidosis.

References
  1. Umpierrez GE, Casals MM, Gebhart SP, Mixon PS, Clark WS, Phillips LS. Diabetic ketoacidosis in obese African-Americans. Diabetes 1995; 44:790795.
  2. Valabhji J, Watson M, Cox J, Poulter C, Elwig C, Elkeles RS. Type 2 diabetes presenting as diabetic ketacidosis in adolescence. Diabet Med 2003; 20:416417.
  3. Westphal SA. The occurrence of diabetic ketoacidosis in non-insulin-dependent diabetes and newly diagnosed diabetic adults. Am J Med 1996; 101:1924.
  4. Welch B, Zib I. Case study: diabetic ketoacidosis in type 2 diabetes: “look under the sheets.” Clin Diabetes 2004; 22:198200.
  5. Linfoot P, Bergstrom C, Ipp E. Pathophysiology of ketoacidosis in type 2 diabetes mellitus. Diabet Med 2005; 22:14141419.
  6. Foster DW, McGarry JD. The regulation of ketogenesis. Ciba Found Symp 1982; 87:120131.
  7. Zierler KL, Rabinowitz D. Effect of very small concentrations of insulin on forearm metabolism: persistence of its action on potassium and free fatty acids without its effect on glucose. J Clin Invest 1964; 43:950962.
  8. Newton CA, Raskin P. Diabetic ketoacidosis in type 1 and type 2 diabetes mellitus: clinical and biochemical differences. Arch Intern Med 2004; 164:19251931.
  9. Umpierrez GE, Kelly JP, Navarrete JE, Casals MM, Kitabchi AE. Hyperglycemic crises in urban blacks. Arch Intern Med 1997; 157:669675.
  10. Jabbour SA, Miller JL. Uncontrolled diabetes mellitus. Clin Lab Med 2001; 21:99110.
  11. Ennis ED, Kreisberg RA. Diabetic ketoacidosis and the hyperglycemic hyperosmolar syndrome. In: Leroith D, Taylor SI, Olefsky JM, editors. Diabetes Mellitus. Lippincott-Raven Publishers; Philadelphia, 1996:276286.
  12. Case CC, Maldonado M. Diabetic ketoacidosis associated with Metabolife: a report of two cases. Diabetes Obes Metab 2002; 4:402406.
  13. Kitabchi AE, Umpierrez GE, Murphy MB. Diabetic ketoacidosis and hyperglycemic hyperosmolar state. In:DeFronzo RA, Ferrannini E, Keen H, Zimmet P, editors. International Textbook of Diabetes Mellitus, 3rd ed. John Wiley and Sons, Ltd: Chichester, UK, 2004:11011119.
  14. Newcomer JW. Second generation (atypical) antipsychotics and metabolic effects: a comprehensive literature review. CNS Drugs 2005; 19( suppl 1):193.
  15. Balasubramanyam A, Zern JW, Hyman DJ, Pavlik V. New profiles of diabetic ketoacidosis: type 1 vs. type 2 diabetes and the effect of ethnicity. Arch Intern Med 1999; 159:23172322.
  16. Davis SN, Umpierrez GE. Diabetic ketoacidosis in type 2 diabetes mellitus—pathophsyiology and clinical presentation. Nat Clin Pract Endocrinol Metab 2007; 3:730731.
  17. Hoogwerf B, Rich S, Barbosa J. Meal-stimulated Cpeptide and insulin antibodies in type I diabetic subjects and their nondiabetic siblings characterized by HLA-DR antigens. Diabetes 1985; 34:440445.
References
  1. Umpierrez GE, Casals MM, Gebhart SP, Mixon PS, Clark WS, Phillips LS. Diabetic ketoacidosis in obese African-Americans. Diabetes 1995; 44:790795.
  2. Valabhji J, Watson M, Cox J, Poulter C, Elwig C, Elkeles RS. Type 2 diabetes presenting as diabetic ketacidosis in adolescence. Diabet Med 2003; 20:416417.
  3. Westphal SA. The occurrence of diabetic ketoacidosis in non-insulin-dependent diabetes and newly diagnosed diabetic adults. Am J Med 1996; 101:1924.
  4. Welch B, Zib I. Case study: diabetic ketoacidosis in type 2 diabetes: “look under the sheets.” Clin Diabetes 2004; 22:198200.
  5. Linfoot P, Bergstrom C, Ipp E. Pathophysiology of ketoacidosis in type 2 diabetes mellitus. Diabet Med 2005; 22:14141419.
  6. Foster DW, McGarry JD. The regulation of ketogenesis. Ciba Found Symp 1982; 87:120131.
  7. Zierler KL, Rabinowitz D. Effect of very small concentrations of insulin on forearm metabolism: persistence of its action on potassium and free fatty acids without its effect on glucose. J Clin Invest 1964; 43:950962.
  8. Newton CA, Raskin P. Diabetic ketoacidosis in type 1 and type 2 diabetes mellitus: clinical and biochemical differences. Arch Intern Med 2004; 164:19251931.
  9. Umpierrez GE, Kelly JP, Navarrete JE, Casals MM, Kitabchi AE. Hyperglycemic crises in urban blacks. Arch Intern Med 1997; 157:669675.
  10. Jabbour SA, Miller JL. Uncontrolled diabetes mellitus. Clin Lab Med 2001; 21:99110.
  11. Ennis ED, Kreisberg RA. Diabetic ketoacidosis and the hyperglycemic hyperosmolar syndrome. In: Leroith D, Taylor SI, Olefsky JM, editors. Diabetes Mellitus. Lippincott-Raven Publishers; Philadelphia, 1996:276286.
  12. Case CC, Maldonado M. Diabetic ketoacidosis associated with Metabolife: a report of two cases. Diabetes Obes Metab 2002; 4:402406.
  13. Kitabchi AE, Umpierrez GE, Murphy MB. Diabetic ketoacidosis and hyperglycemic hyperosmolar state. In:DeFronzo RA, Ferrannini E, Keen H, Zimmet P, editors. International Textbook of Diabetes Mellitus, 3rd ed. John Wiley and Sons, Ltd: Chichester, UK, 2004:11011119.
  14. Newcomer JW. Second generation (atypical) antipsychotics and metabolic effects: a comprehensive literature review. CNS Drugs 2005; 19( suppl 1):193.
  15. Balasubramanyam A, Zern JW, Hyman DJ, Pavlik V. New profiles of diabetic ketoacidosis: type 1 vs. type 2 diabetes and the effect of ethnicity. Arch Intern Med 1999; 159:23172322.
  16. Davis SN, Umpierrez GE. Diabetic ketoacidosis in type 2 diabetes mellitus—pathophsyiology and clinical presentation. Nat Clin Pract Endocrinol Metab 2007; 3:730731.
  17. Hoogwerf B, Rich S, Barbosa J. Meal-stimulated Cpeptide and insulin antibodies in type I diabetic subjects and their nondiabetic siblings characterized by HLA-DR antigens. Diabetes 1985; 34:440445.
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 76(7)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 76(7)
Page Number
413-416
Page Number
413-416
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
A 48-year-old man with uncontrolled diabetes
Display Headline
A 48-year-old man with uncontrolled diabetes
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Alternative CME
Article PDF Media

Painful eye with a facial rash

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 03/05/2018 - 08:54
Display Headline
Painful eye with a facial rash

A 75-year-old man presents 4 days after painful cutaneous lesions appeared on the left side of his face, associated with severe ocular pain. Two days before the eruption, he had had an intense headache, which was diagnosed as a tension headache and was treated with oral acetaminophen (Tylenol), but with no improvement.

Figure 1. Typical vesicular rash affects the first trigeminal branch dermatome without trespassing the midline.
He has a history of hypertension and hyperuricemia. No recent changes have been made in his medications. Physical examination shows grouped herpetiform vesicles on an erythematous base confined to the cutaneous surface and innervated by the left first trigeminal branch (Figure 1). Palpation detects regional preauricular and submaxillary lymphadenopathies.

Figure 2. Typical corneal fluorescein stain of dendritic keratitis under cobalt blue light.
Ophthalmologic examination with fluorescein stain shows moderate perilimbal injection and dendritic keratitis (Figure 2).

The remainder of his physical examination is normal. Laboratory tests, including red and white blood cell counts, hemoglobin, and basic metabolic and coagulation tests reveal no abnormalities.

Q: What is your diagnosis?

  • Allergic contact dermatitis
  • Herpes simplex
  • Varicella
  • Ramsay-Hunt syndrome
  • Herpes zoster ophthalmicus and herpetic keratitis

A: Herpes zoster ophthalmicus is the correct diagnosis. It represents a reactivation of the varicella zoster virus.1

Varicella zoster virus, like others of the herpes family, has developed a complex control of virus-host interactions to ensure its survival in humans. It lies dormant in the sensory ganglia and, when reactivated, moves down the neurons and satellite cells along the sensory axons to the skin.1 The reactivation is related to diminished cell-mediated immunity, which occurs as a physiologic part of aging, which is why the elderly tend to be the most often affected. 2 The incidence of herpes zoster varies from 2.2 to 3.4 per 1,000 people per year.3 Its incidence in people over age 80 is about 10 per 1,000 people per year.3

CLINICAL PRESENTATION

Herpes zoster typically presents as a dermatome-grouped vesicular eruption over an erythematous base, accompanied or preceded by local pain. It has two main complications, postherpetic neuralgia and ocular involvement. Postherpetic neuralgia is neuropathic pain that persists or develops after the dermatomal rash has healed.4 Independent predictors of postherpetic neuralgia are older age, severe acute pain, severe rash, a shorter duration of rash before consultation, and ocular involvement.5 It occurs in 36.6% of patients over age 60, and in 47.5% over 70.6 Persistent postherpetic neuralgia has been linked to suicide in patients over 70.7

Ocular infection occurs with involvement of the ophthalmic division of the fifth cranial nerve. Before the antiviral era, it was seen in as many as 50% of patients.8 Hutchinson’s sign is skin lesions on the tip, side, or root of the nose and is an important predictor of ocular involvement.1 Lesions may include folliculopapillar conjunctivitis, episcleritis, scleritis, keratitis (dendritic, pseudodendritic, and interstitial), uveitis, and necrotizing retinitis.

 

 

DIAGNOSIS

The diagnosis of herpes zoster is usually based on clinical observation of the characteristic rash, although viral culture and molecular techniques are available when definitive diagnosis is required. When ophthalmic division is affected and Hutchinson’s sign, unexplained ocular redness with pain, or complaints of visual problems are present, the patient should be referred promptly to an ophthalmologist, because serious visual impairment can occur. The fluorescein dye may show no staining or the typical dendritic keratitis (Figure 2).

TREATMENT

Oral antiviral drugs have made the treatment of zoster possible when, effectively, no treatment existed before. Ideally, an antiviral should be given within 72 hours of symptom onset. Starting treatment as early as possible—especially within 72 hours of onset—has been shown to be effective in alleviating acute pain and in preventing or limiting the duration and severity of postherpetic neuralgia.3

Acyclovir (Zovirax) 800 mg five times a day for 7 days or one of its derivatives—eg, famciclovir (Famvir), penciclovir (Denavir), or valacyclovir (Valtrex)—has been shown to be safe and effective in the treatment of active disease, as well as in preventing or shortening the duration of postherpetic neuralgia.3 It has also been shown to reduce the rate of eye involvement from 50% to 20% or 30%.9 This is why all patients with this dermatomal involvement must be treated.

Second-generation antivirals

Valacyclovir 1,000 mg three times a day and famciclovir 500 mg three times a day seem to be as effective as acyclovir in reducing zoster-associated pain, but their efficacy in reducing eye involvement has not been studied. In clinical practice, however, these second-generation antivirals may be more effective than acyclovir because patients are more likely to comply with the treatment regimen of three rather than five daily doses.

Other considerations

In patients with kidney failure, the non-nephrotoxic antiviral brivudine is preferred, but it is not available in the United States. Therefore, one must use acyclovir or one of the other drugs, carefully adjusting the dose according to the creatinine clearance and making sure the patient is well hydrated.

The efficacy of antiviral treatment that is started more than 72 hours after the onset of skin rash has never been confirmed.

Although the additional effectiveness of acyclovir eye ointment has never been established, topical acyclovir can be considered in cases of dendritic or pseudodendritic keratitis.

References
  1. Liesegang TJ. Herpes zoster ophthalmicus: natural history, risk factors, clinical presentation, and morbidity. Ophthalmology 2008; 115( suppl 2):S3S12.
  2. Opstelten W, Eekhof J, Neven AK, Verheij T. Treatment of herpes zoster. Can Fam Physician 2008; 54:373377.
  3. Opstelten W, Zaal MJ. Managing ophthalmic herpes zoster in primary care. BMJ 2005; 331:147151.
  4. Donahue JG, Choo PW, Manson JE, Platt R. The incidence of herpes zoster. Arch Intern Med 1995; 155:16051609.
  5. Opstelten W, Zuithoff NP, van Essen GA, et al. Predicting postherpetic neuralgia in elderly primary care patients with herpes zoster: prospective prognostic study. Pain 2007; 132( suppl 1):S52S59.
  6. De Morgas JM, Kierland RR. The outcome of patients with herpes zoster. AMA Arch Derm 1957; 75:193196.
  7. Hess TM, Lutz LJ, Nauss LA, Lamer TJ. Treatment of acute herpetic neuralgia. A case report and review of the literature. Minn Med 1990; 73:3740.
  8. Harding SP, Lipton JR, Wells JC. Natural history of herpes zoster ophthalmicus: predictors of postherpetic neuralgia and ocular involvement. Br J Ophthalmol 1987; 71:353358.
  9. Cobo LM, Foulks GN, Liesegang T, et al. Oral acyclovir in the treatment of acute herpes zoster ophthalmicus. Ophthalmology 1986; 93:763770.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

José Luis Vallejo-García, MD
Department of Ophthalmology, Hospital Universitario La Paz, Madrid, Spain

Sergio Vañó-Galván, MD
Department of Dermatology, Ramón y Cajal Hospital, University of Alcalá, Madrid, Spain

Omar Rayward, MD
Department of Ophthalmology, Hospital Universitario Clínico San Carlos, Madrid, Spain

Paula Moreno-Martin, MD
Department of Ophthalmology, La Princesa University Hospital, Madrid, Spain

Address: José Luis Vallejo-García, MD, Paseo de la Castellana Nº 261, 28046 Madrid, Spain; e-mail jvallejogarcia@gmail.com

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 76(7)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
410-412
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

José Luis Vallejo-García, MD
Department of Ophthalmology, Hospital Universitario La Paz, Madrid, Spain

Sergio Vañó-Galván, MD
Department of Dermatology, Ramón y Cajal Hospital, University of Alcalá, Madrid, Spain

Omar Rayward, MD
Department of Ophthalmology, Hospital Universitario Clínico San Carlos, Madrid, Spain

Paula Moreno-Martin, MD
Department of Ophthalmology, La Princesa University Hospital, Madrid, Spain

Address: José Luis Vallejo-García, MD, Paseo de la Castellana Nº 261, 28046 Madrid, Spain; e-mail jvallejogarcia@gmail.com

Author and Disclosure Information

José Luis Vallejo-García, MD
Department of Ophthalmology, Hospital Universitario La Paz, Madrid, Spain

Sergio Vañó-Galván, MD
Department of Dermatology, Ramón y Cajal Hospital, University of Alcalá, Madrid, Spain

Omar Rayward, MD
Department of Ophthalmology, Hospital Universitario Clínico San Carlos, Madrid, Spain

Paula Moreno-Martin, MD
Department of Ophthalmology, La Princesa University Hospital, Madrid, Spain

Address: José Luis Vallejo-García, MD, Paseo de la Castellana Nº 261, 28046 Madrid, Spain; e-mail jvallejogarcia@gmail.com

Article PDF
Article PDF

A 75-year-old man presents 4 days after painful cutaneous lesions appeared on the left side of his face, associated with severe ocular pain. Two days before the eruption, he had had an intense headache, which was diagnosed as a tension headache and was treated with oral acetaminophen (Tylenol), but with no improvement.

Figure 1. Typical vesicular rash affects the first trigeminal branch dermatome without trespassing the midline.
He has a history of hypertension and hyperuricemia. No recent changes have been made in his medications. Physical examination shows grouped herpetiform vesicles on an erythematous base confined to the cutaneous surface and innervated by the left first trigeminal branch (Figure 1). Palpation detects regional preauricular and submaxillary lymphadenopathies.

Figure 2. Typical corneal fluorescein stain of dendritic keratitis under cobalt blue light.
Ophthalmologic examination with fluorescein stain shows moderate perilimbal injection and dendritic keratitis (Figure 2).

The remainder of his physical examination is normal. Laboratory tests, including red and white blood cell counts, hemoglobin, and basic metabolic and coagulation tests reveal no abnormalities.

Q: What is your diagnosis?

  • Allergic contact dermatitis
  • Herpes simplex
  • Varicella
  • Ramsay-Hunt syndrome
  • Herpes zoster ophthalmicus and herpetic keratitis

A: Herpes zoster ophthalmicus is the correct diagnosis. It represents a reactivation of the varicella zoster virus.1

Varicella zoster virus, like others of the herpes family, has developed a complex control of virus-host interactions to ensure its survival in humans. It lies dormant in the sensory ganglia and, when reactivated, moves down the neurons and satellite cells along the sensory axons to the skin.1 The reactivation is related to diminished cell-mediated immunity, which occurs as a physiologic part of aging, which is why the elderly tend to be the most often affected. 2 The incidence of herpes zoster varies from 2.2 to 3.4 per 1,000 people per year.3 Its incidence in people over age 80 is about 10 per 1,000 people per year.3

CLINICAL PRESENTATION

Herpes zoster typically presents as a dermatome-grouped vesicular eruption over an erythematous base, accompanied or preceded by local pain. It has two main complications, postherpetic neuralgia and ocular involvement. Postherpetic neuralgia is neuropathic pain that persists or develops after the dermatomal rash has healed.4 Independent predictors of postherpetic neuralgia are older age, severe acute pain, severe rash, a shorter duration of rash before consultation, and ocular involvement.5 It occurs in 36.6% of patients over age 60, and in 47.5% over 70.6 Persistent postherpetic neuralgia has been linked to suicide in patients over 70.7

Ocular infection occurs with involvement of the ophthalmic division of the fifth cranial nerve. Before the antiviral era, it was seen in as many as 50% of patients.8 Hutchinson’s sign is skin lesions on the tip, side, or root of the nose and is an important predictor of ocular involvement.1 Lesions may include folliculopapillar conjunctivitis, episcleritis, scleritis, keratitis (dendritic, pseudodendritic, and interstitial), uveitis, and necrotizing retinitis.

 

 

DIAGNOSIS

The diagnosis of herpes zoster is usually based on clinical observation of the characteristic rash, although viral culture and molecular techniques are available when definitive diagnosis is required. When ophthalmic division is affected and Hutchinson’s sign, unexplained ocular redness with pain, or complaints of visual problems are present, the patient should be referred promptly to an ophthalmologist, because serious visual impairment can occur. The fluorescein dye may show no staining or the typical dendritic keratitis (Figure 2).

TREATMENT

Oral antiviral drugs have made the treatment of zoster possible when, effectively, no treatment existed before. Ideally, an antiviral should be given within 72 hours of symptom onset. Starting treatment as early as possible—especially within 72 hours of onset—has been shown to be effective in alleviating acute pain and in preventing or limiting the duration and severity of postherpetic neuralgia.3

Acyclovir (Zovirax) 800 mg five times a day for 7 days or one of its derivatives—eg, famciclovir (Famvir), penciclovir (Denavir), or valacyclovir (Valtrex)—has been shown to be safe and effective in the treatment of active disease, as well as in preventing or shortening the duration of postherpetic neuralgia.3 It has also been shown to reduce the rate of eye involvement from 50% to 20% or 30%.9 This is why all patients with this dermatomal involvement must be treated.

Second-generation antivirals

Valacyclovir 1,000 mg three times a day and famciclovir 500 mg three times a day seem to be as effective as acyclovir in reducing zoster-associated pain, but their efficacy in reducing eye involvement has not been studied. In clinical practice, however, these second-generation antivirals may be more effective than acyclovir because patients are more likely to comply with the treatment regimen of three rather than five daily doses.

Other considerations

In patients with kidney failure, the non-nephrotoxic antiviral brivudine is preferred, but it is not available in the United States. Therefore, one must use acyclovir or one of the other drugs, carefully adjusting the dose according to the creatinine clearance and making sure the patient is well hydrated.

The efficacy of antiviral treatment that is started more than 72 hours after the onset of skin rash has never been confirmed.

Although the additional effectiveness of acyclovir eye ointment has never been established, topical acyclovir can be considered in cases of dendritic or pseudodendritic keratitis.

A 75-year-old man presents 4 days after painful cutaneous lesions appeared on the left side of his face, associated with severe ocular pain. Two days before the eruption, he had had an intense headache, which was diagnosed as a tension headache and was treated with oral acetaminophen (Tylenol), but with no improvement.

Figure 1. Typical vesicular rash affects the first trigeminal branch dermatome without trespassing the midline.
He has a history of hypertension and hyperuricemia. No recent changes have been made in his medications. Physical examination shows grouped herpetiform vesicles on an erythematous base confined to the cutaneous surface and innervated by the left first trigeminal branch (Figure 1). Palpation detects regional preauricular and submaxillary lymphadenopathies.

Figure 2. Typical corneal fluorescein stain of dendritic keratitis under cobalt blue light.
Ophthalmologic examination with fluorescein stain shows moderate perilimbal injection and dendritic keratitis (Figure 2).

The remainder of his physical examination is normal. Laboratory tests, including red and white blood cell counts, hemoglobin, and basic metabolic and coagulation tests reveal no abnormalities.

Q: What is your diagnosis?

  • Allergic contact dermatitis
  • Herpes simplex
  • Varicella
  • Ramsay-Hunt syndrome
  • Herpes zoster ophthalmicus and herpetic keratitis

A: Herpes zoster ophthalmicus is the correct diagnosis. It represents a reactivation of the varicella zoster virus.1

Varicella zoster virus, like others of the herpes family, has developed a complex control of virus-host interactions to ensure its survival in humans. It lies dormant in the sensory ganglia and, when reactivated, moves down the neurons and satellite cells along the sensory axons to the skin.1 The reactivation is related to diminished cell-mediated immunity, which occurs as a physiologic part of aging, which is why the elderly tend to be the most often affected. 2 The incidence of herpes zoster varies from 2.2 to 3.4 per 1,000 people per year.3 Its incidence in people over age 80 is about 10 per 1,000 people per year.3

CLINICAL PRESENTATION

Herpes zoster typically presents as a dermatome-grouped vesicular eruption over an erythematous base, accompanied or preceded by local pain. It has two main complications, postherpetic neuralgia and ocular involvement. Postherpetic neuralgia is neuropathic pain that persists or develops after the dermatomal rash has healed.4 Independent predictors of postherpetic neuralgia are older age, severe acute pain, severe rash, a shorter duration of rash before consultation, and ocular involvement.5 It occurs in 36.6% of patients over age 60, and in 47.5% over 70.6 Persistent postherpetic neuralgia has been linked to suicide in patients over 70.7

Ocular infection occurs with involvement of the ophthalmic division of the fifth cranial nerve. Before the antiviral era, it was seen in as many as 50% of patients.8 Hutchinson’s sign is skin lesions on the tip, side, or root of the nose and is an important predictor of ocular involvement.1 Lesions may include folliculopapillar conjunctivitis, episcleritis, scleritis, keratitis (dendritic, pseudodendritic, and interstitial), uveitis, and necrotizing retinitis.

 

 

DIAGNOSIS

The diagnosis of herpes zoster is usually based on clinical observation of the characteristic rash, although viral culture and molecular techniques are available when definitive diagnosis is required. When ophthalmic division is affected and Hutchinson’s sign, unexplained ocular redness with pain, or complaints of visual problems are present, the patient should be referred promptly to an ophthalmologist, because serious visual impairment can occur. The fluorescein dye may show no staining or the typical dendritic keratitis (Figure 2).

TREATMENT

Oral antiviral drugs have made the treatment of zoster possible when, effectively, no treatment existed before. Ideally, an antiviral should be given within 72 hours of symptom onset. Starting treatment as early as possible—especially within 72 hours of onset—has been shown to be effective in alleviating acute pain and in preventing or limiting the duration and severity of postherpetic neuralgia.3

Acyclovir (Zovirax) 800 mg five times a day for 7 days or one of its derivatives—eg, famciclovir (Famvir), penciclovir (Denavir), or valacyclovir (Valtrex)—has been shown to be safe and effective in the treatment of active disease, as well as in preventing or shortening the duration of postherpetic neuralgia.3 It has also been shown to reduce the rate of eye involvement from 50% to 20% or 30%.9 This is why all patients with this dermatomal involvement must be treated.

Second-generation antivirals

Valacyclovir 1,000 mg three times a day and famciclovir 500 mg three times a day seem to be as effective as acyclovir in reducing zoster-associated pain, but their efficacy in reducing eye involvement has not been studied. In clinical practice, however, these second-generation antivirals may be more effective than acyclovir because patients are more likely to comply with the treatment regimen of three rather than five daily doses.

Other considerations

In patients with kidney failure, the non-nephrotoxic antiviral brivudine is preferred, but it is not available in the United States. Therefore, one must use acyclovir or one of the other drugs, carefully adjusting the dose according to the creatinine clearance and making sure the patient is well hydrated.

The efficacy of antiviral treatment that is started more than 72 hours after the onset of skin rash has never been confirmed.

Although the additional effectiveness of acyclovir eye ointment has never been established, topical acyclovir can be considered in cases of dendritic or pseudodendritic keratitis.

References
  1. Liesegang TJ. Herpes zoster ophthalmicus: natural history, risk factors, clinical presentation, and morbidity. Ophthalmology 2008; 115( suppl 2):S3S12.
  2. Opstelten W, Eekhof J, Neven AK, Verheij T. Treatment of herpes zoster. Can Fam Physician 2008; 54:373377.
  3. Opstelten W, Zaal MJ. Managing ophthalmic herpes zoster in primary care. BMJ 2005; 331:147151.
  4. Donahue JG, Choo PW, Manson JE, Platt R. The incidence of herpes zoster. Arch Intern Med 1995; 155:16051609.
  5. Opstelten W, Zuithoff NP, van Essen GA, et al. Predicting postherpetic neuralgia in elderly primary care patients with herpes zoster: prospective prognostic study. Pain 2007; 132( suppl 1):S52S59.
  6. De Morgas JM, Kierland RR. The outcome of patients with herpes zoster. AMA Arch Derm 1957; 75:193196.
  7. Hess TM, Lutz LJ, Nauss LA, Lamer TJ. Treatment of acute herpetic neuralgia. A case report and review of the literature. Minn Med 1990; 73:3740.
  8. Harding SP, Lipton JR, Wells JC. Natural history of herpes zoster ophthalmicus: predictors of postherpetic neuralgia and ocular involvement. Br J Ophthalmol 1987; 71:353358.
  9. Cobo LM, Foulks GN, Liesegang T, et al. Oral acyclovir in the treatment of acute herpes zoster ophthalmicus. Ophthalmology 1986; 93:763770.
References
  1. Liesegang TJ. Herpes zoster ophthalmicus: natural history, risk factors, clinical presentation, and morbidity. Ophthalmology 2008; 115( suppl 2):S3S12.
  2. Opstelten W, Eekhof J, Neven AK, Verheij T. Treatment of herpes zoster. Can Fam Physician 2008; 54:373377.
  3. Opstelten W, Zaal MJ. Managing ophthalmic herpes zoster in primary care. BMJ 2005; 331:147151.
  4. Donahue JG, Choo PW, Manson JE, Platt R. The incidence of herpes zoster. Arch Intern Med 1995; 155:16051609.
  5. Opstelten W, Zuithoff NP, van Essen GA, et al. Predicting postherpetic neuralgia in elderly primary care patients with herpes zoster: prospective prognostic study. Pain 2007; 132( suppl 1):S52S59.
  6. De Morgas JM, Kierland RR. The outcome of patients with herpes zoster. AMA Arch Derm 1957; 75:193196.
  7. Hess TM, Lutz LJ, Nauss LA, Lamer TJ. Treatment of acute herpetic neuralgia. A case report and review of the literature. Minn Med 1990; 73:3740.
  8. Harding SP, Lipton JR, Wells JC. Natural history of herpes zoster ophthalmicus: predictors of postherpetic neuralgia and ocular involvement. Br J Ophthalmol 1987; 71:353358.
  9. Cobo LM, Foulks GN, Liesegang T, et al. Oral acyclovir in the treatment of acute herpes zoster ophthalmicus. Ophthalmology 1986; 93:763770.
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 76(7)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 76(7)
Page Number
410-412
Page Number
410-412
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Painful eye with a facial rash
Display Headline
Painful eye with a facial rash
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Alternative CME
Article PDF Media

Back pain made simple: An approach based on principles and evidence

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 03/02/2018 - 12:36
Display Headline
Back pain made simple: An approach based on principles and evidence

Low back pain should be understood as a remittent, intermittent predicament of life. Its cause is indeterminate, but its course is predictable. Its link to work-related injury is tenuous and confounded by psychosocial issues, including workers’ compensation. It challenges function, compromises performance, and calls for empathy and understanding.1

In this brief paper, we offer a simple approach to one of the most common human afflictions, based on principles and evidence.

WHY IS BACK PAIN IMPORTANT?

Low back pain is common and affects people of all ages. It is second only to the common cold as the most common affliction of mankind, and it is among the leading complaints bringing patients to physicians’ offices. Its lifetime prevalence exceeds 70% in most industrialized countries, with an annual incidence of 15% to 20% in the United States.

Its social and economic impact is substantial. It is the most frequent cause of disability for people under age 45. In 2005, the mean age- and sex-adjusted medical expenditure among respondents with spine problems was $6,096 vs $3,516 in those without spine problems, and it had increased by 65% (adjusted for inflation) from 1997 to 2005.2

WHAT ARE THE GOALS AND PRINCIPLES OF MANAGING LOW BACK PAIN?

The goals of management for patients with low back pain are to:

  • Decrease the pain
  • Restore mobility
  • Hasten recovery so the patient can resume normal daily activities as soon as possible
  • Prevent development of a chronic recurrent condition: low back pain is considered acute when it persists for less than 6 weeks, subacute between 6 weeks and 3 months, and chronic when it lasts longer than 3 months
  • Restore and preserve physical and financial independence and comfort.

Principles of management

  • Most back pain has no recognizable cause and is therefore termed “mechanical” or “musculoskeletal.”
  • Underlying systemic disease is rare.
  • Most episodes of back pain are unpreventable.
  • Confounding psychosocial issues are often contributory, important, and relevant.
  • A careful, informed history and physical examination are invaluable; diagnostic studies, however technologically sophisticated, are never a substitute.
  • Defer diagnostic studies for specific indications.
  • Refer patients only if they have underlying disease or progressive neurologic dysfunction, or if they do not respond to conservative management.
  • Encouragement of activity is benign and perhaps salutary for back pain and is desirable for general physical and mental health; there is only scant evidence to support bed rest.3
  • Few if any treatments have been proven effective for low back pain.
  • Talking to the patient and explaining the issues involved are critical to successful management.4

INITIAL CONSIDERATIONS WHEN EVALUATING A PATIENT

When encountering a patient with back pain, the initial consideration is whether the symptoms are regional—ie, local, mechanical, and musculoskeletal—or if they reflect a systemic disease. It is also important to look for evidence of social or psychological distress that may amplify, prolong, or confound the pain or the patient’s perception of it.

What are the clues to a systemic process?

Red flags of a serious, systemic cause of low back pain are presented in Table 1. Other symptoms that may indicate a systemic cause include night pain (also seen with disk disease and neurocompression), pain with recumbency (malignancy), back pain with morning stiffness lasting for more than 1 hour (spondyloarthropathy), cauda equina syndrome (overflow incontinence, saddle anesthesia, and paraparesis), and other systemic and constitutional symptoms.

Does the patient have a regional low back syndrome?

Regional low back syndromes account for 90% of the causes of low back pain. They are usually mechanical in origin.

Regional back pain is due to overuse of a normal mechanical structure (muscle strain, “lumbago”) or is secondary to trauma, deformity, or degeneration of an anatomical structure (herniated nucleus pulposus, fracture, and spondyloarthropathy, including facet joint arthritis). Chronic regional back syndromes include osteoarthritis of the spine (ie, spondylosis), spinal stenosis, and facet joint arthropathy.

Characteristically, mechanical disorders are exacerbated by certain physical activities, such as lifting, and are relieved by others, such as assuming a supine position.

 

 

Does the patient have sciatica or another nerve root compression syndrome?

The obvious manifestation of nerve root irritation is usually sciatica, a sharp or burning pain radiating down the posterior or lateral aspect of the leg usually to the foot or the ankle and often associated with numbness or paresthesias. The pain is sometimes aggravated by coughing, sneezing, or the Valsalva maneuver. It is most commonly seen in lumbar disk herniation, cauda equina syndrome, and spinal stenosis.

Might the patient have spinal stenosis?

More than 20% of people over age 60 have radiographic evidence of lumbar spinal canal stenosis, even if they have no symptoms.5 For this reason, the diagnosis of spinal stenosis as a cause of low back pain must be based on the history and physical examination.

The classic history of spinal stenosis is that of neurogenic claudication (“pseudoclaudication”), which is pain that occurs in the legs after walking or prolonged standing and is relieved with sitting. It may sometimes be associated with a varying and transient neurologic deficit. Lumbar flexion increases and lumbar extension decreases the cross-sectional area of the spinal canal—hence, the relief of symptoms of spinal stenosis on stooping or bending forward. Pain is commonly perceived in the back, buttock, or thigh and is elicited by prolonged lumbar extension.

On neurologic examination, about 50% of patients with spinal stenosis have a deficit in vibratory sensibility, temperature sensitivity, or muscle strength. The nerve root involved is most commonly L5, followed by S1 and L4.

Many patients have balance disturbance (wide-based gait or Romberg sign), particularly later in the course of the disorder, with normal cerebellar signs (“pseudocerebellar” presentation).

Patients with bilateral hip osteoarthritis may present with similar symptoms of buttock or thigh pain, which can be distinguished with the above clinical examination. Rotation of the hip is painful in osteoarthritis but not in spinal stenosis. If both conditions overlap, injection of a steroid or lidocaine in the painful hip should decrease the pain associated with hip osteoarthritis.

Does the patient have evidence of neurologic compromise?

Assessment of neurologic compromise requires a thorough history for evidence of muscle weakness, gait disturbances, paresthesias, numbness, radicular pain, and bowel or bladder disturbances. The neurologic examination includes testing muscle strength, evaluating sensation and reflexes (Table 2), and analyzing the gait.

Muscle strength is tested by examining the:

  • L2 nerve root (which supplies the iliopsoas muscle and is tested by hip flexion)
  • L3 nerve root (quadriceps, tested by knee extension)
  • L4 nerve root (tibialis anterior, assessed by evaluating ankle dorsiflexion and inversion at the subtalar joint)
  • L5 nerve root (extensor hallucis longus and extensor digitorum longus, tested by asking the patient to dorsiflex the great toe, then the other toes)
  • S1 nerve root (flexor hallucis longus, flexor digitorum longus, and tendoachilles, tested by asking the patient to plantar-flex the great toe, then the other toes, and then the ankle).

The patient is also asked to walk a few steps on the toes and then on the heels. Inability to toe-walk indicates S1 nerve root involvement; inability to heel-walk may indicate L4 or L5 involvement. If the patient cannot heelwalk, ask him or her to squat; inability to do so indicates L4 problems.6

Radiculopathy. Detecting and locating the cause of radiculopathy may be helpful. In L3–L4 disk herniation, there is pain and paresthesia with numbness and hypalgesia in the anteromedial thigh and the knee. In L4–L5 disk herniation, there is usually involvement of the exiting L5 nerve root, which presents as numbness or paresthesias in the anterolateral calf, great toe, first web space, and medial foot. In L5-S1 disk herniation, the S1 nerve root is involved, presenting as numbness and hypalgesia in the fifth toe, lateral aspect of the foot, sole, and posterolateral calf and thigh.

Reflexes. Exaggerated or decreased reflexes do not always indicate a neurologic abnormality, but reflex asymmetry is significant. The knee-jerk reflex is diminished in L3–L4 nerve root involvement, and the ankle-jerk reflex is diminished with S1 nerve root involvement. The Babinski sign indicates pyramidal tract involvement.

Gait. Observe the patient’s gait as he or she rises and moves to the examining table, to determine whether it is shortened, asymmetrical, or antalgic.7 Also note any foot drop, which may indicate a potentially serious problem (L5 radiculopathy).

What is an adequate examination of the back?

A good back examination can elicit important information about the cause and the extent of back pain. It includes inspection, palpation, and range of movement of the spine along with a detailed neurologic examination.

Inspect it for any deformities, scoliosis, asymmetry, paraspinal muscle spasm, unusual hair growth, listing to one side, decrease or increase in lumbar lordosis, or muscle atrophy or fasciculation.

Palpate it for paraspinal muscle spasm, warmth, and localized bone pain.

Move it. The normal ranges of motion of the lumbar spine are 15 degrees of extension, 40 degrees of flexion, 30 degrees of lateral bending, and 40 degrees of lateral rotation to each side.

Assess it. This includes estimating the tone and nutrition of the muscles, testing their strength (Table 2), examining vibratory or proprioception and pinprick sensation in each dermatome (see below), testing the Achilles and patellar reflexes, and looking for the Babinski sign and clonus. In addition, perform the straight-leg-raising and the cross-straightleg-raising tests, which are positive in most patients with lower lumbar disk herniations.

The femoral stretch test is usually positive in upper lumbar disk herniations (L2–L3, L3– L4). It is performed with the patient in the prone position, with the knee being gradually flexed from full extension. Pain radiating along the anterior aspect of the thigh indicates a positive test.

The examination of the spine must be supplemented with examination of the hip and sacroiliac joints, since back pain may be a referred symptom from any pathology affecting these joints.

 

 

When should patients be referred to a specialist?

Patients should be referred to a neurologist, neurosurgeon, orthopedist, or other specialist if they have cauda equina syndrome; severe or progressive neurologic deficits; infections, tumors, or fractures compressing the spinal cord; or, perhaps, no response to conservative therapy for 4 to 6 weeks for patients with a herniated lumbar disk or 8 to 12 weeks for those with spinal stenosis.

If there is profound motor involvement at the time of the initial evaluation, patients must be promptly given systemic corticosteroids such as methylprednisolone (Medrol) or dexamethasone (Decadron) to decrease spinal cord edema.

Are there signs of psychological distress?

Psychosocial factors can significantly affect pain and functional disability in patients who have low back pain.8,9 These are known as “yellow flags” and are better predictors of treatment outcome than physical factors. 10 Anatomically inappropriate signs may be helpful in identifying psychological distress as a result of or as an amplifier of low back symptoms.

Waddell et al11 proposed five categories of these nonorganic signs. These are:

  • Inappropriate tenderness that is superficial or widespread
  • Pain on simulated axial loading by pressing on the top of the head or simulated spine rotation
  • Distraction signs such as inconsistent performance between straight-leg-raising in the seated position vs the supine position
  • Regional disturbances in strength and sensation that do not correspond with nerve root innervation patterns
  • Overreaction during the physical examination.

The occurrence of any one of the signs is of limited value, but positive findings in three of the five categories suggest psychological distress.11

Which diagnostic studies are useful, cost-effective, and supported by evidence?

Since most abnormalities found on imaging studies are nonspecific, such studies are not necessary during the initial evaluation of acute low back pain unless there are red flags that suggest a more ominous source of pain.

Routine plain lumbosacral spine radiographs with anteroposterior and lateral views may be appropriate initially if the patient has risk factors for vertebral fractures (Table 1), or if the patient does not improve after a course of conservative treatment (usually 4–6 weeks).

Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) is the preferred test if one suspects a tumor, infection, disk pathology, or spinal stenosis.

Computed tomography (CT) shows bony details better than MRI does. Hence, it is preferred when one needs to evaluate bony details (fractures, scoliosis) and when there are contraindications to MRI, as in patients with metal implant devices and those who are claustrophobic (although now there are “open system” MRI machines, in which the feeling of claustrophobia is much less).

MRI and CT should not be ordered routinely, but only for specific indications to answer specific questions, when specific findings would indicate specific treatment.

In most cases, contrast is not needed for CT or MRI to rule out common causes of low back pain, except in cases of suspected intraspinal tumor. Patients with compromised renal function who need contrast for CT need to be hydrated before the scan to lower the risk of contrast-induced nephropathy. These patients are also at higher risk of nephrogenic fibrosing dermopathy when they receive gadolinium contrast for MRI.

Bone scans can be used to look for infections or fractures not noted on plain radiography. However, MRI provides similar or better diagnostic accuracy without radiation.

Electrodiagnostic studies may be used in patients with radiculopathy when clinical examination suggests multilevel root lesions, when symptoms do not match imaging studies, and when patients have breakaway weakness (fluctuating levels of strength in one or more muscle groups).

Other useful diagnostic and laboratory studies may include the erythrocyte sedimentation rate to screen for malignancy and infection when these are suspected, blood culture for osteomyelitis, and bone aspiration and biopsy for histopathologic diagnosis of infection, malignancy, or other lesions.

WHICH TREATMENTS ARE SUPPORTED BY ROBUST EVIDENCE?

The primary treatment of low back pain should be conservative care, reassurance, and education, allowing patients to improve on their own and helping them cope with their predicament.

Limited bed rest. While 2 or 3 days of limited bed rest may help improve symptoms in patients who have acute radiculopathy, several studies have shown that long periods of bed rest are not beneficial for acute or subacute low back pain.12 Encouraging activity modification allows patients with nonspecific back pain or radicular symptoms to remain active while avoiding activities that may aggravate pain and is shown to lead to a more rapid recovery than bed rest.13,14 The most common situations to avoid are prolonged sitting or standing.15 Low-stress aerobic activities, especially walking, are the best early activities.15

Exercise is one of the only evidence-based, effective treatments for chronic low back pain.16 The most commonly prescribed exercises are aimed at retraining the multifidus (a back muscle) and transversus abdominis (a deep abdominal muscle), supplemented with exercises for the pelvic floor and breathing control.

Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs) and acetaminophen (Tylenol) are the drugs of choice for pain control in acute back pain17,18 and are as effective as muscle relaxants or opioids.

Muscle relaxants and opioids offer few advantages over NSAIDs and acetaminophen, except when there is severe muscle spasm associated with the back pain or if acetaminophen or NSAIDs do not relieve the pain. Muscle relaxants and opioids are both associated with more severe adverse effects. If prescribed, they should be used for a short, clearly defined period (1 to 2 weeks).19

Epidural corticosteroids, when used for sciatica, give mild to moderate short-term improvement in leg pain and sensory deficit but no significant long-term functional benefit or reduction in the need for surgery.20

Surgery may be considered in cases of cauda equina syndrome, which is a surgical emergency; severe or progressive neurologic deficit; infections, tumors, and fractures compressing the spinal cord; mechanical instability of the back; and, perhaps, intractable pain (leg pain equal to or greater than back pain) with a positive straight-leg-raising test and no response to conservative therapy.

The term “instability” implies an abnormal motion under physiologic loads. Lumbar instability is defined as translation of more than 4 mm or 10 degrees of angular motion between flexion and extension on an upright lateral radiograph.

Although Weinstein et al21 showed that patients with spinal stenosis who underwent surgery showed significantly more improvement in all primary outcomes than did patients treated nonsurgically, many patients can be effectively treated without surgery.

 

 

WHAT SHOULD BE REMEMBERED ABOUT LOW BACK PAIN?

Low back pain is a common and costly medical condition with only a weak correlation between symptoms and pathologic changes, resulting in a lack of objective clinical findings on which a definitive diagnosis can be based.22 Most back pain has no recognizable cause and is usually regional and musculoskeletal. Back pain as a result of an underlying systemic disease is rare and needs to be excluded by a good history and physical examination. Diagnostic studies are best reserved for specific indications.

Referral to a specialist is warranted when the patient is not responding to conservative treatment, when a progressive neurologic deficit or cauda equina syndrome is noted or suspected, or when the patient has an underlying malignancy, infection, fracture, or spinal instability.

Bed rest is best avoided, and activity within the limits of pain is encouraged. NSAIDs and acetaminophen are usually the drugs of choice for controlling acute low back pain.

Ultimately, the goal for clinicians is to identify serious conditions and to prevent the back pain from becoming chronic pain by promptly identifying the various risk factors.

References
  1. Hadler NM. Low back pain. In:Koopman WJ, editor. Arthritis and Allied Conditions. 14th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Lipincott Williams and Wilkins; 2001:20262041.
  2. Martin BI, Deyo RA, Mirza SK, et al. Expenditures and health status among adults with back and neck problems. JAMA 2008; 299:656664.
  3. NASS Task Force on clinical guidelines. Phase III clinical guidelines for multidisciplinary spine care specialists. Unremitting low back pain. 1st ed. Burr Ridge, IL: North American Spine Society; 2000.
  4. Cailliet R. Low back pain. In: Soft Tissue Pain and Disability. 3rd ed. Philadelphia, PA: FA Davis; 1996:101170.
  5. Jensen MC, Brant-Zawadzki MN, Obuchowski N, Modic MT, Malkasian D, Ross JS. Magnetic resonance imaging of the lumbar spine in people without back pain. N Engl J Med 1994; 331:6973.
  6. A gency for Health Care Policy and Research. Acute low back pain problems in adults: assessment and treatment. http://www.chirobase.org/07Strategy/AHCPR/ahcprclinician.html. Accessed March 2009.
  7. Cohen R, Chopra P, Upshur C. Primary care work-up of acute and chronic symptoms. Geriatrics 2001; 56:2637.
  8. Pincus T, Burton AK, Vogel S, Field AP. A systematic review of psychological factors as predictors of chronicity/disability in prospective cohorts of low back pain. Spine 2002; 27:E109E120.
  9. Carragee EJ. Clinical practice: persistent low back pain. N Engl J Med 2005; 352:18911898.
  10. Pincus T, Vlaeyen JW, Kendall NA, Von Korff MR, Kalauokalani DA, Reis S. Cognitive-behavioral therapy and psychosocial factors in low back pain: directions for the future. Spine 2002; 27:E133E138.
  11. Waddell G, McCulloch JA, Kummel E, Venner RM. Nonorganic physical signs in low back pain. Spine 1980; 5:117125.
  12. Hagen KB, Hilde G, Jamtvedt G, Winnem M. Bed rest for acute low-back pain and sciatica. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2004; 4:CD001254.
  13. Patel AT, Ogle AA. Diagnosis and management of acute low back pain. Am Fam Physician 2000; 61:17791790.
  14. Grotle M, Brox JI, Glomsrød B, Lønn JH, Vøllestad NK. Prognostic factors in first-time care seekers due to acute low back pain. Eur J Pain 2007; 11:290298.
  15. Atlas SJ, Deyo RA. Evaluating and managing acute low back pain in the primary care setting. J Gen Intern Med 2001; 16:120131.
  16. Maher CG. Effective physical treatment for low back pain. Orthop Clin North Am 2004; 35:5764.
  17. Chou R, Qaseem A, Snow V, et al. Diagnosis and treatment of low back pain: a joint clinical practice guideline from the American College of Physicians and the American Pain Society. Ann Intern Med 2007; 147:478491.
  18. Chou R, Huffman LHAmerican Pain Society. Medications for acute and chronic low back pain: a review of the evidence for an American Pain Society/American College of Physicians clinical practice guideline. Ann Intern Med 2007; 147:505514.
  19. Cherkin DC, Wheeler KJ, Barlow W, Deyo RA. Medication use for low back pain in primary care. Spine 1998; 23:607614.
  20. Carette S, Leclaire R, Marcoux S, et al. Epidural corticosteroid injections for sciatica due to herniated nucleus pulposus. N Engl J Med 1997; 336:16341640.
  21. Weinstein JN, Tosteson TD, Lurie JD, et al. Surgical versus non-surgical therapy for lumbar spinal stenosis. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:794810.
  22. Deyo RA, Rainville J, Kent DL. What can the history and physical examination tell us about low back pain? JAMA 1992; 268:760765.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Samir D. Bhangle, MD
Department of Medicine, Saint Barnabas Medical Center, Livingston, NJ

Sunil Sapru, MD
Assistant Professor and Assistant Program Director, Department of Medicine, Saint Barnabas Medical Center, Livingston, NJ

Richard S. Panush, MD, MACP, MACR
Professor, University of Medicine and Dentistry of New Jersey, New Jersey Medical School, Newark, NJ; Chair and Program Director, Department of Medicine, Saint Barnabas Medical Center, Livingston, NJ

Address: Richard S. Panush, MD, Department of Medicine, Saint Barnabas Medical Center, 94 Old Short Hills Road, Livingston, NJ 07039; e-mail rspanush@sbhcs.com

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 76(7)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
393-399
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Samir D. Bhangle, MD
Department of Medicine, Saint Barnabas Medical Center, Livingston, NJ

Sunil Sapru, MD
Assistant Professor and Assistant Program Director, Department of Medicine, Saint Barnabas Medical Center, Livingston, NJ

Richard S. Panush, MD, MACP, MACR
Professor, University of Medicine and Dentistry of New Jersey, New Jersey Medical School, Newark, NJ; Chair and Program Director, Department of Medicine, Saint Barnabas Medical Center, Livingston, NJ

Address: Richard S. Panush, MD, Department of Medicine, Saint Barnabas Medical Center, 94 Old Short Hills Road, Livingston, NJ 07039; e-mail rspanush@sbhcs.com

Author and Disclosure Information

Samir D. Bhangle, MD
Department of Medicine, Saint Barnabas Medical Center, Livingston, NJ

Sunil Sapru, MD
Assistant Professor and Assistant Program Director, Department of Medicine, Saint Barnabas Medical Center, Livingston, NJ

Richard S. Panush, MD, MACP, MACR
Professor, University of Medicine and Dentistry of New Jersey, New Jersey Medical School, Newark, NJ; Chair and Program Director, Department of Medicine, Saint Barnabas Medical Center, Livingston, NJ

Address: Richard S. Panush, MD, Department of Medicine, Saint Barnabas Medical Center, 94 Old Short Hills Road, Livingston, NJ 07039; e-mail rspanush@sbhcs.com

Article PDF
Article PDF

Low back pain should be understood as a remittent, intermittent predicament of life. Its cause is indeterminate, but its course is predictable. Its link to work-related injury is tenuous and confounded by psychosocial issues, including workers’ compensation. It challenges function, compromises performance, and calls for empathy and understanding.1

In this brief paper, we offer a simple approach to one of the most common human afflictions, based on principles and evidence.

WHY IS BACK PAIN IMPORTANT?

Low back pain is common and affects people of all ages. It is second only to the common cold as the most common affliction of mankind, and it is among the leading complaints bringing patients to physicians’ offices. Its lifetime prevalence exceeds 70% in most industrialized countries, with an annual incidence of 15% to 20% in the United States.

Its social and economic impact is substantial. It is the most frequent cause of disability for people under age 45. In 2005, the mean age- and sex-adjusted medical expenditure among respondents with spine problems was $6,096 vs $3,516 in those without spine problems, and it had increased by 65% (adjusted for inflation) from 1997 to 2005.2

WHAT ARE THE GOALS AND PRINCIPLES OF MANAGING LOW BACK PAIN?

The goals of management for patients with low back pain are to:

  • Decrease the pain
  • Restore mobility
  • Hasten recovery so the patient can resume normal daily activities as soon as possible
  • Prevent development of a chronic recurrent condition: low back pain is considered acute when it persists for less than 6 weeks, subacute between 6 weeks and 3 months, and chronic when it lasts longer than 3 months
  • Restore and preserve physical and financial independence and comfort.

Principles of management

  • Most back pain has no recognizable cause and is therefore termed “mechanical” or “musculoskeletal.”
  • Underlying systemic disease is rare.
  • Most episodes of back pain are unpreventable.
  • Confounding psychosocial issues are often contributory, important, and relevant.
  • A careful, informed history and physical examination are invaluable; diagnostic studies, however technologically sophisticated, are never a substitute.
  • Defer diagnostic studies for specific indications.
  • Refer patients only if they have underlying disease or progressive neurologic dysfunction, or if they do not respond to conservative management.
  • Encouragement of activity is benign and perhaps salutary for back pain and is desirable for general physical and mental health; there is only scant evidence to support bed rest.3
  • Few if any treatments have been proven effective for low back pain.
  • Talking to the patient and explaining the issues involved are critical to successful management.4

INITIAL CONSIDERATIONS WHEN EVALUATING A PATIENT

When encountering a patient with back pain, the initial consideration is whether the symptoms are regional—ie, local, mechanical, and musculoskeletal—or if they reflect a systemic disease. It is also important to look for evidence of social or psychological distress that may amplify, prolong, or confound the pain or the patient’s perception of it.

What are the clues to a systemic process?

Red flags of a serious, systemic cause of low back pain are presented in Table 1. Other symptoms that may indicate a systemic cause include night pain (also seen with disk disease and neurocompression), pain with recumbency (malignancy), back pain with morning stiffness lasting for more than 1 hour (spondyloarthropathy), cauda equina syndrome (overflow incontinence, saddle anesthesia, and paraparesis), and other systemic and constitutional symptoms.

Does the patient have a regional low back syndrome?

Regional low back syndromes account for 90% of the causes of low back pain. They are usually mechanical in origin.

Regional back pain is due to overuse of a normal mechanical structure (muscle strain, “lumbago”) or is secondary to trauma, deformity, or degeneration of an anatomical structure (herniated nucleus pulposus, fracture, and spondyloarthropathy, including facet joint arthritis). Chronic regional back syndromes include osteoarthritis of the spine (ie, spondylosis), spinal stenosis, and facet joint arthropathy.

Characteristically, mechanical disorders are exacerbated by certain physical activities, such as lifting, and are relieved by others, such as assuming a supine position.

 

 

Does the patient have sciatica or another nerve root compression syndrome?

The obvious manifestation of nerve root irritation is usually sciatica, a sharp or burning pain radiating down the posterior or lateral aspect of the leg usually to the foot or the ankle and often associated with numbness or paresthesias. The pain is sometimes aggravated by coughing, sneezing, or the Valsalva maneuver. It is most commonly seen in lumbar disk herniation, cauda equina syndrome, and spinal stenosis.

Might the patient have spinal stenosis?

More than 20% of people over age 60 have radiographic evidence of lumbar spinal canal stenosis, even if they have no symptoms.5 For this reason, the diagnosis of spinal stenosis as a cause of low back pain must be based on the history and physical examination.

The classic history of spinal stenosis is that of neurogenic claudication (“pseudoclaudication”), which is pain that occurs in the legs after walking or prolonged standing and is relieved with sitting. It may sometimes be associated with a varying and transient neurologic deficit. Lumbar flexion increases and lumbar extension decreases the cross-sectional area of the spinal canal—hence, the relief of symptoms of spinal stenosis on stooping or bending forward. Pain is commonly perceived in the back, buttock, or thigh and is elicited by prolonged lumbar extension.

On neurologic examination, about 50% of patients with spinal stenosis have a deficit in vibratory sensibility, temperature sensitivity, or muscle strength. The nerve root involved is most commonly L5, followed by S1 and L4.

Many patients have balance disturbance (wide-based gait or Romberg sign), particularly later in the course of the disorder, with normal cerebellar signs (“pseudocerebellar” presentation).

Patients with bilateral hip osteoarthritis may present with similar symptoms of buttock or thigh pain, which can be distinguished with the above clinical examination. Rotation of the hip is painful in osteoarthritis but not in spinal stenosis. If both conditions overlap, injection of a steroid or lidocaine in the painful hip should decrease the pain associated with hip osteoarthritis.

Does the patient have evidence of neurologic compromise?

Assessment of neurologic compromise requires a thorough history for evidence of muscle weakness, gait disturbances, paresthesias, numbness, radicular pain, and bowel or bladder disturbances. The neurologic examination includes testing muscle strength, evaluating sensation and reflexes (Table 2), and analyzing the gait.

Muscle strength is tested by examining the:

  • L2 nerve root (which supplies the iliopsoas muscle and is tested by hip flexion)
  • L3 nerve root (quadriceps, tested by knee extension)
  • L4 nerve root (tibialis anterior, assessed by evaluating ankle dorsiflexion and inversion at the subtalar joint)
  • L5 nerve root (extensor hallucis longus and extensor digitorum longus, tested by asking the patient to dorsiflex the great toe, then the other toes)
  • S1 nerve root (flexor hallucis longus, flexor digitorum longus, and tendoachilles, tested by asking the patient to plantar-flex the great toe, then the other toes, and then the ankle).

The patient is also asked to walk a few steps on the toes and then on the heels. Inability to toe-walk indicates S1 nerve root involvement; inability to heel-walk may indicate L4 or L5 involvement. If the patient cannot heelwalk, ask him or her to squat; inability to do so indicates L4 problems.6

Radiculopathy. Detecting and locating the cause of radiculopathy may be helpful. In L3–L4 disk herniation, there is pain and paresthesia with numbness and hypalgesia in the anteromedial thigh and the knee. In L4–L5 disk herniation, there is usually involvement of the exiting L5 nerve root, which presents as numbness or paresthesias in the anterolateral calf, great toe, first web space, and medial foot. In L5-S1 disk herniation, the S1 nerve root is involved, presenting as numbness and hypalgesia in the fifth toe, lateral aspect of the foot, sole, and posterolateral calf and thigh.

Reflexes. Exaggerated or decreased reflexes do not always indicate a neurologic abnormality, but reflex asymmetry is significant. The knee-jerk reflex is diminished in L3–L4 nerve root involvement, and the ankle-jerk reflex is diminished with S1 nerve root involvement. The Babinski sign indicates pyramidal tract involvement.

Gait. Observe the patient’s gait as he or she rises and moves to the examining table, to determine whether it is shortened, asymmetrical, or antalgic.7 Also note any foot drop, which may indicate a potentially serious problem (L5 radiculopathy).

What is an adequate examination of the back?

A good back examination can elicit important information about the cause and the extent of back pain. It includes inspection, palpation, and range of movement of the spine along with a detailed neurologic examination.

Inspect it for any deformities, scoliosis, asymmetry, paraspinal muscle spasm, unusual hair growth, listing to one side, decrease or increase in lumbar lordosis, or muscle atrophy or fasciculation.

Palpate it for paraspinal muscle spasm, warmth, and localized bone pain.

Move it. The normal ranges of motion of the lumbar spine are 15 degrees of extension, 40 degrees of flexion, 30 degrees of lateral bending, and 40 degrees of lateral rotation to each side.

Assess it. This includes estimating the tone and nutrition of the muscles, testing their strength (Table 2), examining vibratory or proprioception and pinprick sensation in each dermatome (see below), testing the Achilles and patellar reflexes, and looking for the Babinski sign and clonus. In addition, perform the straight-leg-raising and the cross-straightleg-raising tests, which are positive in most patients with lower lumbar disk herniations.

The femoral stretch test is usually positive in upper lumbar disk herniations (L2–L3, L3– L4). It is performed with the patient in the prone position, with the knee being gradually flexed from full extension. Pain radiating along the anterior aspect of the thigh indicates a positive test.

The examination of the spine must be supplemented with examination of the hip and sacroiliac joints, since back pain may be a referred symptom from any pathology affecting these joints.

 

 

When should patients be referred to a specialist?

Patients should be referred to a neurologist, neurosurgeon, orthopedist, or other specialist if they have cauda equina syndrome; severe or progressive neurologic deficits; infections, tumors, or fractures compressing the spinal cord; or, perhaps, no response to conservative therapy for 4 to 6 weeks for patients with a herniated lumbar disk or 8 to 12 weeks for those with spinal stenosis.

If there is profound motor involvement at the time of the initial evaluation, patients must be promptly given systemic corticosteroids such as methylprednisolone (Medrol) or dexamethasone (Decadron) to decrease spinal cord edema.

Are there signs of psychological distress?

Psychosocial factors can significantly affect pain and functional disability in patients who have low back pain.8,9 These are known as “yellow flags” and are better predictors of treatment outcome than physical factors. 10 Anatomically inappropriate signs may be helpful in identifying psychological distress as a result of or as an amplifier of low back symptoms.

Waddell et al11 proposed five categories of these nonorganic signs. These are:

  • Inappropriate tenderness that is superficial or widespread
  • Pain on simulated axial loading by pressing on the top of the head or simulated spine rotation
  • Distraction signs such as inconsistent performance between straight-leg-raising in the seated position vs the supine position
  • Regional disturbances in strength and sensation that do not correspond with nerve root innervation patterns
  • Overreaction during the physical examination.

The occurrence of any one of the signs is of limited value, but positive findings in three of the five categories suggest psychological distress.11

Which diagnostic studies are useful, cost-effective, and supported by evidence?

Since most abnormalities found on imaging studies are nonspecific, such studies are not necessary during the initial evaluation of acute low back pain unless there are red flags that suggest a more ominous source of pain.

Routine plain lumbosacral spine radiographs with anteroposterior and lateral views may be appropriate initially if the patient has risk factors for vertebral fractures (Table 1), or if the patient does not improve after a course of conservative treatment (usually 4–6 weeks).

Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) is the preferred test if one suspects a tumor, infection, disk pathology, or spinal stenosis.

Computed tomography (CT) shows bony details better than MRI does. Hence, it is preferred when one needs to evaluate bony details (fractures, scoliosis) and when there are contraindications to MRI, as in patients with metal implant devices and those who are claustrophobic (although now there are “open system” MRI machines, in which the feeling of claustrophobia is much less).

MRI and CT should not be ordered routinely, but only for specific indications to answer specific questions, when specific findings would indicate specific treatment.

In most cases, contrast is not needed for CT or MRI to rule out common causes of low back pain, except in cases of suspected intraspinal tumor. Patients with compromised renal function who need contrast for CT need to be hydrated before the scan to lower the risk of contrast-induced nephropathy. These patients are also at higher risk of nephrogenic fibrosing dermopathy when they receive gadolinium contrast for MRI.

Bone scans can be used to look for infections or fractures not noted on plain radiography. However, MRI provides similar or better diagnostic accuracy without radiation.

Electrodiagnostic studies may be used in patients with radiculopathy when clinical examination suggests multilevel root lesions, when symptoms do not match imaging studies, and when patients have breakaway weakness (fluctuating levels of strength in one or more muscle groups).

Other useful diagnostic and laboratory studies may include the erythrocyte sedimentation rate to screen for malignancy and infection when these are suspected, blood culture for osteomyelitis, and bone aspiration and biopsy for histopathologic diagnosis of infection, malignancy, or other lesions.

WHICH TREATMENTS ARE SUPPORTED BY ROBUST EVIDENCE?

The primary treatment of low back pain should be conservative care, reassurance, and education, allowing patients to improve on their own and helping them cope with their predicament.

Limited bed rest. While 2 or 3 days of limited bed rest may help improve symptoms in patients who have acute radiculopathy, several studies have shown that long periods of bed rest are not beneficial for acute or subacute low back pain.12 Encouraging activity modification allows patients with nonspecific back pain or radicular symptoms to remain active while avoiding activities that may aggravate pain and is shown to lead to a more rapid recovery than bed rest.13,14 The most common situations to avoid are prolonged sitting or standing.15 Low-stress aerobic activities, especially walking, are the best early activities.15

Exercise is one of the only evidence-based, effective treatments for chronic low back pain.16 The most commonly prescribed exercises are aimed at retraining the multifidus (a back muscle) and transversus abdominis (a deep abdominal muscle), supplemented with exercises for the pelvic floor and breathing control.

Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs) and acetaminophen (Tylenol) are the drugs of choice for pain control in acute back pain17,18 and are as effective as muscle relaxants or opioids.

Muscle relaxants and opioids offer few advantages over NSAIDs and acetaminophen, except when there is severe muscle spasm associated with the back pain or if acetaminophen or NSAIDs do not relieve the pain. Muscle relaxants and opioids are both associated with more severe adverse effects. If prescribed, they should be used for a short, clearly defined period (1 to 2 weeks).19

Epidural corticosteroids, when used for sciatica, give mild to moderate short-term improvement in leg pain and sensory deficit but no significant long-term functional benefit or reduction in the need for surgery.20

Surgery may be considered in cases of cauda equina syndrome, which is a surgical emergency; severe or progressive neurologic deficit; infections, tumors, and fractures compressing the spinal cord; mechanical instability of the back; and, perhaps, intractable pain (leg pain equal to or greater than back pain) with a positive straight-leg-raising test and no response to conservative therapy.

The term “instability” implies an abnormal motion under physiologic loads. Lumbar instability is defined as translation of more than 4 mm or 10 degrees of angular motion between flexion and extension on an upright lateral radiograph.

Although Weinstein et al21 showed that patients with spinal stenosis who underwent surgery showed significantly more improvement in all primary outcomes than did patients treated nonsurgically, many patients can be effectively treated without surgery.

 

 

WHAT SHOULD BE REMEMBERED ABOUT LOW BACK PAIN?

Low back pain is a common and costly medical condition with only a weak correlation between symptoms and pathologic changes, resulting in a lack of objective clinical findings on which a definitive diagnosis can be based.22 Most back pain has no recognizable cause and is usually regional and musculoskeletal. Back pain as a result of an underlying systemic disease is rare and needs to be excluded by a good history and physical examination. Diagnostic studies are best reserved for specific indications.

Referral to a specialist is warranted when the patient is not responding to conservative treatment, when a progressive neurologic deficit or cauda equina syndrome is noted or suspected, or when the patient has an underlying malignancy, infection, fracture, or spinal instability.

Bed rest is best avoided, and activity within the limits of pain is encouraged. NSAIDs and acetaminophen are usually the drugs of choice for controlling acute low back pain.

Ultimately, the goal for clinicians is to identify serious conditions and to prevent the back pain from becoming chronic pain by promptly identifying the various risk factors.

Low back pain should be understood as a remittent, intermittent predicament of life. Its cause is indeterminate, but its course is predictable. Its link to work-related injury is tenuous and confounded by psychosocial issues, including workers’ compensation. It challenges function, compromises performance, and calls for empathy and understanding.1

In this brief paper, we offer a simple approach to one of the most common human afflictions, based on principles and evidence.

WHY IS BACK PAIN IMPORTANT?

Low back pain is common and affects people of all ages. It is second only to the common cold as the most common affliction of mankind, and it is among the leading complaints bringing patients to physicians’ offices. Its lifetime prevalence exceeds 70% in most industrialized countries, with an annual incidence of 15% to 20% in the United States.

Its social and economic impact is substantial. It is the most frequent cause of disability for people under age 45. In 2005, the mean age- and sex-adjusted medical expenditure among respondents with spine problems was $6,096 vs $3,516 in those without spine problems, and it had increased by 65% (adjusted for inflation) from 1997 to 2005.2

WHAT ARE THE GOALS AND PRINCIPLES OF MANAGING LOW BACK PAIN?

The goals of management for patients with low back pain are to:

  • Decrease the pain
  • Restore mobility
  • Hasten recovery so the patient can resume normal daily activities as soon as possible
  • Prevent development of a chronic recurrent condition: low back pain is considered acute when it persists for less than 6 weeks, subacute between 6 weeks and 3 months, and chronic when it lasts longer than 3 months
  • Restore and preserve physical and financial independence and comfort.

Principles of management

  • Most back pain has no recognizable cause and is therefore termed “mechanical” or “musculoskeletal.”
  • Underlying systemic disease is rare.
  • Most episodes of back pain are unpreventable.
  • Confounding psychosocial issues are often contributory, important, and relevant.
  • A careful, informed history and physical examination are invaluable; diagnostic studies, however technologically sophisticated, are never a substitute.
  • Defer diagnostic studies for specific indications.
  • Refer patients only if they have underlying disease or progressive neurologic dysfunction, or if they do not respond to conservative management.
  • Encouragement of activity is benign and perhaps salutary for back pain and is desirable for general physical and mental health; there is only scant evidence to support bed rest.3
  • Few if any treatments have been proven effective for low back pain.
  • Talking to the patient and explaining the issues involved are critical to successful management.4

INITIAL CONSIDERATIONS WHEN EVALUATING A PATIENT

When encountering a patient with back pain, the initial consideration is whether the symptoms are regional—ie, local, mechanical, and musculoskeletal—or if they reflect a systemic disease. It is also important to look for evidence of social or psychological distress that may amplify, prolong, or confound the pain or the patient’s perception of it.

What are the clues to a systemic process?

Red flags of a serious, systemic cause of low back pain are presented in Table 1. Other symptoms that may indicate a systemic cause include night pain (also seen with disk disease and neurocompression), pain with recumbency (malignancy), back pain with morning stiffness lasting for more than 1 hour (spondyloarthropathy), cauda equina syndrome (overflow incontinence, saddle anesthesia, and paraparesis), and other systemic and constitutional symptoms.

Does the patient have a regional low back syndrome?

Regional low back syndromes account for 90% of the causes of low back pain. They are usually mechanical in origin.

Regional back pain is due to overuse of a normal mechanical structure (muscle strain, “lumbago”) or is secondary to trauma, deformity, or degeneration of an anatomical structure (herniated nucleus pulposus, fracture, and spondyloarthropathy, including facet joint arthritis). Chronic regional back syndromes include osteoarthritis of the spine (ie, spondylosis), spinal stenosis, and facet joint arthropathy.

Characteristically, mechanical disorders are exacerbated by certain physical activities, such as lifting, and are relieved by others, such as assuming a supine position.

 

 

Does the patient have sciatica or another nerve root compression syndrome?

The obvious manifestation of nerve root irritation is usually sciatica, a sharp or burning pain radiating down the posterior or lateral aspect of the leg usually to the foot or the ankle and often associated with numbness or paresthesias. The pain is sometimes aggravated by coughing, sneezing, or the Valsalva maneuver. It is most commonly seen in lumbar disk herniation, cauda equina syndrome, and spinal stenosis.

Might the patient have spinal stenosis?

More than 20% of people over age 60 have radiographic evidence of lumbar spinal canal stenosis, even if they have no symptoms.5 For this reason, the diagnosis of spinal stenosis as a cause of low back pain must be based on the history and physical examination.

The classic history of spinal stenosis is that of neurogenic claudication (“pseudoclaudication”), which is pain that occurs in the legs after walking or prolonged standing and is relieved with sitting. It may sometimes be associated with a varying and transient neurologic deficit. Lumbar flexion increases and lumbar extension decreases the cross-sectional area of the spinal canal—hence, the relief of symptoms of spinal stenosis on stooping or bending forward. Pain is commonly perceived in the back, buttock, or thigh and is elicited by prolonged lumbar extension.

On neurologic examination, about 50% of patients with spinal stenosis have a deficit in vibratory sensibility, temperature sensitivity, or muscle strength. The nerve root involved is most commonly L5, followed by S1 and L4.

Many patients have balance disturbance (wide-based gait or Romberg sign), particularly later in the course of the disorder, with normal cerebellar signs (“pseudocerebellar” presentation).

Patients with bilateral hip osteoarthritis may present with similar symptoms of buttock or thigh pain, which can be distinguished with the above clinical examination. Rotation of the hip is painful in osteoarthritis but not in spinal stenosis. If both conditions overlap, injection of a steroid or lidocaine in the painful hip should decrease the pain associated with hip osteoarthritis.

Does the patient have evidence of neurologic compromise?

Assessment of neurologic compromise requires a thorough history for evidence of muscle weakness, gait disturbances, paresthesias, numbness, radicular pain, and bowel or bladder disturbances. The neurologic examination includes testing muscle strength, evaluating sensation and reflexes (Table 2), and analyzing the gait.

Muscle strength is tested by examining the:

  • L2 nerve root (which supplies the iliopsoas muscle and is tested by hip flexion)
  • L3 nerve root (quadriceps, tested by knee extension)
  • L4 nerve root (tibialis anterior, assessed by evaluating ankle dorsiflexion and inversion at the subtalar joint)
  • L5 nerve root (extensor hallucis longus and extensor digitorum longus, tested by asking the patient to dorsiflex the great toe, then the other toes)
  • S1 nerve root (flexor hallucis longus, flexor digitorum longus, and tendoachilles, tested by asking the patient to plantar-flex the great toe, then the other toes, and then the ankle).

The patient is also asked to walk a few steps on the toes and then on the heels. Inability to toe-walk indicates S1 nerve root involvement; inability to heel-walk may indicate L4 or L5 involvement. If the patient cannot heelwalk, ask him or her to squat; inability to do so indicates L4 problems.6

Radiculopathy. Detecting and locating the cause of radiculopathy may be helpful. In L3–L4 disk herniation, there is pain and paresthesia with numbness and hypalgesia in the anteromedial thigh and the knee. In L4–L5 disk herniation, there is usually involvement of the exiting L5 nerve root, which presents as numbness or paresthesias in the anterolateral calf, great toe, first web space, and medial foot. In L5-S1 disk herniation, the S1 nerve root is involved, presenting as numbness and hypalgesia in the fifth toe, lateral aspect of the foot, sole, and posterolateral calf and thigh.

Reflexes. Exaggerated or decreased reflexes do not always indicate a neurologic abnormality, but reflex asymmetry is significant. The knee-jerk reflex is diminished in L3–L4 nerve root involvement, and the ankle-jerk reflex is diminished with S1 nerve root involvement. The Babinski sign indicates pyramidal tract involvement.

Gait. Observe the patient’s gait as he or she rises and moves to the examining table, to determine whether it is shortened, asymmetrical, or antalgic.7 Also note any foot drop, which may indicate a potentially serious problem (L5 radiculopathy).

What is an adequate examination of the back?

A good back examination can elicit important information about the cause and the extent of back pain. It includes inspection, palpation, and range of movement of the spine along with a detailed neurologic examination.

Inspect it for any deformities, scoliosis, asymmetry, paraspinal muscle spasm, unusual hair growth, listing to one side, decrease or increase in lumbar lordosis, or muscle atrophy or fasciculation.

Palpate it for paraspinal muscle spasm, warmth, and localized bone pain.

Move it. The normal ranges of motion of the lumbar spine are 15 degrees of extension, 40 degrees of flexion, 30 degrees of lateral bending, and 40 degrees of lateral rotation to each side.

Assess it. This includes estimating the tone and nutrition of the muscles, testing their strength (Table 2), examining vibratory or proprioception and pinprick sensation in each dermatome (see below), testing the Achilles and patellar reflexes, and looking for the Babinski sign and clonus. In addition, perform the straight-leg-raising and the cross-straightleg-raising tests, which are positive in most patients with lower lumbar disk herniations.

The femoral stretch test is usually positive in upper lumbar disk herniations (L2–L3, L3– L4). It is performed with the patient in the prone position, with the knee being gradually flexed from full extension. Pain radiating along the anterior aspect of the thigh indicates a positive test.

The examination of the spine must be supplemented with examination of the hip and sacroiliac joints, since back pain may be a referred symptom from any pathology affecting these joints.

 

 

When should patients be referred to a specialist?

Patients should be referred to a neurologist, neurosurgeon, orthopedist, or other specialist if they have cauda equina syndrome; severe or progressive neurologic deficits; infections, tumors, or fractures compressing the spinal cord; or, perhaps, no response to conservative therapy for 4 to 6 weeks for patients with a herniated lumbar disk or 8 to 12 weeks for those with spinal stenosis.

If there is profound motor involvement at the time of the initial evaluation, patients must be promptly given systemic corticosteroids such as methylprednisolone (Medrol) or dexamethasone (Decadron) to decrease spinal cord edema.

Are there signs of psychological distress?

Psychosocial factors can significantly affect pain and functional disability in patients who have low back pain.8,9 These are known as “yellow flags” and are better predictors of treatment outcome than physical factors. 10 Anatomically inappropriate signs may be helpful in identifying psychological distress as a result of or as an amplifier of low back symptoms.

Waddell et al11 proposed five categories of these nonorganic signs. These are:

  • Inappropriate tenderness that is superficial or widespread
  • Pain on simulated axial loading by pressing on the top of the head or simulated spine rotation
  • Distraction signs such as inconsistent performance between straight-leg-raising in the seated position vs the supine position
  • Regional disturbances in strength and sensation that do not correspond with nerve root innervation patterns
  • Overreaction during the physical examination.

The occurrence of any one of the signs is of limited value, but positive findings in three of the five categories suggest psychological distress.11

Which diagnostic studies are useful, cost-effective, and supported by evidence?

Since most abnormalities found on imaging studies are nonspecific, such studies are not necessary during the initial evaluation of acute low back pain unless there are red flags that suggest a more ominous source of pain.

Routine plain lumbosacral spine radiographs with anteroposterior and lateral views may be appropriate initially if the patient has risk factors for vertebral fractures (Table 1), or if the patient does not improve after a course of conservative treatment (usually 4–6 weeks).

Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) is the preferred test if one suspects a tumor, infection, disk pathology, or spinal stenosis.

Computed tomography (CT) shows bony details better than MRI does. Hence, it is preferred when one needs to evaluate bony details (fractures, scoliosis) and when there are contraindications to MRI, as in patients with metal implant devices and those who are claustrophobic (although now there are “open system” MRI machines, in which the feeling of claustrophobia is much less).

MRI and CT should not be ordered routinely, but only for specific indications to answer specific questions, when specific findings would indicate specific treatment.

In most cases, contrast is not needed for CT or MRI to rule out common causes of low back pain, except in cases of suspected intraspinal tumor. Patients with compromised renal function who need contrast for CT need to be hydrated before the scan to lower the risk of contrast-induced nephropathy. These patients are also at higher risk of nephrogenic fibrosing dermopathy when they receive gadolinium contrast for MRI.

Bone scans can be used to look for infections or fractures not noted on plain radiography. However, MRI provides similar or better diagnostic accuracy without radiation.

Electrodiagnostic studies may be used in patients with radiculopathy when clinical examination suggests multilevel root lesions, when symptoms do not match imaging studies, and when patients have breakaway weakness (fluctuating levels of strength in one or more muscle groups).

Other useful diagnostic and laboratory studies may include the erythrocyte sedimentation rate to screen for malignancy and infection when these are suspected, blood culture for osteomyelitis, and bone aspiration and biopsy for histopathologic diagnosis of infection, malignancy, or other lesions.

WHICH TREATMENTS ARE SUPPORTED BY ROBUST EVIDENCE?

The primary treatment of low back pain should be conservative care, reassurance, and education, allowing patients to improve on their own and helping them cope with their predicament.

Limited bed rest. While 2 or 3 days of limited bed rest may help improve symptoms in patients who have acute radiculopathy, several studies have shown that long periods of bed rest are not beneficial for acute or subacute low back pain.12 Encouraging activity modification allows patients with nonspecific back pain or radicular symptoms to remain active while avoiding activities that may aggravate pain and is shown to lead to a more rapid recovery than bed rest.13,14 The most common situations to avoid are prolonged sitting or standing.15 Low-stress aerobic activities, especially walking, are the best early activities.15

Exercise is one of the only evidence-based, effective treatments for chronic low back pain.16 The most commonly prescribed exercises are aimed at retraining the multifidus (a back muscle) and transversus abdominis (a deep abdominal muscle), supplemented with exercises for the pelvic floor and breathing control.

Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs) and acetaminophen (Tylenol) are the drugs of choice for pain control in acute back pain17,18 and are as effective as muscle relaxants or opioids.

Muscle relaxants and opioids offer few advantages over NSAIDs and acetaminophen, except when there is severe muscle spasm associated with the back pain or if acetaminophen or NSAIDs do not relieve the pain. Muscle relaxants and opioids are both associated with more severe adverse effects. If prescribed, they should be used for a short, clearly defined period (1 to 2 weeks).19

Epidural corticosteroids, when used for sciatica, give mild to moderate short-term improvement in leg pain and sensory deficit but no significant long-term functional benefit or reduction in the need for surgery.20

Surgery may be considered in cases of cauda equina syndrome, which is a surgical emergency; severe or progressive neurologic deficit; infections, tumors, and fractures compressing the spinal cord; mechanical instability of the back; and, perhaps, intractable pain (leg pain equal to or greater than back pain) with a positive straight-leg-raising test and no response to conservative therapy.

The term “instability” implies an abnormal motion under physiologic loads. Lumbar instability is defined as translation of more than 4 mm or 10 degrees of angular motion between flexion and extension on an upright lateral radiograph.

Although Weinstein et al21 showed that patients with spinal stenosis who underwent surgery showed significantly more improvement in all primary outcomes than did patients treated nonsurgically, many patients can be effectively treated without surgery.

 

 

WHAT SHOULD BE REMEMBERED ABOUT LOW BACK PAIN?

Low back pain is a common and costly medical condition with only a weak correlation between symptoms and pathologic changes, resulting in a lack of objective clinical findings on which a definitive diagnosis can be based.22 Most back pain has no recognizable cause and is usually regional and musculoskeletal. Back pain as a result of an underlying systemic disease is rare and needs to be excluded by a good history and physical examination. Diagnostic studies are best reserved for specific indications.

Referral to a specialist is warranted when the patient is not responding to conservative treatment, when a progressive neurologic deficit or cauda equina syndrome is noted or suspected, or when the patient has an underlying malignancy, infection, fracture, or spinal instability.

Bed rest is best avoided, and activity within the limits of pain is encouraged. NSAIDs and acetaminophen are usually the drugs of choice for controlling acute low back pain.

Ultimately, the goal for clinicians is to identify serious conditions and to prevent the back pain from becoming chronic pain by promptly identifying the various risk factors.

References
  1. Hadler NM. Low back pain. In:Koopman WJ, editor. Arthritis and Allied Conditions. 14th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Lipincott Williams and Wilkins; 2001:20262041.
  2. Martin BI, Deyo RA, Mirza SK, et al. Expenditures and health status among adults with back and neck problems. JAMA 2008; 299:656664.
  3. NASS Task Force on clinical guidelines. Phase III clinical guidelines for multidisciplinary spine care specialists. Unremitting low back pain. 1st ed. Burr Ridge, IL: North American Spine Society; 2000.
  4. Cailliet R. Low back pain. In: Soft Tissue Pain and Disability. 3rd ed. Philadelphia, PA: FA Davis; 1996:101170.
  5. Jensen MC, Brant-Zawadzki MN, Obuchowski N, Modic MT, Malkasian D, Ross JS. Magnetic resonance imaging of the lumbar spine in people without back pain. N Engl J Med 1994; 331:6973.
  6. A gency for Health Care Policy and Research. Acute low back pain problems in adults: assessment and treatment. http://www.chirobase.org/07Strategy/AHCPR/ahcprclinician.html. Accessed March 2009.
  7. Cohen R, Chopra P, Upshur C. Primary care work-up of acute and chronic symptoms. Geriatrics 2001; 56:2637.
  8. Pincus T, Burton AK, Vogel S, Field AP. A systematic review of psychological factors as predictors of chronicity/disability in prospective cohorts of low back pain. Spine 2002; 27:E109E120.
  9. Carragee EJ. Clinical practice: persistent low back pain. N Engl J Med 2005; 352:18911898.
  10. Pincus T, Vlaeyen JW, Kendall NA, Von Korff MR, Kalauokalani DA, Reis S. Cognitive-behavioral therapy and psychosocial factors in low back pain: directions for the future. Spine 2002; 27:E133E138.
  11. Waddell G, McCulloch JA, Kummel E, Venner RM. Nonorganic physical signs in low back pain. Spine 1980; 5:117125.
  12. Hagen KB, Hilde G, Jamtvedt G, Winnem M. Bed rest for acute low-back pain and sciatica. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2004; 4:CD001254.
  13. Patel AT, Ogle AA. Diagnosis and management of acute low back pain. Am Fam Physician 2000; 61:17791790.
  14. Grotle M, Brox JI, Glomsrød B, Lønn JH, Vøllestad NK. Prognostic factors in first-time care seekers due to acute low back pain. Eur J Pain 2007; 11:290298.
  15. Atlas SJ, Deyo RA. Evaluating and managing acute low back pain in the primary care setting. J Gen Intern Med 2001; 16:120131.
  16. Maher CG. Effective physical treatment for low back pain. Orthop Clin North Am 2004; 35:5764.
  17. Chou R, Qaseem A, Snow V, et al. Diagnosis and treatment of low back pain: a joint clinical practice guideline from the American College of Physicians and the American Pain Society. Ann Intern Med 2007; 147:478491.
  18. Chou R, Huffman LHAmerican Pain Society. Medications for acute and chronic low back pain: a review of the evidence for an American Pain Society/American College of Physicians clinical practice guideline. Ann Intern Med 2007; 147:505514.
  19. Cherkin DC, Wheeler KJ, Barlow W, Deyo RA. Medication use for low back pain in primary care. Spine 1998; 23:607614.
  20. Carette S, Leclaire R, Marcoux S, et al. Epidural corticosteroid injections for sciatica due to herniated nucleus pulposus. N Engl J Med 1997; 336:16341640.
  21. Weinstein JN, Tosteson TD, Lurie JD, et al. Surgical versus non-surgical therapy for lumbar spinal stenosis. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:794810.
  22. Deyo RA, Rainville J, Kent DL. What can the history and physical examination tell us about low back pain? JAMA 1992; 268:760765.
References
  1. Hadler NM. Low back pain. In:Koopman WJ, editor. Arthritis and Allied Conditions. 14th ed. Philadelphia, PA: Lipincott Williams and Wilkins; 2001:20262041.
  2. Martin BI, Deyo RA, Mirza SK, et al. Expenditures and health status among adults with back and neck problems. JAMA 2008; 299:656664.
  3. NASS Task Force on clinical guidelines. Phase III clinical guidelines for multidisciplinary spine care specialists. Unremitting low back pain. 1st ed. Burr Ridge, IL: North American Spine Society; 2000.
  4. Cailliet R. Low back pain. In: Soft Tissue Pain and Disability. 3rd ed. Philadelphia, PA: FA Davis; 1996:101170.
  5. Jensen MC, Brant-Zawadzki MN, Obuchowski N, Modic MT, Malkasian D, Ross JS. Magnetic resonance imaging of the lumbar spine in people without back pain. N Engl J Med 1994; 331:6973.
  6. A gency for Health Care Policy and Research. Acute low back pain problems in adults: assessment and treatment. http://www.chirobase.org/07Strategy/AHCPR/ahcprclinician.html. Accessed March 2009.
  7. Cohen R, Chopra P, Upshur C. Primary care work-up of acute and chronic symptoms. Geriatrics 2001; 56:2637.
  8. Pincus T, Burton AK, Vogel S, Field AP. A systematic review of psychological factors as predictors of chronicity/disability in prospective cohorts of low back pain. Spine 2002; 27:E109E120.
  9. Carragee EJ. Clinical practice: persistent low back pain. N Engl J Med 2005; 352:18911898.
  10. Pincus T, Vlaeyen JW, Kendall NA, Von Korff MR, Kalauokalani DA, Reis S. Cognitive-behavioral therapy and psychosocial factors in low back pain: directions for the future. Spine 2002; 27:E133E138.
  11. Waddell G, McCulloch JA, Kummel E, Venner RM. Nonorganic physical signs in low back pain. Spine 1980; 5:117125.
  12. Hagen KB, Hilde G, Jamtvedt G, Winnem M. Bed rest for acute low-back pain and sciatica. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2004; 4:CD001254.
  13. Patel AT, Ogle AA. Diagnosis and management of acute low back pain. Am Fam Physician 2000; 61:17791790.
  14. Grotle M, Brox JI, Glomsrød B, Lønn JH, Vøllestad NK. Prognostic factors in first-time care seekers due to acute low back pain. Eur J Pain 2007; 11:290298.
  15. Atlas SJ, Deyo RA. Evaluating and managing acute low back pain in the primary care setting. J Gen Intern Med 2001; 16:120131.
  16. Maher CG. Effective physical treatment for low back pain. Orthop Clin North Am 2004; 35:5764.
  17. Chou R, Qaseem A, Snow V, et al. Diagnosis and treatment of low back pain: a joint clinical practice guideline from the American College of Physicians and the American Pain Society. Ann Intern Med 2007; 147:478491.
  18. Chou R, Huffman LHAmerican Pain Society. Medications for acute and chronic low back pain: a review of the evidence for an American Pain Society/American College of Physicians clinical practice guideline. Ann Intern Med 2007; 147:505514.
  19. Cherkin DC, Wheeler KJ, Barlow W, Deyo RA. Medication use for low back pain in primary care. Spine 1998; 23:607614.
  20. Carette S, Leclaire R, Marcoux S, et al. Epidural corticosteroid injections for sciatica due to herniated nucleus pulposus. N Engl J Med 1997; 336:16341640.
  21. Weinstein JN, Tosteson TD, Lurie JD, et al. Surgical versus non-surgical therapy for lumbar spinal stenosis. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:794810.
  22. Deyo RA, Rainville J, Kent DL. What can the history and physical examination tell us about low back pain? JAMA 1992; 268:760765.
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 76(7)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 76(7)
Page Number
393-399
Page Number
393-399
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Back pain made simple: An approach based on principles and evidence
Display Headline
Back pain made simple: An approach based on principles and evidence
Sections
Inside the Article

KEY POINTS

  • Most back pain has no recognizable cause and is therefore termed “mechanical” or “musculoskeletal.” Underlying systemic disease is rare.
  • Most episodes of back pain are not preventable.
  • Confounding psychosocial issues are common.
  • A careful, informed history and physical examination are invaluable; diagnostic studies, however sophisticated, are never a substitute. Defer them for specific indications.
  • Refer patients only if they have underlying disease or progressive neurologic dysfunction or do not respond to conservative management.
  • Encouragement of activity is benign and perhaps salutary for back pain and is desirable for general physical and mental health. Evidence to support bed rest is scant.
  • Few if any treatments have been proven effective for low back pain.
Disallow All Ads
Alternative CME
Article PDF Media